HomeMy WebLinkAboutConstruction project manual-2000/Media center I
WOLD�TECTS AND ENGINEERS
® 305 ST.PETER STREET
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FAX: 612.223.5646 TEL: 612.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUITE 500
ELGIN,IL 60120
FAX: 847.608.2654 TEL: 847.608.2600
1
ORONO MEDIA CENTER
REMODEL
OLD MIDDLE SCHOOL
INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT #278
SHAKOPEE MINNESOTA
SO A
PROJECT MANUAL/
DETAILS OF
t CONSTRUCTION
BOOK 1 OF 2
March 21 , 2000
Set No. Project No. 99132
CP-2
' W 0 L D A R C H I T E C T S A N D E N G I N E E R S
PROJECT MANUAL
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR:
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
MEDIA CENTER CONVERSION
685 N.OLD CRYSTAL BAY ROAD
ORONO,MINNESOTA 55356-0046
INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT#278
ORONO,MINNESOTA 55356-0046
Bid Time: 2:00 p.m
Bid Date: April 4,2000
Bid Place: District Office
685 N.Old Crystal Bay Road
Orono,Minnesota 55356-0046
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION PAGE No.99132-CP2
TITLE PAGE
PROJECT TITLE AND LOCATION: ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
MEDIA CENTER CONVERSION
685 N.OLD CRYSTAL BAY ROAD
ORONO,MINNESOTA 55356-0046
OWNER: INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT#278
ARCHITECTS: Wold Architects and Engineers
305 St.Peter Street
St.Paul,Minnesota 55102
Tel.(651)227-7773
MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Wold Architects and Engineers
305 St.Peter Street
Saint Paul,Minnesota 55102
Tel.651-227-7773
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Wold Architects and Engineers
305 St.Peter Street
Saint Paul,Minnesota 55102
Tel.651-227-7773
DATE: March 21,2000
TITLE PAGE No.99132-CP2
PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL MEDIA CENTER CONVERSION
INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT#278
Wold Architects and Engineers I hereby certify that this plan,specification or report was prepared by me
or under my direct supervision, and that I am a duly Licensed Architect
under the laws of the State of Minnesota.
1�r4�0� March 21 2000
ZOSS—
ApAuie Date Registration
Wold Architects and Engineers I hereby certify that this plan,specification or report was prepared by
Mechanical Engineer me or under my direct supervision, and that I am a duly Licensed
Professional Engineer d laws of the State of Minnesota.
March 21 2000 2-1f91
Si a Date Registration
Wold Architects and Engineers I hereby certify that this plan,specification or report was prepared by
Electrical Engineer me or under my direct supervision, and that I am a duly Licensed
Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota.
March 21 2000 98/$
Signature Date Registration
PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS No.99132-CP2
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section No. Title
Project Identification Page
Title Page
Professional Certifications
Table of Contents
Bidding Requirements
00031 Call for Bids
00100 Instructions to Bidders
00305 Bid Form
00500 List of Contract Forms
Conditions of the Contract
00700 General Conditions
00800 Supplementary Conditions
Division One
01014 Bid Division Descriptions
01025 Application for Payment
01041 Schedules
01045 Cutting and Patching
01200 Project Meetings
01300 Submittals
01400 Quality Control—Testing Services
01500 Temporary Facilities
01630 Substitutions and Product Options
01700 Contract Closeout
01710 Cleaning Up
01720 Project Record Documents
01730 Operating,Maintenance and Warranty Data
Division Two Not Used
Division Three
03100• Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
03600 Grout
Division Four
04100 Mortar
04150 Masonry Accessories
04200 Unit Masonry
TABLE OF CONTENTS No.99132-CP2
Section No. Title
Division Five
05100 Structural Metal Framing
05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing
05500 Metal Fabrications
Division Six i
06100 Carpentry
06401 Architectural Woodwork and Casework
Division Seven
07210 Building Insulation
07240 Firestopping
07520 Built-Up Roofing
07900 Joint Sealants
Division Eight
08100 Steel Doors and Frames
08200 Wood Doors
08305 Access Panels
08521 Aluminum Windows,Store Front/Entrances and Curtainwall
08700 Finish Hardware
08800 Glazing
Division Nine
09250 Gypsum Board
09290 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum and Concrete Units
09510 Acoustical Ceilings
09650 Resilient Flooring
09680 Carpet
09900 Painting
09960 Wallcovering
Division Ten
10100 Visual Display Boards
10520 Fire Protection Specialties
Division Eleven—Fourteen Not Used
Division Fifteen See Mechanical Specifications
Division Sixteen See ElectSpecificationscal
TABLE OF CONTENTS No.99132-CP2
00031 - CALL FOR BIDS
INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT#278
Orono Public Schools
685 Old Crystal Bay Road North
Long Lake,MN 55356-0046
CALL FOR BIDS
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Sealed proposals will be received for:
Existing Orono Middle School-New Media Center
Bid Package 1: General Construction,Mechanical &Electrical
Orono,Minnesota
in accordance with Construction Documents prepared by Wold Architects and Engineers,
305 St. Peter Street,St. Paul,Minnesota 55102.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Bid package scope includes General Construction,Mechanical
and Electrical.
BASIS OF BIDS: Separate Prime Bids will be received for labor and materials as outlined
in the Bid Division Descriptions described in Section 01014.
BID DATE AND LOCATION: Bids shall be on the forms provided. Envelopes must be
sealed and clearly marked "General Construction, Mechanical and Electrical (Existing
Orono Middle School-Media Center)"with the name and address of the Contractor and the
date and hour of the bid opening. Bids shall be delivered to: Orono School District Office
at 685 Old Crystal Bay Road North, Long Lake, Minnesota 55356. Bids will be received
until 2:00 p.m. local time on Tuesday, April 4, 2000, at which time they will be publicly
opened and read aloud. Bids received after the designated time will be returned unopened.
BID SECURITY: Each bid shall be accompanied by Bid Security in form of certified
check, cashier's check or bid bond in amount of five (5) percent of Base Bid submitted,
made payable to Owner, as guarantee that Bidder will, if awarded, enter into Contract in
accordance with Contract Documents and submitted Bid.
EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS: Drawings, Project Manual, and other Contract
Documents may be examined at Offices of Constriction Manager, Architect and at
following locations:
Minneapolis Builders Exchange Construction Market Data Plan Room
P
1123 Glenwood Avenue (Construction Bulletin)
Minneapolis,MN 55405 9443 Science Center Drive
New Hope,MN 55428
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00031 - 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
00031 - CALL FOR BIDS
Builders Exchange of St.Paul
445 Farrington Street St. Cloud Builders Exchange
St.Paul,MN 55103 30 South Sixth Avenue
St. Cloud,MN 56301
F.W.Dodge Plan Room
7600 Parklawn Avenue,Suite 352
Minneapolis,MN 55435
PROCUREMENT OF DOCUMENTS: Prime Bidders may secure up to two sets of
Bidding and Contract Documents at Office of Construction Manager, Kraus-Anderson
Construction Company-Midwest Division, 8625 Rendova Street NE, P.O.Box 158, Circle
Pines,Minnesota 55014,phone 612//86-7711,upon deposit of$25.00 per set. Deposit will
be refunded if documents are returned to Construction Manager in good condition, within
10 days after Bid Opening, and Planholder has submitted a Bid.
TIME OF COMPLETION: Owner requires Work to be substantially complete on or before
August 18,2000. Bids shall reflect all costs necessary to meet this schedule requirement.
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: Contractor shall provide Performance
Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract
Sum.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS: Owner reserves the right to reject a Bid which is in
any way incomplete or irregular or to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received,
and accept a Bid,which in the Owner's judgment is in the Owner's best interests.
EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE:
Examination of Documents: Bidders shall carefully examine entire contents of Contract
Documents prepared for the Work to become thoroughly familiar with all requirements.
Examination of the Site: Bidders shall visit the construction site to obtain first-hand
knowledge of existing conditions, including existing utilities and services, obstacles which
may be encountered and all other conditions relative to the Work to be performed.
Additional Comvensation: Contractors shall not receive extra payments for conditions
which can be determined by examining the site and the Contract Documents.
Bids requested by: Independent School District#278
END OF DOCUMENT
Publish:
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00031 - 2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100 -INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. NOTICE FOR BIDS: Separate Prime Bids will be received for Existing Orono
Middle School - New Media Center, Bid Package 1: General Construction,
Mechanical and Electrical.
2. RECEIVING AND OPENING OF BIDS: Bids will be received as stated in
Advertisement for Bids and will be opened immediately after the bid closing hour at a
location designated by Owner.
The Owner may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance
with provisions herein and may waive any informalities or reject any and all bids.
3. MODIFICATION OF BIDS: Oral, telephone or telegraphic bids or modifications to
bids will not be considered.
4. CONTRACTS: Bids will be received and the project will be constructed under
multiple prime contracts as outlined in the Bid Package Descriptions.
5. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ON FILE: Bidding requirements, drawings
and specifications are on file at the offices of the Architect and Construction
Manager, and at the following locations:
Minneapolis Builders Exchange F.W. Dodge Plan Room
1123 Glenwood Avenue 7600 Parklawn Avenue, Suite 352
Minneapolis,MN 55405 Minneapolis,MN 55435
Telephone: (612) 381-2620 Telephone: (612) 831-5700
Builders Exchange of St. Paul Construction Market Data(CMD)
445 Farrington Street 9443 Science Center Drive
St. Paul,MN 55103 New Hope,MN 55428
Telephone: (651) 224-7545 Telephone: (612) 537-7730
Duluth Builders Exchange St. Cloud Builders Exchange
802 Garfield Avenue 30 South Sixth Avenue
Duluth,,MN,55802. St;C18ud3.MN 56301—
Telephone:
6301 .Telephone: (218) 722-2836 Telephone: (302) 252-5832
6. INQ UIR]ES REGARDING PROJECT-DISCREPANCIES OR AMBIGUITIES: All
inquiries, requests for clarifications, requests for consideration of materials not
specified and similar questions shall be directed to Architect, in writing.
Discrepancies or ambiguities in, or omissions from, the drawings, specifications or
other Contract Documents, or should there be doubt as to their meaning, an
interpretation shall be requested from the Architect, in writing. All inquiries, requests
for clarification, requests for consideration of materials and products, must be
received by Architect seven days prior to bid date and bid hour(unless longer periods
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100-INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
are specified elsewhere in the specifications for certain work). It is the bidder's (and
Contractor's) responsibility to bring all discrepancies, ambiguities, omissions or
matters in need of clarification to the attention of the Architect for interpretation and
decision.
7. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS: Replies to inquiries, requests for
interpretations or clarifications and requests for consideration of materials which
involve or provide information that is not already a part of bidding information will
be contained in addenda and shall become a part of Contract Documents and
incorporated in all bids submitted.
All bidders, submitting labor and/or supply bids, are responsible to ascertain what
addenda have been issued prior to bid date, examining the addenda and determining
the affect of addenda provisions on their Bid Division.
Interpretations, clarifications, modifications and supplemental instructions in form of
written addenda will be provided to all prime contract bidders on record at the
Construction Manager's office, and to Builders Exchanges where plans are on file.
Architect and Owner will not be responsible for or honor any claims resulting from,
or alleged to be the result of, misunderstanding by the bidder(or Contractor) of verbal
discussion of the Project conditions prior to receiving bids. All verbal comments
made during the bidding period are subject to inclusion in addenda; otherwise, they
shall not be binding on Owner or Architect.
During construction, discrepancies, ambiguities and intent not clarified by addenda
will be subject to interpretation of Architect only, and work shall be provided in
accordance with Architect's interpretations.
Bidders shall state on bid form the number of addenda received.
8. PLAN DEPOSIT FOR BIDDERS ON PRIME CONTRACTS: Prime Contract
Bidders may obtain up to two sets of drawings and specifications for the entire Project
from the Construction Manager's office, upon making a deposit of a check in the
amount of..$25.00 per set. The full deposit for the fust set of drawings and
specifications will be refunded to Bidders provided the drawings and specifications
are returned in good condition within ten(10) days after the opening of bids.
9. PLANS FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL DEALERS & QUANTITY
SURVEYORS: A complete set of drawings and specifications may be obtained from
the Construction Manager's office, for the deposit sum stated in #8 above. Said
documents shall remain the property of,and shall be returned to the Architect.
Individual drawings may be purchased at a rate of $1.50 per print. Photocopies of
individual pages of specifications and of detail sheets may be purchased at the rate of
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100-INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
$.15 each. The cost of these prints and pages will not be refunded. Any individual
sheets or pages issued will be used at the Bidder's risk and shall not relieve the Bidder
from thoroughly examining the complete set of drawings and specifications, including
the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and
all other Contract Documents.
Subcontract bidders, suppliers or other interested persons must select the sheets they
desire. Architect nor the Construction Manager will not assist in determining
applicable parts of the documents.
10. OBLIGATION OF BIDDER - EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS & SITE: Each
bidder (including subcontract bidder where appropriate) is responsible to visit the site
and to fully inform himself and record his own investigations as to the extent of the
Work, the extent of the work performed by other contractors under other construction
packages, conditions under which the Work is to be performed, existing buildings and
streets, conditions of the area, existing utilities and other features, type of soil,
available facilities and difficulties that may be encountered in connection therewith,
and other relevant items which will affect his bid or the Work.
Prior to submitting a bid, each bidder is required to examine all of the bidding
requirements, all Contract Documents, all drawings and specifications for the Project
(including those primarily for other Subcontracts), become thoroughly familiar with
the scope of the Project and all factors and items of work which will affect his bid or
the Work, whether shown or specified in documents primarily for Work of others or
Work of this Contract.
No extras will be allowed the Contractor as a result of misunderstanding of the extent
of scope of the Work as a result of his failure to study and record his own findings.
Submission of a bid shall be proof that such examinations have been made and that
bidder has recorded his own investigation and has become thoroughly familiar with
all contract documents (including all addenda). The failure or omissions of any
bidder to examine any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve any
bidder from any obligation in respect to his bid.
11. CONDITIONS OF WORK: Each bidder must inform himself fully of conditions
relating to the construction of the Project and the availability and employment of
labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of his obligation to
furnish all materials and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of his contract.
Contractor, in carrying out his work, must employ such methods or means as will not
cause any interruption of or interference with the Work of any other Contractor.
12. PREPARATION OF BID: Submit bids to Owner in accordance with the following
requirements:
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100-3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100-INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. Submit bid in duplicate on the prescribed form, which is furnished with the
specification, with full name and address of the bidder.
B. Completely fill in all blank spaces on the Bid Form, in ink or typewriter, in both
words and figures.
C. Sign in longhand, executed by a principal duly authorized to enter into an
agreement. If a bidder is a co-partnership, then signatures on the bid shall be by
an authorized member of the firm, with names and addresses of each member of
partnership.
D. Base bid (Basic Proposal) and all alternate bids shall be stated both in writing and
in figures. In all cases, written and numerical figures must agree; otherwise at
Owner's option, it shall be cause for rejection of bid. Complete form without
interlineation, alteration, erasure.
E. Submit alternate prices (bid) for either increasing or decreasing the cost as called
for on bid form and Description of Alternates. Submit a bid for all alternates,
except those which may be denoted as optional.
F. Do not stipulate any other conditions, alternates or qualifications. Owner will not
accept any condition contained in specifications or other documents.
G. Submit bid in a sealed envelope bearing (on the outside) name of the bidder,
address, name of the Project and Bid Package for which bid is submitted. If
forwarded by mail, sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in
another envelope addressed as specified.
13. BID SECURITY-EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: With each bid, submit a certified
check or cashier's check on a solvent bank, or bid bond, equal to five percent (5%) of
amount of maximum bid submitted (including additive alternates) and made payable
without recourse to Independent School District#278.
For.bid bonds,form may be,surety's standard form or AIA Form A-310, duly,executed
by the bidder as principal, issued by a corporate surety company authorized to do
business in the State of Minnesota, with copy of Power of Attorney attached, as well
as proper acknowledgments.
Bid security in form of certified or cashier's check will be returned to all but the three
lowest bidders within ten (10) days after opening of bids. Upon request to Owner,bid
bonds for all but the three (3) lowest bidders will also be returned within ten (10)
days. Bid security of other bidders will be returned promptly after Owner and
accepted bidder have executed the Contract, or if no award has been made within
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100-4
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100-INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
sixty(60) days after the date of the opening of bids, upon demand of the bidder at any
time thereafter, so long as he has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid.
Bid security shall be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages in the event bidder is
awarded a Contract and he fails or refuses to execute the Agreement and furnish
specified bond within ten (10) days after award, provided Agreement is ready for
signature. If Agreement has not been prepared within ten (10) days, Contractor shall
have two (2)days after its preparation for execution.
' 14. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: A bidder may withdraw his bid at any time prior to date
set for receiving bids (or authorized postponement thereof). Thereafter, the bids may
be withdrawn only after sixty (60) days has elapsed after bid date, provided Owner
has not acted thereon.
15. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS: Owner may make such investigations as he
deems necessary to determine the ability and responsibility of the bidder to perform
the work, and any bidder shall furnish to Owner all such information and data for this
' purpose, as the Owner may request. Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the
evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that
such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to
1 complete the Work contemplated therein. The competence and responsibility of
bidder will be considered in making an award, including,but not limited to: (1) proof
of financial responsibility, (2) quality of similar work, (3) amount of experience with
similar projects, (4) facilities, personnel and equipment, (5) reputation for
performance, and (6) ability to complete the work within specified time. Owner
reserves the right to reject any Bid where there is reasonable doubt as to the
qualifications of the bidder.
16. ACCEPTANCE OF BID - AWARD OF CONTRACT: Owner reserves the right to
(1) accept bidder's Base Bid only, (2) accept any one or more of bidder's Alternate
Bids, in any order regardless of the order in which they were listed, (3) reject all Bids,
(4) award contract based on his investigation of bidders, as well as acceptance of
alternates, including the bond alternate, all of which Owner deems to be in his best
interest, (5), waive informalities or... minor irregularities in bids and waive minor
irregularities or discrepancies in bidding procedure.
17. PERFORMANCE BOND: Upon award oContract, Contractor shall provide
Material and Labor Performance Bond in the amount of 100% of Contract Sum in
accordance with General Conditions and Amendments to General Conditions.
18. SUBCONTRACTS - SUPPLIERS: Proposed subcontractors are subject to Owner's,
Construction Manager's and Architect's acceptance. The right of rejection may be
exercised when there is reasonable doubt the subcontractor (supplier) will be able to
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100-5
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100-INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
satisfactorily perform work under the Contract, as specified under Article 5.2 of
General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and in Section 01300.
19. COMPLETION TIME: Commencement of Work and time of completion shall be
essential condition of the Contract. Work shall be completed within time specified,
agreed upon and entered into Contract. Refer to Section 01010 for dates and further
requirements of completion.
20. PRE-BID EVALUATION - PROCEDURE FOR PROPOSED SUBSTITUTED
MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT: The word "product" herein means any material,
equipment, assembly, manufacturer, brand, trade name, element, item or similar
description as applicable. Wherever a product is named on the drawings or in the
specifications, the phrase "or acceptable substitute in the opinion of the Architect"
shall be implied throughout, whether specifically noted or not.
All requests for consideration of proposed substitute products for those specified shall
be made in writing and must be received by Architect at least ten (10) days prior to
bid date and bid hour. Acceptable substitute products will be included in addenda. '
Requests received after this time will not be considered or reviewed. Requests shall
clearly define and describe product for which acceptance is requested, and shall be
accompanied by manufacturer's literature, specifications, drawings, cuts, performance
data, list of references, model numbers, or other information necessary to completely
describe the item.
Acceptance of a product by the Architect for bidding purposes will be in the form of
addenda to Contract Documents, issued as specified. No information or indication of
acceptance will be provided in any other manner than addendum.
The use of references to standards, manufacturers, brands and similar designations is
intended to establish the measure of quality as to minimum standards of design,
function, appearance, type, strength, durability, construction, efficiency, sound level,
finish, appearance, availability, service and similar characteristics, which have been
determined as requisite for this Project. Proposed alternate products shall also be
available in the same range of colors,textures, dimensions, gauges, types,and finishes
as the material or article specified; must equal the specified item in strength,
durability, efficiency, serviceability, ease and cost of maintenance; must be
compatible with the building design and not necessitate design modifications; nor
impose additional work or require changes in the work of any Prime Contractor, or
any other Subcontractor, vendor, or materials supplier, nor result in any additional
cost to the Owner. The supplier or manufacturer providing any acceptable product
shall bear the cost of any required modifications to spaces, services, utilities and other
features as the result of the use of his product, including but not limited to larger
capacity mechanical or electrical service, devices or utilities resulting from acceptance
of the product for bidding purposes, as well as to pipes, conduits, ducts, and controls
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100-6
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
00100-INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
for conveying, distributing, and controlling those services or utilities; as well as
insulation, wrappings, coatings, or other integral features of the lines or items
conveying those lines.
Any product or manufacturer used as basis of the specifications shall generally set the
criteria. It shall be expressly understood that any other product or manufacturer listed
in the specification or any addenda as acceptable will be acceptable provided they
fully comply with the requirements and match the basic and essential criteria of the
product used for base specification, including the level of workmanship quality, as
determined by the Architect. For final acceptance for use in the work, the Architect
shall have right to accept or reject proposed deviations. Should a proposed product be
unable to meet requirements,the product shall not be used.
Where two or more products are shown or specified,the bidder and Contractor has his
option of which to use, provided the product proposed will meet all requirements of
the specifications and the design criteria. The right is reserved by the Architect to
accept or reject proposed deviations in design, function, construction or similar
differences that will affect design intent or quality.
For any same or like product for this Project, only one brand, manufacturer, source or
type shall be used, as approved by Architect.
For products specified or shown by describing proprietary items, model numbers,
catalog numbers, manufacturers, trade names or similar reference, each bidder
obligated himself to submit bids and accept awards of a contract based upon the use
of such products. The reference is intended to establish the measure for the quality
which has been determined as requisite and necessary for the Project.
END OF SECTION 00100
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00100-7
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
00305-BID FORM
(Bidder shall copy this form on his own letterhead)
BID FORM
BID TO: Independent School District#278
Orono Public Schools
' 685 Old Crystal Bay Road North
Long Lake,MN 55356-0046
BID FROM:
In accordance with the Call For Bids and the proposed Contract Documents dated March 21, 2000 as
i prepared by Wold Architects and Engineers, 305 St. Peter Street, St. Paul, Minnesota 55102 relating to
the construction of:
Existing Orono Middle School-New Media Center
Bid Package 1: General Construction, Mechanical and Electrical
Orono, Minnesota
the undersigned,having visited the site of proposed construction and having become thoroughly familiar
with local conditions affecting the cost and performance of the Work and with all requirements of the
Contract Documents and related Addenda, hereby proposes and agrees to provide all labor and materials
required to construct and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and Addenda
for the following amounts:
Base Bids:
Instructions for Submitting Base Bids:
• State base bid in both words and figures in spaces provided.
Base Bid for Bid Division No. Title:
Bid Amount: $
Combined Base Bid:
Bid Division Numbers and Titles on which Combined Bid is based:
Bid Division No. Title:
Combined Bid Amount: $
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00305 - 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
00305-BID FORM
Addenda: Receipt of the following Addenda to the Contract Documents and their costs being
incorporated into the Bid is acknowledged(give Addenda numbers):
Bid Acceptance: If written notice of the acceptance of this Bid is received by the undersigned within 60
days after date set for opening of this Bid, or at any other time thereafter before Bid is withdrawn, the
undersigned agrees to enter into and execute a Contract with the Owner in accordance with this Bid as
accepted and in a form acceptable to Owner, and to furnish and deliver to Owner the Performance Bond,
Labor and Material Payment Bond, and proof of insurance coverage, all within 10 days after notice of
acceptance of this Bid.
Execution of Proposal: The entity(ies) signing this proposal is fully authorized to sign on behalf of the
named firm and to fully bind the named flim to all of the conditions and provisions of the Contract. This
proposal shall remain valid and not be withdrawn for 60 calendar days after bid due date. ,
Submitted this day of 19
Name of Firm:
Street Address:
City: State: Zip Code:
Phone Number:
Bidder is: (Check One)
( ) Individual ( )Partnership ( ) Corporation
If Bidder is a corporation, give legal name of corporation, state where 'm
corporated, and names of
president and secretary; if a partnership, give names of all individual co-partners composing the firm;
and if an individual,give first and last name in full ,
Name(typed or printed):
Signature:
Title:,
END OF DOCUMENT
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00305 - 2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL &ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT
00500-LIST OF CONTRACT FORMS
1. FORMS INCLUDED
' A. The following is a list of forms and standards applicable to this Project.
- Bid Form: As bound in this Project Manual. Submit exact form in
duplicate.
- Bid Bond Form: The standard form of a surety, authorized to do business
' in Minnesota and meeting all requirements, will be acceptable. Standard
AIA Document A-310 will be acceptable. Submit with Bid with proper
Power of Attorney certificate and acknowledgment.
- Agreement: The Contract form will be AIA Document A101/CMa, 1992
edition.
- Performance/Payment Bond: Form shall be standard AIA Document
A312 Performance Bond and Payment Bond, 1984 edition, conforming to
Minnesota statutes provided by Surety. Submit in two copies, with proper
Power of Attorney and acknowledgment upon execution of contract
agreement with Owner.
Note: AIA forms may be examined at Architect's office or Construction Manager's
office.
END OF SECTION 00500
1
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00500- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION, MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00700- GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS DOCUMENT A201/CMa
A. AIA Document A201/CMa General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Construction Management Edition, 1992 Edition, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive,
is hereby made a part of the Contract Documents and as amended by Section
' 00800- Supplemental Conditions.
B. A copy of AIA Document A201/CMa, 1992 edition, is available for review at the
office of the Construction Manager and the Architect.
C. The above stipulated General Conditions as amended by Section 00800 -
' Supplemental Conditions apply to work executed in each of the Specification
Divisions 1 through 16.
END OF SECTION 00700
r
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00700- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
r
DIVISION 0
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
GENERAL
A. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General
Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201/CMa
Construction Management, edition 1992. Where any article of the General
Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof or
deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of the
Article,Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
1. ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS
' 1.1 Basic Definitions
1.1.1 The Contract Documents: Add as part of Contract Documents: Performance
Bond or Performance-Labor Material Bond, is required; Contractor's Bid.
1.2 Execution, Correlation, and Intent
1.2.2 Add at the end: --; however, Contractor does not represent having examined
conditions that are not exposed without demolition unless the necessary
demolition is specified or authorized. The Contractor also represents that all
Contract Documents for the Project have been examined, including those
intended for work of trades not normally performed by the Contractor's own
forces, and has become thoroughly familiar with all conditions which may
pertain to or affect the Work under this Contract.
1.2.3 Add at the end of first sentence: --; in proper operating condition.
' 1.2.4 At the end of the last sentence, add the following: --,unless it is specified that a
subcontract include specific phases or elements to complete a certain part of the
Work for reasons of coordination or responsibility. Where the Specification has
been divided into sections, it is for convenience in use. The Architect assumes
no responsibility for proper placement of phases.of the.Work. intothe proper.
division or section nor the arrangement of Work shown on the Drawings. The
Architect shall not be obligated to enter into jurisdictional or other disputes as a
result of the organization, arrangement or location of parts of the Work in
Specifications or on Drawings, nor to serve as arbiter to establish subcontract
limits. Unless otherwise specified, the scope of work of each section shall be to
furnish labor, materials, equipment, skill, erection, installation, services and
related items for the phase of work of that section, as required by the Drawings,
as specified or as otherwise required to provide and complete the entire work of
the section.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT '
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
1.2.6 Add Subparagraph: The general character and scope of the Work is called for
by the Contract Documents. Where a portion of the Work is fully drawn and the
remainder is merely indicated, the portion fully drawn shall apply to all similar
parts of the Work. Drawings intended primarily as information for one trade
may not necessarily show the work of other trades, which shall not be construed
as there being no related materials or adjacent work.
1.2.7 Add Subparagraph: Figured dimensions shall be followed in preference to
measurement by scale. In the event of discrepancies between Drawings,
between Drawings and Specifications or between Specifications, the intent shall
be interpreted by the Architect, which shall be binding on the Contractor.
Where a dimension may be missing, the Work shall be accomplished in
accordance with the directions and dimensions provided by the Architect.
Dimensions on Drawings, as well as detail Drawings themselves, are subject in
every case to measurements of existing, adjacent, incorporated and completed
work which shall be taken by the Contractor before undertaking any work
dependent upon such data. Dimensions pertaining to the Work shall be verified
at site by Contractor.
1.2.8 Add Subparagraph: Where Specifications are of the abbreviated or
"streamlined" type, they shall be construed as complete sentences, as shall notes
on the drawings. Omission of words such as "the", "the Contractor shall", and
"as shown on the drawings" is intentional. The words "shall" or "shall be" are to '
be supplied by inference. Imperative or directive instruction, directions or
specifications apply and refer to the Contractor. The words "symmetrical" and
"similar" are used in the general sense and need not mean "identical".
1.2.9 Add Subparagraph: Where a number is specified (as for gauges, weights,
temperatures, an amount of time, and similar references) and the specified
number cannot be obtained, the number shall be interpreted as the next better, as
available.
2. ARTICLE 2- OWNER
2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner
2.2.2 Add to Subparagraph by inserting at the beginning: Except as otherwise
required by the Contract Documents, --
2.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work
2.4.1 Delete Subparagraph, insert instead: If the Contractor defaults or neglects to
carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
a seven day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to the
Contractor and Surety, if any, written notice from the Owner to the Contractor
and Surety, if any, to commence and continue correction of such default or
neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven day
' period give the Contractor and Surety a second notice to correct such
deficiencies within a second seven day period and may require the Surety to
assume the obligations of the Contractor within seven days following receipt by
the Contractor and Surety of this second seven day period after receipt of such
second notice fails to commence and continue to correct such default or neglect,
the Owner may without prejudice to any other remedies the Owner may have,
' correct such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order shall be
issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor, or
Surety, the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the
' Architect's and Construction Manager's additional services made necessary by
such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged
to the Contractor are both subject to the prior concurrence of the Architect after
consultation with the Construction Manager. If payments then or thereafter due
the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor, or
Surety, shall pay the difference to the Owner.
' 3. ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR
3.4 Labor and Materials
3.4.2 Add to Subparagraph: All work shall be performed in the best and most
workmanlike manner to the highest standards for the work. Incompetent or
careless workmanship shall not be permitted by the Contractor and will not be
accepted.
' 3.4.3 Add Subparagraph: The Contractor, and all those working under its jurisdiction,
shall conform to labor laws of the state and all other laws, ordinances and legal
' requirements affecting the Work. Prior to starting work, the Contractor shall
become,familiar with local.labor and trade.conditions,,skilled and unskilled,,and
shall conform to local conditions. The Contractor shall consider the availability
of labor in the area and import labor as may be required to meet the schedule for
the Work.
3.4.4 Add Subparagraph: Unless otherwise provided in Contract Documents, all
materials, equipment and other products shall be one of the brands,
manufacturers or types specified. All like products for the Work shall be by the
same manufacturer.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
3.4.5 Add Subparagraph: After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the
Architect, after consultation with the Construction Manager, will consider a
formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only
under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the
Specifications). ,
3.4.6 Add Subparagraph: By making requests for substitutions based on the
preceding subparagraph,the Contractor: ,
1 Represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed
substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects ,
to that specified;
.2 Represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the
substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;
.3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related
costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives
all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently
become apparent; and
.4 Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such
changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects.
3.5 Warranty
3.5.1 In the ninth line after the word "defective" add the words "the Contractor's
warranty excludes remedy for damage or defects caused by abuse, modifications
not executed by the contractor, or those under its jurisdiction, improper or ,
insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear under
normal usage." Add to Subparagraph: The quality required under this Warranty
shall, as a minimum, equal all standards or requirements of form, function,
durability, performance, type, strength, efficiency, service, .appearance or other
criteria established by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.7 Permits,Fees, and Notices
3.7.1 Add to Subparagraph: The Contractor shall provide and pay for all bonds that
may be required to accomplish the Work, including any bonds required by
municipalities.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-4 '
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
3.7.2 Add to Subparagraph: In any instance where requirements of the Contract
Documents are in excess of, but not in conflict with or violation of requirements
of a public authority,the provisions of the Contract Documents shall govern.
3.8 Allowances
3.8.2.2 At the end of Clause add: except where installation is specified as part of the
' allowance in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications).
3.8.2.5 Add Clause: The supplier or Subcontractor for an allowance item is subject to
acceptance of the Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager; and the
Contractor's Purchase Order or Subcontract Agreement shall bind the supplier or
Subcontractor to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site
3.11.1 In the fifth line between the words "addition" and "Shop Drawings" change the
word "approved" to "accepted". Before the last full sentence of the paragraph,
insert the following: "The record documents shall be a separate set of
documents used only for record purposes and kept clean and undamaged."
3.12 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples
' 3.12.6 In the fourth, and last lines,change the word "approved" to "accepted".
' 3.12.8 In the third and last lines, change the word "approval" to "acceptance".
3.13 Use of Site
' 3.13.3 Add Subparagraph: The Contractor shall return all improvements on or about
the site, streets and adjacent property which are not shown to be altered,
removed or otherwise changed, to the conditions which existed previously. The
Contractor shall protect existing structured or other features.from damage,by
any operation in connection with this Contract.
3.13.4 Add Subparagraph: Utilities or other services which are shown, or not shown
but encountered or otherwise found, shall be protected by the Contractor from
' any damage from excavation or other work and operations of this Contract,
unless or until they are abandoned. If Contractor shall immediately restore any
damage from its work or operations to place the utilities or services are shown
to be abandoned or moved, they shall remain in service, and be protected by the
Contractor, until new utilities and services have been provided, tested and ready
for use.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 5
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
3.14 Cutting and Patching
3.14.1 Add to Subparagraph: Cutting and patching shall be kept to an absolute
minimum by careful planning and through providing proper holes, sleeves,
anchors, inserts or other built-ins as Work progresses and then only to the extent
required to properly place, support, hang, anchor or install work and finishes to
like-new condition, to match adjoining work and shall be performed by workers '
skilled in the particular type of work involved. Where finishes are patched, they
shall be patched to the extent necessary to provide unbroken and unattached
appearance and shall be carried to natural break points as necessary. All
patching is subject to the Architect's acceptance. Unauthorized or careless
cutting will not be permitted. No structural member shall be cut in a manner or
to an extent which will affect the structural effectiveness, unless approved by '
the Architect.
3.14.3 Add Subparagraph: Cutting and patching of construction work or excavation
and backfilling in or about building, shall be done under the general supervision
of the Contractor for that phase of the Work being altered, who shall be
responsible to see that patching and backfilling is accomplished by using proper
labor, materials and methods consistent with the requirements for other similar
construction.
3.19 Equal Opportunity In Employment
3.19.1 Trade Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for ,
employment because of sex, creed, color, religion, national origin, marital
status, status with respect to public assistance, disability, age, or sexual
preference. Trade Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that ,
applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment with
out regard to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer,
recruitment, recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other
form of compensation and. selection. for. training, including apprenticeship.
Trade Contractor shall incorporate these same equal opportunity,
antidiscrimination and affirmative action requirements into all agreements
between Trade Contractor and its Trade Subcontractors.
3.20 Verification of Field Conditions
3.20.1 The Trade Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions
with the Contract Documents and final Shop Drawings before commencing any '
Work. Report errors, inconsistencies or omissions to the Architect and
Construction Manager at once.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 6
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
' CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
' 3.20.2 No change in the Contract Sum will be allowed on account of minor difference
between actual field conditions and the Contract Documents.
1 3.21 Miscellaneous Trade Contractor Responsibilities
3.21.1 The Trade contractor agrees to adequately and properly protect their Work. The
' Trade Contractor agrees to adhere to the Federal Occupational Safety & Health
Act, state and local safety regulations, so as to avoid injury or damage to
persons or property resulting from failure to do so.
3.21.2 In the event the Trade Contractor, after 24 hour written notice from the
Construction Manager fails to take corrective action to ensure compliance with
said safety regulations. The Construction Manager shall remedy the situation
according to OSHA standards and charge the cost of same to the Trade
Contractor's account without further notice to the Trade Contractor.
3.21.3 The Trade Contractor agrees to notify the Construction Manager's
representative on the job site of all accidents which may occur to persons or
property and shall provide the Construction Manager's representative with a
copy of all accident reports on appropriate forms. All reports shall be signed by
the Trade Contractor or his authorized representative and submitted within
twenty-four(24)hours of occurrence.
3.21.4 The Trade Contractor agrees that all disputes concerning the jurisdiction of
trades shall be adjusted in accordance with any plan for the settlement of
jurisdictional disputes which may be in effect either nationally or in the locality
in which the work is being done. The Trade Contractor shall be bound by, and
' shall abide by, all such adjustments and settlements of jurisdictional disputes,
whether or not the Trade Contractor is signature bound by the agreement
establishing the Impartial Jurisdictional Disputes Board and/or its successors.
The Trade Contractor agrees not to cause a work stoppage due to the
jurisdictional,assignment of work_
3.21.5 The Trade Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager upon request,
copies of orders placed for the various materials required for the Project or stock
lists if such material is normally a stock item. Order copies need not reflect
prices but should indicated type of material, quantity, vendor name, and address,
etc. The Trade Contractor shall be required to submit to the Construction
Manager a monthly Material Status report, or more often if required by the
' Construction Manager, as a prerequisite for the monthly progress payment. The
Trade Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager immediately upon
learning of a change of status of any material, equipment or supplies.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-7
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT '
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
3.21.6 The Trade contractor agrees to maintain an adequate force of experienced
workers and the necessary materials, supplies, and equipment to meet the
requirements of the Construction Manager and other trades in order to maintain
construction progress schedules, as established by the Construction Manager
and Owner. In the event that their forces are, in the judgment of the
Construction Manager, inadequate to meet the established schedules during the
regular working hours, the Trade Contractors agree to work sufficient overtime '
hours or increase their work force to meet such schedules at no extra cost to the
Construction Manager,Architect,or the Owner.
3.21.7 The Trade Contractor agrees to employ competent administrative, supervisory,
and field personnel to accomplish the work, including layout, engineering,
preparation and checking of shop drawings. Such supervisory personnel shall
not be changed without written consent of the Construction Manager.
3.21.8 The Trade Contractor shall insure that all construction tools, equipment, '
temporary facilities, and other items used in accomplishing the Work, whether
purchased, rented or otherwise provided by the Trade Contractor or provided by
the others, are in a safe, sound , and good condition; capable of performing the
function for which they are intended and maintained in conformance with
applicable laws and regulations.
3.21.9 In no event shall any act or omission on the part of the Owner, the Architect or ,
the Construction Manager relieve the Trade Contractor from their obligation to
perform their Work in full compliance with the Contract.
3.21.10 The Trade Contractor shall be responsible to the Construction Manager for the
acts and omissions of all their employees and all Trade Subcontractors, their '
agents and employees, and all other persons performing any of the Work under a
contract with the Trade Contractor.
4: ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 Architect
4.1.1 Delete Subparagraph, insert instead: The Architect is Wold Architects and
Engineers, referred to in the Contract Documents as singular in number. The
term Architect means the Architect or his authorized representative, including
employees or consultants. Where "Architect" may be used relating to
engineering phases of the Work, substitute the term "Engineer" therefore.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 8
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
4.2 Construction Manager
4.2.1 Delete Subparagraph, insert instead: The Construction Manager is Kraus-
Anderson Construction Company - Midwest Division, 8625 Rendova Street
N.E., Circle Pines, Minnesota, referred to in the Construction Documents as
singular in number. The term "Construction Manager" means the Construction
Manager or the Construction Manager's authorized representative, including
' employees or consultants.
4.6 Administration of the Contract
4.6.5 In the first line between the words "intervals" and "appropriate", insert the
words "he deems". In second line, delete the words "to the stage of
construction".
4.6.11 In the second line change the word "approve" to "accept". in the fifth line,
' change the word "approval" to "acceptance".
4.6.12 In the first line change the word "approve" to "accept". In lines 20, 22, 23,
change the word "approval" to "acceptance".
5. ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 Definitions
5.1.1 Change the wording of this Subparagraph to read as follows: A Subcontractor is
a person, firm or entity having a direct contract or purchase order with the
Contractor to provide or furnish materials, equipment, facilities, labor or
' services, or a combination of these, for the execution and completion of the
Work or part thereof. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an
authorized representative. The term subcontractor does not include any separate
contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
5.1.2 Change the wording of this Subparagraph to read as follows: A Sub-
subcontractor is a person, or entity having a direct or indirect contract or
purchase order with a Subcontractor to provide or furnish materials, equipment,
facilities, labor or services, or a combination of these, for the execution or
completion of the Work or part thereof. The term Sub-subcontractor is referred
to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a
' Sub-subcontract or an authorized representative thereof.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-9
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT ,
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work
5.2.1 At the end of the first sentence, add: -- along with a list of the actual materials '
or equipment they will be furnishing.
5.2.3 Add to Subparagraph: No increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed should
a substitution be required as a result of the Owner's or Architect's reasonable
objection based on specified criteria on which a proposed subcontractor will be ,
evaluated.
6. ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY OTHER ,
CONTRACTORS
6.2 Mutual Responsibility
6.2.1 Change Subparagraph to read: The Contractor and Subcontractors shall
cooperate with and coordinate their work with all other contractors and the ,
Owner to facilitate the general progress of the Project and to prevent delaying
the progress of other contractors. The Contractor shall afford other contractors
reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and
equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate
contractor's Work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. Each
contractor and subcontractor shall obtain layout drawings, roughing-in detail '
sheets and other pertinent information directly from each other (not from
Architect nor Construction Manager) to coordinate all phases of the Work. For
coordination with the Owner's equipment or materials, information shall be
obtained from the Owner through the Construction Manager. After timely
notification by the Contractor of the need to accomplish a particular phase or
element of the Work, the other contractors shall, within a reasonable time, '
perform their work so as not to delay or impede the Contractor.
6.2.3 Between the words "construction" and "shall", insert: --, or lack of coordination '
with.other contractors„--
6.2.4 In the first line, delete the word "wrongfully". '
7. ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 Changes
7.1.5 Add Subparagraph: For proposed changes in the Work on the lump sum or time ,
and material methods under Clauses 7.3.1.1 and 7.3.3.4 above, the costs shall be
determined as provided under this Subparagraph 7.1.5. The Contractor shall
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 10
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
submit an itemized list of quantities with the applicable unit costs and extended
price for each, in such form and detail as required by the Construction Manager/
Architect.
' 1 As a minimum the detailed breakdown shall include and indicate the items
enumerated below. Items (a) and (b) constitute the cost of labor, and items
(a), (b), (c) and (d) constitute the basic costs referred to under this Article 7.
' (a) Labor costs, itemized by each trade involved, showing the hourly rates
for each, and the hours required for the change. Labor rates shall be
' the same for extra and credit computations and shall be the actual rate
paid workmen in accordance with established management labor
agreement.
(b) Burden on labor, which shall be only the actual costs of mandatory
fringe benefits required by established agreements, taxes on labor,
' worker's or workmen's compensation, insurance on labor as affected by
payroll, unemployment taxes and insurance, including FICA and
FUTA.
(c) Quantities of materials, equipment and supplies, at their actual cost,
with unit costs indicated.
' (d) The cost of subcontracted work, computed in the same way as
provided for under this Subparagraph 7.1.5.
(e) Overhead,profit or commission.
(f) Applicable sales tax on materials, added after the above computations
are complete.
.2 The maximum that will be allowed for overhead and profit, or commission,
shall be as,follows,.expressed as a percentage of the basic cost of the change.
The maximum allowable percentages for profit, overhead and commission
may be less, depending on the nature, extent or complexity of the change,
where the percentage is not commensurate with the responsibility and
administration involved (such as the Contractor merely processing a
' substantial Change Order to a Subcontractor) but in no event shall they
exceed the following:
1
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 11
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0 ,
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT '
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
Overhead/Profit Commission
(a) To the Contractor and/or '
Subcontractor for work
performed with their '
own forces 10%
(b) To the Contractor for work ,
performed by other than
its own forces -- 5%
.3 Not more than two percentages for overhead, profit and commission will '
be allowed. The mark-up on any part of the Work a Subcontractor
subcontracts will be limited to one overhead/profit figure. In addition to
the Contractor's commission. The Subcontractor and Sub-subcontract may
divide the overhead and profit amount as they agree upon.
.4 The burden on labor may be indicated as a dollar/cents addition to the ,
hourly rate or may be expressed as a percentage of the extended hourly
rate costs. If required by the Owner, Construction Manager or the
Architect, the Contractor shall provide a detailed breakdown to justify the
labor burden. The Construction Manager reserves the right to reject any
labor burden which is inconsistent with other similar contractors or where '
the cost of fringe benefits are in excess of established labor agreements.
The burden on labor shall not include any costs noted as general overhead.
.5 Material, equipment and supply costs shall be quoted at the actual cost to ,
the Contractor, or Subcontractor. Upon request, the Contractor (or
Subcontractor) shall submit evidence to substantiate the costs. Said costs '
shall be quoted at trade discount prices, with quantity discounts also
applied where the quantities warrant. Cash or prompt payment discounts
need not be credited. In any proposal with material, equipment and supply '
credits,,the credit.shall be based on the actual Contract cost of the material
(including trade and quantity discounts) less any charges actually incurred
for handling or returning a material which has been delivered. No '
cancellation, restocking or similar charge will be allowed unless actually
incurred by the purchaser and generally will not be allowed when the
product has not been shipped. '
.6 The percentages allowed for overhead, profit or commission under clause
7.1.5.2 shall be deemed to include, and no further addition allowed for: ,
(1) field and office supervision and administration, including the field
superintendent and foremen; (2) general insurance, except that listed as the
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 12
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
' CONDITIONS
labor burden; (3) use or replacement of tools; (4) shop burden; (5)
' equipment rental (other than specifically required additional hoisting
equipment, required excavating equipment or similar equipment necessary
solely as a result of the change); (6) engineering and estimating costs; (7)
performance (guaranty) bond; (8) cost of safety measures (including those
imposed by OSHA); (9) shipping, drayage and demurrage; (10) parking
charges; (11) clean up and debris removal; (12) testing; (13) permits,
' unless a new permit type is required; (14) or any other costs except those
enumerated under clause 7.1.5.
' .7 Cost changes shall be computed by determining the basic costs
enumerated under clause 7.1.5 (as further specified under this
subparagraph), to which the overhead may be added, then the profit figure
' may be added and finally adding the sales tax on materials.
.8 Subcontractors (or Sub-subcontractors) shall compute their costs in the
' same way and are subject to the same conditions of what may be included
in the cost and the same maximum percentages for overhead and profit.
To the subcontractor's price, the Contractor may add up to 5%
commission.
.9 For changes involving work of the Contractor with its own forces and
work by a Subcontractor (or Sub-subcontractor), the commission shall be
applied directly to the Subcontractor's price, with the overhead and profit
figure applied only to the Work the Contractor performs with its own
' forces.
.10 For changes involving both extra and credit amounts the overhead and
' profit, or commission, shall be applied only to net difference where the
extra exceeds the credit.
.11 For changes resulting in a credit in the basic costs, a reasonable allowance
for..overhead,, profit.or commission,may,be.,required,to be. credited,the
Owner, as approved by the Architect after consultation with the
' Construction Manager. In general, no credit for overhead, profit or
commission will be required where the net change credit is minor or where
the change in Work indicates it is reasonable that no credit be allowed to
' the Owner due to the effort, cost or responsibility of the Contractor. In the
event of substantial subcontract credits, or for Work not performed by the
Contractor, a reasonable overhead, profit or commission credit shall be
' allowed to the Owner.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 13
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT '
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS '
7.4 Minor Changes in the Work
7.4.1 Add to Subparagraph: The Architect shall also have the right to make minor
changes in dimensions, locations, arrangements or details to accommodate
changes in other materials and equipment, improve the Work, or prevent ,
unforeseen interference with structural or other features. Such changes shall be
made without a change in the Contract Sum.
8. ARTICLE 8 -TIME '
8.2 Progress and Completion '
8.2.3 In the second line change the word "Substantial" to "Final". Add to
Subparagraph: The Work shall not be suspended or shut down, but shall '
progress continuously with sufficient labor at all times, unless otherwise
approved by the Owner,Architect and Construction Manager.
8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time
8.3.3 Change Subparagraph to read: This Paragraph 8.3 does not exclude the Owner's
recovery of damages for delay under other provisions of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for delay is a right to a
time extension for completion of the Contract and not damages.
9. ARTICLE 9-PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2 Schedule of Values
9.2.1 In the first line, after the words, "Before the first Application for Payment," '
insert "in accordance with other requirements of the Contract Documents,"
9.3 Applications for Payment '
9.3.4 Add Subparagraph: The Contractor shall submit his Application for Payment on
forms as the Construction Manager/Architect may specify or direct. The
Application shall be accompanied by a sworn, notarized Certificate by the
Contractor, attesting to the accuracy of the amount as being for work
satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that all '
just claims and bills for labor, materials, equipment, subcontracts and services
or other expenses represented in previous Applications for Payment have been
paid, such that the Contractor is entitled to the payment. ,
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 14
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
' CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
' CONDITIONS
9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification
' 9.5.1 In the second line change the words "certify payment" to "issue a Certificate for
Payment". In the seventh and sixteenth lines change the words "certify
' payment" to "issue a Certificate for Payment".
9.6 Progress Payments
' 9.6.6 Change Subparagraph to read: Issuance of a Contractor's Application and
Certificate for Payment, a Progress Payment, or partial or entire use or
occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute an acceptance of any
work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor and its
Surety agree any issuance of a Contractor's Application and Certificate for
' Payment by the Construction Manager, payment on the Contract Sum or in
reducing any retaining amount, or any use or occupancy of the Work will in no
way relieve them of the obligation to completely fulfill or accomplish all
' obligations of the Contract, including warranty of the Work, and that they waive
any actual or alleged rights of subrogation or action against the Owner or the
Architect as a result of any such issuance of a Contractor's Application and
' Certificate for Payment, payment, or use or occupancy. At any time the Surety
shall have the right to examine the status of the Work, as well as any payments,
and may request the Owner to withhold additional sums as it considers
appropriate to protect its interests.
9.8 Substantial Completion
' 9.8.4 Add Subparagraph: After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall
coordinate his activities with the Owner's use of the substantially completed
e work and shall diligently complete the remaining work, without delay or
interruption, within the remaining Contract time.
9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment
9.10.2 In the third line between the word "Construction Manager" and the number "(1)"
insert the following: "Such substantiation of the Contractor's Right to Payment
as the Owner may require such as and including--."
' 9.10.3 In the sixth line change the word "certification" to "recommendation". Add to
the subparagraph: The Owner may at its option retain a minimum of three times
the value of the incomplete or uncorrected parts of the Work, as estimated by
' the Construction Manager, provided the remaining work is minor and cannot be
completed or corrected due-to weather, unsuitable conditions for testing or other
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 15
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS '
circumstances beyond the Contractor's control, as agreed upon by the Architect
and Construction Manager. ,
10. ARTICLE 10-PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2 Safety of Persons and Property '
10.2.4 Add to Subparagraph: and shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. '
10.2.5 In the fourteenth line between the words "fault" and "or", insert the words "acts,
operations,methods." '
10.2.7 In the second line between the words "to" and "endanger" insert the words
"damage it or". At the end of the subparagraph add: --or any adjacent property. '
10.4 Add Paragraph: Miscellaneous General Provisions
10.4.1 The requirements under 10.4, Miscellaneous General Provisions, shall be
considered as minimum requirements and shall not.be construed to limit the
amount of protection required to safeguard all persons and property, nor ,
construed as directing or establishing the Contractor's methods or
responsibilities.
10.4.2 The Construction Manager shall provide and maintain adequate fire
extinguishers in and around the construction area, available to all workers, but
shall not use extinguishers that are to be installed in the Work. '
10.4.3 The Contractor shall provide and maintain guard lights at barricades, railings,
obstructions in streets, roads or sidewalks and at trenches or pits including at
those adjacent to existing buildings, public roads, walks, and similar locations
where a hazard may exist. The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable
barricades or fences around excavations, including trench excavations,
excavated by contractor,or. subcontractors.
10.4.4 As may be applicable to the Project and to the Work, the Contractor shall '
provide and be responsible for: protection of equipment, materials, supplies and
Work to prevent any damage, including from freezing, thermal shock, heat,
water and other damaging elements; providing proper and adequate drainage '
(temporary and permanent) of the site in connection with work of this Contract;
damage to property as a result of work or operations under this Contract,
including but not restricted to damage from water, excavation, underpinning, '
removal or changing or structural supports; collapse or other failure to the
Project resulting from the Contractor's acts, operations or work, including water
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 16 '
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
undermining or creating pressure on the construction; pumping of water from
' work areas and excavations of this Contract, and spaces built, constructed or
opened up under the Contract, and if necessary, installing temporary heat to
keep the spaces dry; providing protection and planking on finished floors and
other finished surfaces where work is being done by the Contractor or
subcontractors; closing and protecting all holes or openings through walls,
floors and roofs that are cut or built by the Contractor or subcontractors; and
which will admit water to interior spaces during the construction period or will
create a potential safety hazard; removal of snow to accomplish the Work;
keeping premises in neat and orderly condition; eliminating fire hazards.
' 10.4.5 As may be applicable to the Project and to his Work, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the following; providing safe and adequate stairways (temporary
' and permanent) for the use of all trades; maintaining access to the site; proper
protection by heating of an enclosed building during cold weather; protection for
tress and other similar features, which are to remain, from damage from
' operations in connection with Project, by boxing tree trunks and setting up
barricades at sufficient distance to prevent damage to branches; the removal of
accumulated snow and ice within a building, which generally shall be hauled out
' (not melted), unless it is a minor amount, as approved by Architect/Construction
Manager.
10.4.6 The Contractor and each subcontractor shall provide storage and enclosures to
protect and preserve the materials stored at and off the site. Materials such as
wood, metal, cement, masonry materials, equipment of any type, conduit and
' similar materials, shall not be set directly on ground. Coverings shall be
durable, watertight, fully cover sides as well as top, substantial and well
anchored to prevent blowing away. Shed type enclosures shall be provided for
' easily damaged and small items. Any protection which becomes damaged shall
be replaced immediately. Contractor's storage shall be reviewed and accepted
by the Construction Manager, as it relates to site coordination.
' 1.1... ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND.BONDS.
1 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance
11.1.1 Delete subparagraph and insert instead: Contractor and Subcontractor shall
' purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance as required to
protect the Contractor, Subcontractor, Construction Manager, Architect and
Owner from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from
' operations of the contract under this contract, whether such claims arise during
Contract/Subcontractor performance or subsequent to completion of operations
' under the Contract/Subcontract and whether such operations be by Contractor or
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800 17
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION, MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT '
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS '
Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by Contractor or
Subcontractor or by anyone for whose acts Contractor or Subcontractor may be
liable. Insurance shall be purchased from a company licensed to do business in
the state where the Project is located, and shall be written for not less than the
limits of liability specified below or required by law, whichever is greater. The ,
types of claims, required coverages and minimum limits of liability are as
follows:
A. Claims under the Contract or Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation, ,
disability benefit and other similar employee benefits acts: claims for
damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease or '
death of employees. Insurance coverages shall include:
Statutory Workers'Compensation,including Employer's Liability
with a minimum limit of $500,000.00 for each employee, $500,000.00 ,
disease each employee, and$500,000.00 disease policy limit.
B. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or '
disease, or death,by any person other than employees; Claims for personal
injuries which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an act or
omission directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by ,
the Contractor or Subcontractor, or (2) any other person; Claims for
damages other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction
of tangible property including loss of use resulting therefrom. Insurance '
coverages shall include:
Premise-Operations
Products-Completed Operations ,
Blanket Contractual-As will cover the provisions of the Contract
or Subcontract, including but not limited to any indemnity
provision. '
Broad Form Property Damage
Personal Injury
Blanket Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage '
Operations of Independent Contractors
Policy Limits: General Aggregate $2,000,000.00
Products/Completed '
Operations Aggregate $2,000,000.00
Personal Injury $1,000,000.00
Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00
Fire Damage $ 50,000.00
Medical Expense Any One Person $ 5,000.00
C. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person, or any '
property damage, arising out of the ownership or use of any motor vehicle.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 18
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
Comprehensive Automobile Liability insurance including
' owned, hired and non-owned vehicles, fellow employee exclusions should
be deleted, with combined single limits of$1,000,000.00.
' D. The coverage limits required by Paragraphs (B) and (C) above may be
achieved by the use of an Umbrella Excess Liability Policy. Umbrella
policy should be$1,000,000.00 at a minimum.
' The limits of liability specified shall be considered minimum
requirements.
Acceptance of the insurance by the Construction Manager shall not relieve
or decrease the liability of the Contractor or Subcontractor. The
Construction Manager, Architect and Owner do not in any way represent
that the insurance or limits of insurance specified above are sufficient or
adequate to protect the Contractor's or Subcontractor's interest or
' liabilities,but are minimums.
E. Property Coverage to cover Contractor's own property and that for which
he is responsible for Installation Floater and Contractor's Equipment
Floater.
' 11.1.3 Change the number"30" in line seven to "60".
11.1.4 Add to Subparagraph: Contractor's or Subcontractor's General Liability
' Insurance as described in paragraph B of subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be endorsed
to name Construction Manager, Architect, Engineer and the Owner as an
Additional Insured. This Additional Insured status must be reflected on the
' Contractor's and Subcontractor's Certificate of Insurance to Construction
Manager and the Owner.
ALL insurance shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under gny of
the aforesaid, insurance policies shall.not.be canceled or materially changed
without at least sixty (60) calendar days prior written notice to Construction
Manager, and the Owner on all "Accord" form certificates of insurance, the
words "endeavor to" and the remaining words beginning with "but failure to"
will be stricken from the cancellation notice provision.
' All aforesaid insurance policies shall be underwritten with responsible insurance
carriers with Best's Ratings of not less than A 10 and otherwise satisfactory to
' Construction Manager and the Owner and licensed to provide insurance in the
state in which the Project is located. Non-admitted carriers may be considered
on the individual basis.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 19
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
1
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS '
The Contractor/Subcontractor is responsible at Contractor's/ Subcontractor's '
expense and not a reimbursable expense for providing any additional insurance
Contractor/Subcontractor deems necessary to protect Contractor's/Sub-
contractor's interest from other hazards or claims in excess of the ,
aforementioned minimum insurance coverages.
11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond ,
11.4.1 Delete subparagraph and insert instead: The Owner shall require the Contractor '
to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of
obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or
specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of Execution of the
Contract.
11.4.2 Add Subparagraph: The Contractor shall provide as part of his bid, a valid and ,
enforceable Bond which will run throughout the life of the Contract and its
warranty periods. Bond shall be issued by a corporate surety company
authorized to do business in the State in which the Project is located and the '
surety company shall be subject to the Owner's approval. Fully executed copies
of the Bond shall be provided to the Owner, Construction Manager and
Architect. '
11.4.3 Add Subparagraph: The minimum requirement for the Owner's approval of the
Surety shall be that the Surety is listed by the United States Treasury
Department as acceptable for bonding federal projects and that the bond amount
is within the limit set by the Treasury Department as the net limit on any single
risk. There shall be no affiliation between the Contractor and the Surety ,
Company,Agent or Agency.
11.4.4 Add Subparagraph: For public work or other projects subject to statutory bond '
requirements,the bondform shall be the two-part AIA Form A312 Performance
Bond and Material Payment Bond, 1984 edition, both parts amended to
specifically incorporate the state public works amendment. In Minnesota,
incorporate the following by amendment to both parts of AIA Form A312:
MINNESOTA PUBLIC WORKS AMENDMENT '
This bond is furnished pursuant to the requirements of Minnesota Statutes,
Section 574.26 et. seq. It is hereby acknowledged and agreed by both Principal '
and surety that the provisions and requirements of Minnesota Statutes, Sections
574.26 through 574.32 are hereby incorporated by reference into this Bond as if
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-20 '
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
' CONDITIONS
set forth verbatim herein. In the event of any conflict between such statutory
' provisions and the standard printed provisions of this Bond, the statutory
language shall supersede and control in all respects.
' 11.4.5 Add Subparagraph: The bond shall be in the amount of 100% of the full
Contract Sum. When two part bonds are provided, the bond shall be provided
with 100% of the Contract Sum for the Performance Bond and 100% of the
' Contract Sum for the Payment Bond.
11.4.6 Add Subparagraph: The Bond shall guarantee the Contractor will perform each
and every part of the Contract, cover all guarantees called for and insure prompt
payment to all persons furnishing material or labor required in prosecution of
the Work under the Contract. In the event of additions to the Contract, the
' Owner reserves the right to require evidence of additional bonding.
11.4.7 Add Subparagraph: The Bond shall provide: (1) for additions or deductions
1 from the Work in any amount; (2) that completion time shall not be extended by
reason of changes in the Work, unless agreed to at time of change; (3) that no
notice of aforesaid alterations, additions or omissions need to be given the
Surety; and(4)permit occupancy by the Owner at any time.
11.4.8 Add Subparagraph: Final acceptance of the Work shall not relieve the
' Contractor nor Surety from their obligations under this contract, including
warranties of materials, equipment, installation or service.
' 12. ARTICLE 12-UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 Uncovering of Work
12.1.1 Add to Subparagraph: The Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect,
through the Construction Manager, of the readiness of the work to be observed.
12.1.2 In,the second line,between,the words "the." and "Construction Manager", insert
the words "Contract Documents or the--".
12.2 Correction of Work
' 12.2.1 Add at end of first sentence: "Unless the Owner elects to accept the work as
provided for under paragraph 12.3". Add at the end of the subparagraph:
"Work rejected before final completion shall be corrected prior to the processing
1 of the final Contractor's Application and Certificate for Payment."
' EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-21
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT '
00800- SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS '
12.2.2 Add the following at the end of the subparagraph: The expiration of the above
one year of any other specified time period, or any other period prescribed by '
law, shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation for the expense to correct
any latent defect in the Work or deficiencies which are not readily ascertained,
including but not limited to defective materials and workmanship, defects '
attributable to material substitutions for specified materials, substandard
performance or otherwise not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
Such latent defects or deficiencies shall be corrected as provided in this '
paragraph 12.2. Following the correction or replacement of any of the Work, as
above specified, the Contractor shall convect any defects or deficiencies in
corrected or replaced materials and workmanship, which is found within one
year after the date of correction or replacement.
12.2.7 Add Subparagraph: For the purpose of the commencement of the specified '
periods covered by this Article, or any other special specified period, the date of
the inspection for Substantial Completion of the last unit, part or phase of the
Work shall be the starting date of the period, for all of the Work, except for any ,
work noted as incomplete or unsatisfactory at that time. The period covered by
this article for said incomplete or unsatisfactory work shall start on the date of
specifically noted dates of inspection for Substantial Completion, (or of ,
acceptance, in writing, by the Owner of corrected Work), the date of the
Architect's issuance of the final Certificate and Application for Payment on the
entire Contract will be the start of the period.
13. ARTICLE 13 -MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.5 Tests and Inspections '
13.5.1 Delete last sentence of subparagraph. '
14. ARTICLE 14-TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.2 Termination by the.Owner for Cause. '
14.2.2 Change wording to read: When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, with '
the advice of the Architect and Construction Manager,may, without prejudice to
any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and
Contractor's Surety seven days' written notice, require the Surety to promptly '
take over and complete the Work under the terms of the Contract. Should the
Surety fail to assume the obligations of completing the work within ten days
after receipt of the written notice, the Owner may, upon seven days' additional 1
notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor (except the obligations
under the Bond) and may:
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-22
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
I Take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; may finish the
Work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient.
i .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to paragraph 5.4.
14.2.3 In the second line between the words "Contractor" and "shall" insert the words
"or Contractor's Surety".
14.2.4 Change the wording to read: If the Owner completes the Work and the unpaid
balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including
the Owner's additional costs, attorneys' costs and compensation for the
Construction Manager's and Architect's additional services, such excess shall be
paid to the Contractor. If such costs for the Owner to complete the work
exceeds such unpaid balance, the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the
' difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the
Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Owner or Contractor and
reviewed by the Construction Manager, and approved by the Architect, and this
obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract.
14.4 Add Paragraph: Termination by Owner for Convenience
14.4.1 Add Subparagraph: The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the
Owner's convenience and without cause.
14.4.2 Add Subparagraph: Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such
termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall:
1 Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and
preservation.of the Work; and.
.3 Except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of
termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing Subcontracts and purchase
orders and enter into no further Subcontracts and purchase orders.
14.4.3 Add Subparagraph: In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,
the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same
basis provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-23
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
15. ARTICLE 15 -ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
15.1 Additional Definitions
15.1.1 Provide: As used in connection with labor, materials and equipment shall mean
to furnish and install complete, including connections to utilities or service,
complete anchorage and suspension, fastening or anchor devices, trim, finish
and other related work,unless specified otherwise.
15.1.2 Accepted, approved, satisfactory, equal to, proper, as directed and similar terms:
These shall mean the decision rests with the Architect, whose decision shall be
final and binding upon the Contractor and Subcontractors.
15.1.3 Project, Work, Job: In the technical sections or on the drawings, these terms
may be used interchangeably and are synonymous. They shall mean the facility,
construction and/or improvement within the intent and scope of the Contract
Documents. The terms shall mean the entire facility, or separable parts as
appropriate to the use of the term, including that under subcontract where
applicable, and includes labor, materials, equipment, services and skill.
15.1.4 Notice to Proceed: This shall be written notice by the Construction Manager to
the Contractor to commence Work of the Contract, issued either before or after
execution of the Contract. In issuing the Notice, stipulations may be included as
to time and other requirements that may condition commencement of the Work.
15.2 Use of Drawings and Specifications
15.2.1 During construction, the Contractor shall examine and use all Specifications and
Drawings for the Project, including those that may primarily pertain to other
work the Contractor normally does not perform with his own forces. The
Contractor shall use all of the Project Drawings and Specifications: for a
complete. understanding,of the Project and the Work; to determine.the type, of
construction and systems; for coordination; to determine what other work may
be involved in various parts or phases; to anticipate and notify others when work
will be required; and all other relevant matters related to the Project. The
Contractor shall also be bound by all the requirements to complete his Work,
that are applicable to, pertain to, or affect the Work, as may be shown or
inferred by the entire set of Drawings and Specifications.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-24
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800 -SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
15.3 Periodic Payment Estimate
15.3.1 When required by the Owner to establish a schedule of money available to make
payment of periodic Applications for Payment, the Contractor shall provide an
estimate by months, of the anticipated amounts for each periodic payment. The
retained percentage shall be considered in the estimate schedule, as well as
anticipated job progress and materials delivery. The schedule will be deemed an
estimate only, for financial planning purposes, and the Contractor shall not be
bound to conform to the schedule. The schedule may be required by the
Contract Documents or requested by the Owner after Contract execution.
15.4 Layout of the Work
15.4.1 Each Contractor shall employ a qualified engineer or registered surveyor to
stake out and locate the construction, locate property markers and other points
as needed to properly locate the Work under this Contract.
15.4.2 The Contractor shall recognize that the drawings necessarily are diagrammatic,
in many instances. All work and in particular, exposed piping, ducts, conduit
and similar items shall be neatly and carefully laid out to provide the most
useful space utilization and the most orderly appearance. Except as otherwise
indicated or directed, piping and similar work shall be installed as close to
ceilings and walls as conditions permit, located to prevent interference with
other work or with the use of the spaces in the manner required by the functions
of the room and the Owner. Valves shall be located in inconspicuous but
accessible places. Before proceeding with any work, particularly where
exposed, the Contractor shall carefully plan the layout and review it with the.
Architect and Construction Manager for acceptability of location.
15.4.4 The Contractor shall verify grades, lines -levels and dimensions shown on
drawings and report any errors or inconsistencies to Architect, through the
Construction Manager for decision before commencing work. The Contractor
and Subcontractor shall be responsible for the correct location, dimensions and
elevations of his Work. As the Work progresses, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the layout of the exact location of all partitions and similar
features, as guide to all trades.
15.5 General Quality of Work, Installation and Operation
15.5.1 All of the Work shall be strictly first quality, in materials, erection, installation
and workmanship.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800-25
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
15.5.2 The Contractor shall request "interpretations from the Architect, through the
Construction Manager" to "interpretations from the Construction Manager" for
the following: Work indicated on the Drawings or specified in such a manner as
to make it impossible to produce Work of the highest quality within the space
shown; possibilities of damaging effects of expansion and contraction;
discrepancies found between Drawings or between Drawings and
Specifications. If the Contractor does not request such interpretation, no excuse
will be entertained thereafter for failure to carry out and guarantee the Work in a
satisfactory manner. Elements of the Work intended to protect against the
weather shall be guaranteed weatherproof and watertight.
15.5.3 Proper performance of the Contract shall imply correct and proper placement,
proper or published results for products and equipment, fitting and operation of
fixed or movable and operating parts of the Work, including doors, windows,
hardware and all systems and equipment. Materials and equipment shall be
completed in every respect, with parts, connections, anchors, devices, backing,
fittings and other necessary items, and shall be completely installed, anchored,
fitted and placed in operating condition. Before buying, constructing or
installing work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect of conditions which
exist in the Contract Documents which will adversely affect proper operation of
first quality installation.
15.5.4 Throughout the Project, accommodate various materials and pieces of r
equipment that are fitted to other materials and equipment and various materials i
that are applied to which other materials attach. Take all reasonable precautions
to insure materials, devices, items, equipment or other products can be
satisfactorily applied or installed to each other or work of others and make
necessary adjustments during preparation of shop drawings or in advance of
field or shop work to accommodate other work.
15.5.5 Materials or equipment shall be installed or applied according to directions of
the manufacturer or recommendations of an association dealing primarily with
materials, unless specifically designated otherwise. In no case shall installation,
including any temporary work necessary (e.g., shoring), be below standard
recommended by manufacturer. Where specified requirements exceed the
manufacturer's standards, the specification shall govern. Fabrication (including
reinforcing and accessories) and installation shall be provided to insure proper
placement and use of the item or material under the location, use, condition, and
available space to serve intended function and to meet code requirements.
Equipment and devices shall be provided and installed to "fail safe" under
normal operating conditions and it shall be Contractor's obligation to provide
and install work in such manner.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 26
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 0
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00800-SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS
15.6 General Fire Safety
15.6.1 The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to maintain and exercise adequate
fire safety precautions throughout construction. This shall include providing
sufficient devices, watchmen, standby helpers or other precautions during
construction, in use of temporary heat, welding, brazing, sweating, testing or
other phases of work. Welding, brazing, cutting and sweating operations
performed in vicinity of, or accessible to, combustible materials shall be
adequately protected to make certain that sparks or hot slag do not reach the
combustible materials and start a fire. Glass and glazed material shall be
masked from splatter. When necessary to do cutting, welding, brazing,
sweating, in vicinity of wood, or combustible material (and the combustible
material cannot be removed), the materials shall be adequately protected with
fireproof coverings. In addition, a helper shall be stationed nearby with property
fire extinguishers to guard against sparks and fire.
15.6.2 Whenever combustible materials have been exposed to sparks, molten metal,
hot slag, or splatter, a man shall be kept at the place of work for at least two
hours after completion to make sure that smoldering fires have not been started.
Whenever cutting or welding operations are carried on in a vertical pipe shaft, a
man to act as a fire guard shall be employed to examine floors below the point
of cutting or welding. This fire guard shall be kept on duty at least two hours
after completion of the work to guard against fires and he shall examine each
level after this time,prior to leaving.
END OF SECTION 00800
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 00800- 27
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01014 -BID DIVISION DESCRIPTIONS
1. GENERAL
A. This section is intended to clarify the scope of work in each bid category.
B. The Owner will award Separate Prime Contracts for the construction of the
project.
2. BID PACKAGING
A. Bid Divisions referenced in this section are for work to be performed at
Existing Orono Middle School-New Media Center, Orono,Minnesota.
3. SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Bid Division categories are constructed to follow as close as possible the
CSI format of the contract documents. However, Bid Divisions may contain
work described in more than one specification section and/or parts thereof.
B. Local custom and trade-union jurisdictional settlements do not control the
scope of work included in each Prime Contract. When a potential
jurisdictional dispute or similar interruption of construction activities is first
identified or threatened, the affected Contracts shall promptly negotiate a
reasonable settlement to avoid or minimize the pending interruption and its
delays.
C. This section is intended to clarify the scope of work in each Bid Division.
Each Bid Division includes all provisions of Division 1 Specifications.
D. Unless noted otherwise, each Bid Division shall include the complete labor
and material required for the performance of the described work in accordance
with the plans and specifications.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01014- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01014-BID DIVISION DESCRIPTIONS
BID DIVISION DESCRIPTION INDEX
Division 1. General Construction and Demolition
2. Mechanical
3. Electrical
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01014-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01025-APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
1. GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this
Section.
B. This Section specifies procedures for Contractors requesting progress
payments.
2. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Schedule of Values shall be prepared and submitted, prior to the first request
for payment.
1. Required form is AIA Document G702/CMa and G703. A computer-
generated backup sheet may be used in lieu of G703 only, but must follow
the same format. Upon request from the Architect, a sample will be made
available.
B. Organization of Schedule of Values shall generally follow the trade sections of
the specification and shall be listed by section number, title and scheduled
value in column indicated. Schedule of Values shall be broken down by
individual project site.
C. Reference Article 9 of General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
3. APPLICATION FOR MONTHLY PAYMENT
A. Contractor may submit Applications for Payment on a monthly basis.
1. Each Application for Payment must be submitted directly to the
Construction Manager for processing.
2..... Monthly,request.for..P payment shall be submitted by the,25th of the month.
for pay period ending the last day of the preceding month.
B. Each Application for Payment shall include the following:
1. Four copies of the Schedule of Values as previously submitted. Schedule
of Values shall not be changed except by recording of Change Orders
when approved.
2. Four copies of the contractor's invoice showing contract amount,
P g
application amount,retainage amount and actual amount due.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01025 - 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01025-APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
C. The amount that will be retained will be as follows:
1. Five percent (5%) of the value of satisfactorily complete work and site
stored materials until the Work of the Contract is fully complete.
2. Remaining retained percentage may be requested after Final Completion
of the Work of the Contract when the Work is fully complete and
acceptable to Owner. Final payment will be made within 30 days
thereafter.
3. In event of a very minor amount of work incomplete or not corrected due
to weather, unsuitable conditions for testing or similar conditions
preventing the Contractor from proceeding, the retained amount may be
reduced to three times the value of the incomplete work upon
recommendation of the Construction Manager and approval of the Owner.
4. SURETY DEPOSITS FOR OUT-OF-STATE CONTRACTORS
A. Surety Deposit Requirements: Minnesota Statute 290.9075 requires that eight
(8) percent of each payment made to out-of-state contractors (or
subcontractors) for work done in Minnesota, be withheld (by Owner of
Contractor, as applicable), as a surety deposit on any contract (or subcontract)
that exceeds or may reasonably be expected to exceed$100,000.
B. Exempt Contractors: Surety deposit requirement may be waived if out-of-
state contractor(or subcontractor) is exempt.
C. Related Documents: Copies are included as appendix following this Section
01025.
1. Contractors' Fact Sheet regarding Surety Deposits, dated 11/89, issued by
Minnesota Department of Revenue-Taxpayer Information Division.
2. Exemption from Surety Deposits for Out-of-State Contractors, Form SD-
E, issued by Minnesota Department of Revenue to be used by each
Contractor that wants to file for and exemption from the surety deposit
requirements.
3. Instructions form SD-E, issued by Minnesota Department of Revenue.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01025 -2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION, MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
r
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01025 -APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
5. APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
' A. Final payment shall include the following:
1. All items listed above for monthly payment applications.
2. Form IC-134, Minnesota Department of Revenue Withholding Affidavit
for Contractors.
Forms for this purpose shall be completed by all Prime Contractors and
Subcontractors before final payment will be made. Forms are available
from the State Commissioner of Taxation.
3. AIA Document G707, Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment.
Upon request from the Architect, a sample will be made available.
4. AIA Document G706, Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and
Claims. Upon request from the Architect, a sample will be made
available.
rEND OF SECTION 01025
r
r
r
r
r
rEXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01025 - 3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
r
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01041 -SCHEDULES
GENERAL
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and
Division 1 Specifications, apply to work of this Section.
2. COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling with the Construction Manager.
In particular, the Contractor shall provide close coordination of progress
schedule, schedule of values, listing of subcontractors, schedule of submittals,
progress reports and payment requests.
B. Close coordination will be required between all construction trades in order
that individual areas of construction can be completed by their scheduled time.
Consult the proposed construction sequence schedule for start and completion
dates of individual work areas.
3. PRELI IINARY SCHEDULE
A. The Construction Manager has developed a Preliminary Schedule included at
the end of this section, showing work areas of the project which directly
impact the orderly use of the facility during construction. The timing of these
activities has been approved by the Owner.
B. The PreliminarySchedule may not list the work completely and may vary
Y
from the drawings and specifications.
4. C ONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. The Construction Manager shall computerize a Precedence Diagram Method
(PDM)- Network" using data supplied by- the, Contractor` and all
subcontractor(s). The Contractor will be responsible for his own methods and
procedures and the performance of the work consistent with good practice.
B. Neither the Construction Manager nor the Owner warrants the information
supplied by the Contractors is accurate or correct or that the project can be
performed as scheduled based upon data supplied by the Contractors.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all data to develop and
update the schedule. The Contractor shall supervise all work activities to
maintain progress in accordance with the schedule.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01041 - 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01041 -SCHEDULES
D. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall provide their own data to the
Construction Manager reflecting the actual plan of operation for the Project.
Schedule input data shall include a comprehensive list of all activities of the
construction phase of the project, including submittals (shop drawings,
samples, product data), procurement of material, and on-site activity(erection,
installation, construction). Activities for procurement of materials shall be
included to delineate between material purchasing and fabrication/delivery.
E. The Contractor shall assigndurations and sequencing to each activity.
�1 g tY
Submittal activities shall be listed with the anticipated date of submittal.
Procurement activities shall be listed with the duration required for fabrication r
and delivery from date of purchase. The Construction Manager shall
computerize a PDM network using input data supplied by the Contractor. The
Construction Manager will meet with the Contractor to revise and expand the
Schedule and resolve conflicts. The revised schedule shall conform to the
specific plan of operation envisioned by the Contractor.
The Construction Manager will guide the Contractor in determining the level
of detail to be included in the PDM Networks. The schedule shall be adequate
enough to evaluate progress, cost of work in place and serve as a control
technique for the Contractor's Field Superintendent.
F. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall be obligated to perform in
accordance with the Construction Schedule and to participate in updating the
schedule. The Contractor shall include provisions in all subcontracts binding
Subcontractors to participate in revisions of the schedule as are necessary, and
to supply data throughout the project.
G. Upon request, the Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager
purchase orders and subcontracts. Such information shall be submitted as
soon as available so the Construction Manager will be aware of the progress
being made by the Contractor in the placing of orders and the status of
material. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for expediting the
delivery of all material furnished by him and coordinating his subcontractors
so construction progress shall be maintained according to Contract Schedule.
5. COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. If the Contractors shall fail to adhere to the Construction Schedule or to the
said schedule as revised, he must promptly adopt such other or additional
means and methods of construction as will make up for the time lost and will
assure completion of the work in accordance with said Construction Schedule
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01041 -2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION, MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01041 -SCHEDULES
at no additional cost to the Owner, except in accordance with the provision of
the contract governing such costs. If the Owner notified the Contractor any
change in the contract or any extra work performed, or if any other conditions
arise which are likely to cause or are actually caused delays, the Contractor
shall notify the Construction Manager in writing within five (5) days of the
receipt of such notice or occurrence of such condition. This notice shall
document the effect, if any, of such change, or extra work, of suspension or
other condition upon the Construction Schedule. No time extensions will be
granted due to a delay in any activity unless the Owner deems the length of
the delay exceeds the float time associated with the activity at the time the
delay occurs.
B. Refer to General Conditions Paragraph 8.3.3 for actual damages clause.
g
6. FLOAT TIME
A. The Contractor, in directing the compliance with Construction Schedule shall
cooperate with the Owner and the Construction Manager in utilizing float
time. Full control over use of total float time in the Schedule rests with the
Owner and will be utilized by him in any necessary rescheduling of the
Construction Schedule occasioned by design changes,field conditions, strikes,
Acts of God, or unavoidable equipment and material delays. If rescheduling
of any activity adversely affects the Contractor's operation, he shall advise the
Construction Manager in writing no later than five (5) days after the receipt of
the revised schedule or Notice of Intent to revise the schedule.
7. PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
Substantial Completion-August 11, 2000
Final Completion-August 18, 2000
END OF SECTION 01041
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01041 -3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. WORK INCLUDED
A. Refer to Section 01010 and 01500 for special requirements, protection,
constraints, timing of work, scheduling of work, enclosures and similar
requirements relating to this Section.
B. This Section covers cutting, demolition, removal work, patching and
restoration of work as necessary to accomplish and complete all work under
the Contract, including any relocation or reuse of existing materials,
equipment, systems, or other work, as well as the disposition of salvaged
materials or debris. This Section applies to all work under the Contract,
including general construction, mechanical and electrical work.
C. Drawings generally indicate the extent of demolition, removals, relocations
and cutting. The drawings shall not be construed as indicating all required
work, nor indicating all conditions or details which might be encountered to
accomplish the work of this Contract. The Contractor and his subcontractors
shall examine the spaces themselves to determine the actual conditions and
requirements. All removals, demolition, cutting, restoration, new installations
and other work shall be accomplished to transform the existing spaces and
conditions to the new conditions required under the Contract, as well as to
accomplish all tie-in work of new to existing.
D. It is the intent that unless specially shown on the general construction type
drawings (i.e.; architectural and structural) and schedules, or in inherent in the
work to be accomplished under the general construction work of the area, that
the mechanical and electrical Contractors shall perform the demolition,
cutting, removals, relocations, patching and restoration as will be required to
accomplish the work under their contracts. All work shown or indicated on
the general construction drawings and schedules shall be accomplished by the
General Contractor.
E. Except for general demolition of entire areas, it is the intent that at each area,
or.space, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall make the removals,
perform cutting or demolition and accomplish relocations of work normal to
his trades (i.e., Mechanical Contractor removes or relocates piping, ductwork
and similar; Electrical Contractor removes or relocates panelboards, conduit
lighting and similar). At areas of general demolition of the entire spaces, the
Mechanical and Electrical shall make removals of work normal to their trades
or as may be called for, for reuse or relocation, make any relocations and cut-
off, terminate, cap or otherwise discontinue services that will be abandoned or
removed in the space.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01045 - 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, relocation, patching and
other restoration by using only mechanics skilled in the trade. If necessary,
sublet the work to skilled contractors or subcontractors.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work of this Section with all
subcontractors so the work will progress without interruption and minimum
delays. The Contractor shall also coordinate and schedule the work with the
Owner and Construction Manager where possible disturbance may occur and
where relocations or other potential disruptions of the Owner's functions and
services may occur. All work affecting the Owner's functions and services
shall be performed at times acceptable to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01045
r
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01045 - 2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01200-PROJECT MEETINGS
1. GENERAL
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project
meetings including but not limited to:
1. Pre-Construction Conference.
2. Progress Meetings.
2. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Construction Conference shall be scheduled as directed by Construction
Manager. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
B. Attendees: Construction Manager,the Owner, Architect and their consultants,
the Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers,
suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the
conference by persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters
relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including
such topics as:
1. Construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Procedures for processing field decisions and change orders.
5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6. Distribution of contract documents.
7. Submittal of shop drawings,product data and samples.
8. Preparation of record documents.
9. Use of the premises.
10.- Office,work and storage,areas.
11. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
12. Safety procedures.
13. First aid.
14. Security.
15. Housekeeping.
16. Working hours.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01200- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
3. PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Construction Manager shall conduct regular progress meetings at the Project
site. Time of meeting to be scheduled by Construction Manager. Coordinate
dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner, Construction Manager
and Architect, per Owner's request, each prime contractor, subcontractor,
supplier or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented
at these meetings by persons familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to progress.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress
meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress.
Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the current status of the Project.
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's
Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will
be completed within the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including such
items as:
a. Interface requirements.
b. Time.
C. Sequences.
d. Deliveries.
e. Off-site fabrication problems. .
f. Access.
g. Site utilization.
h. Temporary facilities and services.
i. Hours of work.
j. Hazards and risks.
k. Housekeeping.
1. Quality and work standards.
m. Change orders.
n. Documentation of information for payment requests.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01200- 2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01200-PROJECT MEETINGS
D. Reporting: No later than three (3) days after each progress meeting date, the
Construction Manager shall distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to
each party present and to other parties as applicable.
1. Schedule Updating: The construction schedule shall be revised after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. The revised schedule shall be issued to all applicable parties.
END OF SECTION 01200
i
1
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01200-3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01300-SUBMITTALS
1. GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this
Section.
B. This Section defines procedures for the following submittals required by the
Contract Documents.
2. SCHEDULE OF SUBMI'I°TALS -REQUIRED
A. The following documents are required to be submitted to the Architect and/or
Construction Manager for review at the times indicated.
1. Prior to Bidding(Ten days prior to bid opening):
Request for approval of substitute material and equipment.
2. Within 10 days of Contract approval by Owner:
Performance and Payment Bonds
Insurance evidence
List of materials and equipment
List of subcontractors
3. Within 10 days of signing Contracts:
Schedule of Values (based on specification sections)
' 4. During Progress of Project as specified:
Shop drawings
Samples
Test.results.
Payment requests
5. Upon Substantial Completion:
Equipment and material guarantees
Operations manuals
As-built drawing notes
Final payment request accompanied by:
Certificate of Payment of Claims
Withholding Tax Affidavit
Consent of Surety to Final Payment
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01300- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01300-SUBN=ALS
3. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Reference Section 00700-General Conditions, and the following:
B. Shop drawings prepared specifically for this work shall be submitted to the
Construction Manager for submittal to the Architect in one reproducible
transparency and six (6) bluelines of each such drawings. Contractors are to
review and stamp shop drawings or they will be returned by Architect/
Construction Manager. At least 40 square inches of space in the lower right
hand comer of each sheet shall be left blank for approval stamps and notes.
After the Architect/Construction Manager has checked and approved each
drawing, he will so stamp it, make such copies as he requires and return it
through the Construction Manager to the Contractor who shall make and
distribute such copies as he requires. In instances where minor corrections are
required, they will be so noted on the drawing and it will be stamped "Make
Corrections Noted" and returned to the Contractor as above. Where major
corrections are required, the transparency will be returned to the Contractor
who shall make a new drawing incorporating the required corrections and
submit a transparency of the revised drawings for approval.
C. Shop drawings in the form of printed descriptive information shall be bound
together with a title and index sheet listing each sheet in the binding. The title
and index sheet shall have a blank rectangular space of at least 4" x 8" for
notes and approval stamps. Six (6) copies are to be submitted to the
Construction Manager.
D. Shop drawings and samples shall be dated and contain: Names of project,
description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete
identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed.
E. Submission of shop drawings shall be accompanied by transmittal letter, in
duplicate, containing project name, Contractor's name, number of drawings,
titles and other pertinent data such as section and article numbers.
4. SAMPLES
A. Reference Section 00700- General Conditions, and the following:
B. Deliver samples of materials, equipment, assemblies and components as ,
required by specifications to Construction Manager for submittal to the
Architect (or other designated location) with delivery costs prepaid. At
Construction Manager's direction, remove samples after approval. Samples
shall be of like kind to the products to be provided for building and shall have
finish and other characteristics required by work. Samples shall indicated type
of construction and quality proposed for installation in the project.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01300 -2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01300-SUBMITTALS
C. Where the Contractor requires approved samples to be returned, submit the
number of samples required by the Contractor plus three (3) which shall be
retained by the Architect and Construction Manager.
5. LIST OF MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions, and Section 00800 -
Supplemental Conditions, and as follows:
B. Within ten (10) days after the award of the contract (notice to proceed or
letter of intent), the Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of a complete list
of all materials, products, and equipment proposed to be used in construction
to the Construction Manager for acceptance. Materials shall not be ordered
until the proposed listed materials, products and equipment proposed to be
' used in construction are reviewed by the Architect for acceptance and the
listed materials are accepted.
C. Where two or more makes or kinds of items are named in the specifications
(or additional names are called for in addendum), the Contractor shall state
which particular make or kind of each item he proposes to provide. If the
Contractor fails to state a preference, the Owner shall have the right to select
any of the makes of kinds named without change in price.
D. This list shall be arranged in order of specification sections. The items listed
shall fully conform to project requirements and specifications. All materials
are subject to the Architect's acceptance. After acceptance, there shall be no
changes or substitutions.
E. The list shall clearly identify the material, product or equipment by
manufacturer and brand by listing the names, for all items, including those
where only one material or product is specified. Each and all material,
products and equipment shall be specifically names,not listed "as specified".
6. LIST.OR SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions, and Section 00800 -
Supplemental Conditions, and as follows:
B. Within ten (10) days after the award of the contract (notice to proceed) and
prior to the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit three (3)
copies of a complete list of all work he proposes to subcontract and the
1 subcontractors (and major material suppliers) he proposes to use in
performance of the Contract to the Construction Manager for review by the
Architect, Construction Manager and Owner. The list shall include Sub-
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01300 - 3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01300 -SUBMITTALS
subcontractors. No subcontracts shall be executed until the proposed list of
subcontractors is accepted.
C. Reasonable objection shall be deemed to have been exercised when, in the
opinion of the Architect or Owner, objections have been made based on their
reasonable belief that the proposed Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or
material supplier: (1) cannot provide materials, equipment, facilities or other
products as specified or requited by the Contract Documents; (2) cannot
provide labor and skill necessary to accomplish the part of Work for which he
is proposed, including but not limited to quality of workmanship; (3) lacks
adequate and appropriate experience for the part of the Work for which he is
proposed, including materials or methods required; (4)has previously failed to
perform timely or satisfactorily, including in cooperation and in necessary
services after project completion; (5) proposed deviations in material or
methods that are unacceptable to the Architect or Owner, such as proposing
materials or methods that were not specified or not listed in addenda; (6) there
is reasonable doubt he can satisfactorily perform the part of the Work for
which he is proposed, within the time schedule, due to size of organization or
existing work load; 7) cannot demonstrate his ability through quality or
representative work to perform the part of the Work for which he is being
considered; (8) of questionable integrity; (9) or other similar considerations
bearing on the possibility of unsatisfactory performance. If the Owner,
Construction Manager or the Architect has a reasonable objection to any
person or entity proposed by a substitute to whom neither the Owner,
Construction Manager, nor the Architect has any reasonable objection and no
increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed as a result of any such
substitution.
D. After review of the proposed list, no change of any Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or supplier not objected to by the Architect, Construction
Manager or Owner, shall be made, except for cause acceptable to all parties.
In the event of a proposed change, the Contractor shall submit the reasons for
the change, in writing, along with the alternate proposed Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or material supplier. The proposed change is subject to the
conditions of this Article and the requirements of the General Conditions.
7. GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. Refer to Section 00700 - General Conditions, Article 3.5 and 9.3.3 and
Section 00800- Supplemental Conditions.
B. Special Warranties: Contractor shall complete all manufacturer's warranty
registrations and shall submit same to Construction Manager for transmittal to
Owner.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01300-4
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01300-SUBMITTALS
8. INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. For all items of mechanical equipment and electrical apparatus, the Contractor
shall obtain from the manufacturer and furnish to the Architect three (3)
copies of the following:
1. Operating instructions.
2. Parts lists (including name and address of nearest vendor or service agent).
3. Maintenance instructions.
4. Shop Drawings.
B. These items are separate from and in addition to the operating placards
required to be attached to or posted near the equipment.
C. Contractor shall provide field instruction to Owner's personnel as required to
fully instruct them in correct operating and maintenance procedure, for all
equipment installed under this contract.
D. Manual shall be submitted in 8-1/2" x 11" form in adequately sized three (3)
ring loose leaf binders with entire contents indexed and thumb-tabbed.
9. RECORD SET OF DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall provide the record set of drawings to the Construction
Manager at the completion of Contract.
B. During construction, Contractor shall maintain a clean set of drawings for the
sole purpose of recording changes and actual "as installed" information.
' C. As a general guide, the type of information to be recorded on the record set
includes: (1) changes, deviations or revisions made, except minor or
noncritical dimensions, including those made by Change Order or
1 Supplementary Instructions; (2) omissions, including work omitted by
accepted alternates, (3}dimensioned..locations of major or main utility lines,
such as main conduit runs, piping mains and similar work; (4) locations of
control valves; (5) additions to the work; (6) changes in significant details;
(7) changed footing or other elevations; (8) changes in locations of
panelboards, outlets, drains, piping, opening, dampers and similar features;
(9) other similar data.
END OF SECTION 01300
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01300 - 5
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
1 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01400- QUALITY CONTROL-
TESTING SERVICES
1. GENERAL
' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this
' Section.
B. This section specifies the general requirements for testing and inspection
services.
C. Cooperate with Owner's testing laboratory and all others responsible for
testing and inspecting the Work.
D. Provide other testing and inspecting as specified to be furnished by the
Contractor in this Section and/or elsewhere in these Specifications.
E. Provide quality control by the observation and acceptance of work by others
being built upon.
F. Related work described elsewhere:
1. Requirements for testing are described in Divisions 2, 3, 4 and 5 product
sections of these Specifications.
i2. Where no testing requirements are described, but the Construction
Manager decides that testing is required, he may direct that such testing be
performed under current standards for testing and Section 7.7 of the
General Conditions.
G. Selection of testing laboratory: The Owner shall hire and pay for an
independent testing laboratory.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Testing, when required, will be in accordance with pertinent codes and
regulations and with selected standards of the American Society for Testing
and Materials.
3. REVIEW OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. On all Project Drawings, figures take precedence over measurement by scale,
' and any scaling is done at the Contractor's own risk. Before ordering any
materials or performing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all
measurements at the project site and be responsible for the correctness of
' same.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01400- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT '
01400- QUALITY CONTROL -
TESTING SERVICES
B. Promptly respond to test reports and related instructions to ensure necessary '
retesting and replacement of materials with the least possible delay in progress
of the Work.
4. FIELD CONDITIONS r
A. The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and
shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the
Contract Documents and any shop drawings and product data before
commencing any related work. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions shall be
reported to the Construction Manager and the Architect at once.
5. PAYMENT FOR TESTING
A. Initial Services: The Owner's Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for
initial testing services as outlined in various sections and Section 7.7 of the
General Conditions.
B. Re-Testing Services: When initial tests indicate non-compliance with the
Contract Documents, all subsequent retesting occasioned by the non-
compliance shall be performed by the same testing agency and the costs
thereof will be borne by the Contractor responsible for the work that is non-
compliant.
6. TESTING
A. Code Compliance Testing: Inspections and tests required by codes or
ordinances, or by a plan approval authority, and which are made by a legally
constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of and shall be paid for by the
Contractor,unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor's Convenience Testing: Inspecting and testing performed
exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor.
7. INSPECTION
A. Inspection by Owner's Personnel: From time to time, personnel in the employ '
of the Owner may inspect the Work where the Work is in progress, but shall
have no authority to direct the Contractor or request changes in the Work
except through the Construction Manager and the Architect.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01400- 2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
01400- QUALITY CONTROL-
TESTING SERVICES
B. Inspection of Work by Others: Each Contractor shall inspect Work of others
' which will receive or is adjacent to his Work before commencing his Work.
Do not proceed until conditions which would result in a less than first class
installation are satisfactorily corrected. Commencing Work shall be construed
' as acceptance of the Work of others, by the Contractor, as satisfactory to
receive his Work. The Contractor shall bear all costs to correct the
unsatisfactory Work.
8. COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY
A. Representatives of the testing laboratory shall have access to the Work at all
times. Provide facilities for such access in order that the laboratory may
properly perform its function.
B. Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, will be taken by the testing personnel. Sampling equipment and
' personnel will be provided by the testing laboratory. Deliveries of specimens
and samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing
laboratory.
C. Test results and reports shall be furnished simultaneously to the Engineer (2
copies) and the Construction Manager(1 copy) within one week of testing.
9. TESTING SCHEDULE
' A. The Owner shall pre-qualify and identify qualified independent inspection
agencies in a timely manner, allowing Engineer adequate time for review and
approval.
B. Special Structural Testing Schedule to be implemented per specifications.
C. When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, the
Construction Manager shall coordinate such changes of.schedule with the
testing laboratory as required.
1 D. When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the established
schedule, but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to
' incompleteness of the Work, all extra charges for testing attributable to the
delay may be backcharged to the Contractor and shall not be borne by the
Owner.
END OF SECTION 01400
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01400- 3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
' 1. GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
' B. No separate payment will be made for any work under this Section.
1 C. Work required by this Section includes but is not limited to the following:
1) Temporary utilities:
a. Water service and distribution.
b. Temporary electric power and light.
c. Temporary heat.
d. Telephone service.
2) Temporary construction and support facilities:
a. Field offices and storage sheds.
b. Sanitary facilities.
c. Dewatering facilities and drains.
d. Temporary structure enclosures.
' e. Temporary signs.
f. Waste disposal services.
g. Rodent and pest control.
h. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
3) Temporary security and protection facilities:
' a. Temporary fire protection.
b. Site enclosures,barricades, warning signs, lights.
c. Environmental protection.
4) Dumpsters: The Owner will pay for and the Construction Manager will
' provide and coordinate metal containers (dumpsters) for collection of
debris.
a. Contractor shall not abuse use of dumpsters.
b. Contractor shall not cross-contaminate any designated containers.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and ,
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1) Building code requirements. '
2) Health and safety regulations.
3) Utility company regulations.
4) Police,fire department and rescue squad rules. '
5) Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, 'Building Construction and
Demolition Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety
Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design
Library 'Temporary Electrical Facilities".
Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and
Services",prepared jointly by AGC and ASC,for industry recommendations. ,
C. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National ,
Electric Code (NFPA 70).
D. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test ,
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
3. TEMPORARY UTILITIES ,
A. All existing utilities may be used to the extent of accessibility and to the extent
that their use by the Contractor does not in any way interrupt the Owner's
activities. Existing utilities used by the Contractor shall not be abused or
misused in any way.
B. Water Service and Distribution:
1) Water needed for the execution of this contract may be furnished from
sources located within the construction limits, upon completion of the
installation of the water mains. Until this work has been completed, it
shall be the responsibility of each contractor to provide such water as may '
be required for the execution of such work of the contractor.
2) For any additional water requirements, the Mechanical Contractor shall '
make all arrangements necessary and pay for:
a. All temporary permits. '
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES
b. Connection of meters.
' c. Water used on the job will not be charged to the Contractor.
eC. Temporary Electric Power and Light:
1) For electrical requirements, the Electrical Contractor shall make all
' arrangements necessary and pay for:
a. Temporary power service required during construction, including
' weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system
of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during
construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload protected
disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution
switchgear.
b. Pay for all temporary permits.
c. Connection of meters.
' d. Electricity used on the job will not be charged to the Contractor.
' e. Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide
temporary lighting with local switching.
' (1) Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and
protection requirements, without operating the entire system, and
will provide adequate illumination for construction operations
' and traffic conditions.
(2) Unless otherwise noted in the Electrical Specifications, provide
the following minimum requirements:
(a) Temporary lighting shall be provided at not less than 1/2 watt
' per square foot with not less than one light outlet per room or
space. All lamp outlets shall be lamped with 200 watt inside
frosted lamps.
(b) Temporary 20 amp, 120 volts and 50 amp, 208 volts
P P
receptacles shall be provided at locations within the
construction zone at not more than 75 feet apart.
f. Temporary power service required for the Construction Manager's
trailer(s).
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500 - 3
' BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS '
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
2) Remove temporary electrical items when permanent power and/or lighting
is activated. '
3) Electrical Contractor to furnish, install and maintain all necessary safety,
warning and security lights to prevent injury to persons or damage to
property.
4) Each Contractor shall provide extension cords required for his operations. ,
5) Each Contractor shall provide any heavy-duty electrical power, exceeding
available temporary power,required for his operations. '
6) Prior to substantial completion, replace all burned out bulbs and tubes.
D. Temporary Heat and Cold Weather Protection:
1) Reference Mechanical and Electrical Divisions for additional information. '
a. Gas line piping and the required electrical connections shall be the
responsibility of Mechanical Contractor/Electrical. '
2) Owner is responsible for providing, maintaining and paying for all
required temporary heat after building enclosure for the duration of the
Contract.
3) Contractor is responsible to provide temporary heat required by ,
construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or
protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a ,
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition
required and minimized consumption of energy.
4) Except where the use of the permanent system is authorized, provide
vented self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
a. The use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander ,
type heating units is prohibited.
5) Except as otherwise specified, maintain a minimum temperature between ,
50° and 75° F in building at all times.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500-4
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL '
DIVISION 1
' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
' 6) Remove all temporary heating devices when permanent heating systems
are activated.
' 7) Only where the building, or portion of the building, is substantially
completed, and accepted as completed, including total enclosure with
' walls, windows, doors and roofing, will the existing or newly installed,
permanent heating system, be allowed to be used for construction
purposes, the Contractor shall:
a. Notify the Owner in writing, one week prior to switch over.
' b. Contractor shall have existing utility meters, gas, electric and water
read. Document in writing to Owner all readings.
c. Contractor shall direct utility companies to temporarily assign, for the
duration of construction, all billing directly to the Contractor for
payment.
d. Keep equipment and surrounding areas in a clean and safe condition.
e. Contractor shall recondition units, including changing filters,
lubrication, etc.
' f. Warranties will be maintained. Any warranty or guarantee period on
any permanent items used during temporary heating periods shall
commence on date of final acceptance of building by Owner.
' E. Temporary Telephone Service:
' 1) Each Contractor shall provide temporary telephone and fax service as
needed for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the
construction period. Contractor shall pay for all local telephone service.
' Long distance calls shall be paid for by person or company placing the
call.
2) Contractor is not to use, or tap into any of the Owner's existing telephone
service.
' 3) Remove all temporary telephone service, including wiring and
connections, at the completion of the Contract. Wiring shall not be cut
and left above ceiling lines.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500- 5
' BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS '
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
4. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES '
A. Field Offices and Storage Sheds: The Contractor, and other prime '
Subcontractors, shall provide a temporary field office unless otherwise pre-
arranged with the Owner. Structures shall be of incombustible construction
when located within the construction area, or within 30 feet of building lines.
Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.
1) Storage sheds shall be sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate '
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service.
Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the new
building or elsewhere on the site. ,
B. Sanitary Facilities:
1) Unless otherwise provided under the Mechanical Section of the
Specifications,the following shall be provided:
a. Owner/Construction Manager shall provide and maintain in a clean, '
sanitary condition, self-contained toilet units.
C. Dewatering Facilities:
1) For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not
directly associated with construction activities included under individual
Sections, provide dewatering devices and operations to maintain the site,
excavations and construction free of water. ,
D. Temporary Building Enclosures:
1) Structure Enclosure: Owner/Construction Manager shall furnish and ,
install, and Owner/Construction Manager shall maintain any temporary
enclosures, doors and transparent plastic covered windows, or plywood '
and stud,construction, required-to protect building.,from damage due to
vandalism, or the elements, or to maintain suitable temperature during
installation or finishing work. Provide all items required to ensure safety '
of individuals on site.
a. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 square feet ,
in area, use UL-labeled fire-retardant treated material for framing and
main sheathing.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500-6
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL ,
DIVISION 1
' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
' 2) Interior Enclosure: Owner/Construction Manager shall furnish, install and
maintain area separations within the building to eliminate non-
construction traffic and non-authorized traffic or provide security or
protection from hazardous construction conditions.
E. Temporary Signs:
1) Project Signs: Will not be required.
' 2) Contractor Identification Signs: Will not be permitted without
Owner/Construction Manager approval.
' 3) Construction Directional Signs: Construction Manager shall provide as
required to give directional information to construction personnel and
visitors.
F. Waste Disposal Service: Each Contractor shall collect waste from the
construction areas and dispose of in dumpsters as provided by the Owner.
Contractors not complying with the removal of construction waste shall be
backcharged by the Construction Manager for removal of construction debris.
G. Construction Aids and Miscellaneous Services:
1) Scaffolding: Each Contractor to be responsible for his own scaffolding.
2) Bank Protection: Building Excavation Contractor to provide and maintain
' proper shoring and bracing to prevent earth from caving or washing into
the building excavation.
3) Damage to Existing Streets: Each Contractor to be responsible for repairs
to existing streets damaged as the result of his operations.
4) Blocking Backing and Grounds: Each Contractor to be responsible for
providing,,the blocking,.. backing.. and grounds, in. all walls. and. above
ceilings necessary for the installation of his work.
5. TEMPORARY SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES:
A. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied by
permanent facilities, the Construction Manager shall install and maintain
temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against
1 reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10
"Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers", and NFPA 241 "Standard for
Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition Operations".
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500-7
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS '
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1) Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose, but not less than on extinguisher on each floor at or near each
usable stairwell.
2) Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3) Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, r
temporary fire protection facilities and access routes for fighting fire.
4) Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary '
heating units and similar sources of fire ignition.
5) Tobacco products are prohibited on the Owner's premises. '
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities '
and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with
environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways
and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects ,
might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise.
Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize
complaints from persons or firms near the site. '
6. OPERATION,TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize
waste and abuse. ,
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1) Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity
control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour day basis where ,
required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2) Protection: Prevent water filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers '
for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained '
longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when
replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that
may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility.
Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired. '
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500- 8
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL '
1
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1) Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of
' the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project
identification signs.
' 2) Remove temporary paving that is not intended for or acceptable for
integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for
landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that does not
comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds,
and other substances which might impair growth of plant materials or
' lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks at the
temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.
3) At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that
have been used during the construction period, including but not limited
to:
a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to
unusual operating conditions.
1 c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by substantial
hours of use.
' END OF SECTION 01500
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01500 - 9
' BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
SECTION 01630
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section defines procedures to be followed to gain acceptance of products in the Work which are not listed in
' the individual specification sections. A two step process is required.
B. Requests for acceptance for bidding purposes of alternative manufacturers is encouraged except where specifically
prohibited by this Project Manual.
1.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS NOT REQUIRING PRE-BID SUBMITTAL
' A. Where products are specified by reference standards, any product established by a material testing agency to meet
these standards is acceptable.
B. Where multiple manufacturers and associated models are specified,select any one named.
C. Where manufacturer(s)alone are specified,select any manufacturer and the product recommended in writing by the
manufacturer as most suited to the application shown on the Drawings and Specifications.
' D. Where the phrase "or equal' follows the name of a manufacturer, any product which meets the performance and
appearance standards established by the specified manufacturer may be selected, subject to the Architect's
acceptance.
1.03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS REQUIRING PRE-BID SUBMITTALS
A. Step One-Manufacturers Acceptance
1. Individual specification sections may be amended by the Architect during the bid period to include additional
' names of manufacturers determined to be capable of providing acceptable materials.
2. To propose the names of specific manufacturers,submit,or arrange for suppliers to submit,written requests to
Architect or appropriate Architect's Consultant. Requests received ten(10)calendar days prior to bid date will
' be considered.
a. Provide sufficient review data. Include specified manufacturer's model numbers and proposed
' manufacturer's product literature, noting product numbers for proposed substitutions, and where
appropriate,samples and data relating to construction details. If the product is not identical to specified
product, submit<letter stating proposed.,manufacturer will custom make products to meet specified
product.
b. Architect's acceptance is based upon his determination that a manufacturer is capable of supplying
acceptable materials. Approval is not assured or implied for a specific material,item of equipment,color
' or finish.
C. Official notification will be by addendum to the Contract Documents. However,in addition, if letters of
request are delivered in duplicate with accompanying stamped self addressed envelopes, copies may be
' returned with Architect's decision in advance.
1
' 01630-1 No.99132-CP2
B. Step Two-Product Acceptance
1. Upon award of a construction contract,accepted manufacturers may submit for review to the Architect through
the General Contractor, specific products, materials or equipment items as substitutes for those specified. t
General contractor to provide letter stating they will reimburse Architect to review substitutions.
2. Architect will review substitute products for performance, appearance, color, finish, size and suitability for
inclusion in the work. If a substitute product is not accepted, submit another product by the same or other ,
accepted manufacturer or provide the specified product.
3. Match specified colors and dimensions exactly, whether or not they are standard with the substitute product,
unless a minor variation is accepted by the Architect.
4. If a substitute product is accepted, coordinate any necessary changes in other related work and pay for these
changes. Pay cost of architectural or engineering services, if any,required to incorporate substitute products '
in the Work.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS BY CHANGE ORDER '
A. A substitution for a specified product may be permitted by "change order" at no additional cost to the Owner if
product proposed is determined to be equivalent in performance and suitability, and if at least one of the following '
conditions apply:
1. Owner is given a credit for the work.
2. Product is of superior quality than product specified. '
3. Product color or finish selection is preferable. '
4. Products specified and upon which building is designed have been discontinued by manufacturer.
B. Provide Architect,through Owner,reasonable compensation for product evaluation. '
END OF SECTION 01630 ,
1
01630-2 No.99132-CP2 '
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1
1. GENERAL
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project
closeout, including but not limited to:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
' 3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
' B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the
appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
2. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion, complete the following: List exceptions in the
request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the
date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for
the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include
supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract
Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the
Contract Sum.
a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of
' incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons
the Work is not complete.
' 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements,
final certifications and similar documents.
4. Remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools,
' mock-ups, and similar elements.
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect
will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled
requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that
1 must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01700- 1
' BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the '
Work has been substantially completed.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for
final acceptance.
3. FINAL ACCEPTANCE ,
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of
final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in ,
the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting '
documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates
of insurance for products and completed operations where required.
Conform to the requirements of Section 01025 -Application for Payment. '
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes
to the Contract Sum. '
3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to
be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or '
otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and
dated by the Architect.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, '
and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the
Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of '
the Work.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements. '
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Construction Manager will reinspect the Work
upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from '
earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has
been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of
P P P� P P
final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01700-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL '
DIVISION 1
' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1
obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final
' acceptance.
2. If necessary,reinspection will be repeated.
' 4. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
' A, When the Owner has determined that the Work is acceptable under the
Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, Trade Contractor shall
prepare and submit final Application for Payment to the Construction
' Manager together with,but not limited to, the following:
1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document
' G706 (most recent edition of form).
2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A (most
recent edition of form).
3. Contractor's Lien waiver in the full amount of the Contract Sum.
4. Lien waivers from all subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and major
material suppliers who have furnished material for the work under the
' contract with the Trade Contractor or a subcontractor. the lien waivers
shall be in the full amount of the contract involved.
5. Consent of surety to final payment of Consent of Surety Company to Final
Payment,AIA Document G707, (most recent edition of form).
' 6. Affidavit for obtaining final settlement of Contract with the State of
Minnesota and any of its Political of Governmental Subdivisions,
Department of Revenue Form IC-134.
' T. Evidence of Compliance with requirements of governing,authorities:
' a. Certificate of Inspection from all required agencies
and departments.
b. Certificate of Occupancy.
8. Project Record Documents
9. Operating and Maintenance Data,Instructions to Owner's Personnel
' 10. Warranties and Bonds.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01700- 3
' BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS '
01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1
11. Special tools required for Owner maintenance. '
B. Submit four copies each of Items#1 through#5 above, and two copies each of
Items#6 and#7 above. t
5. RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect
from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access
to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working '
hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line '
white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show
the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work
as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing
conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a
cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give
particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure '
and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish
between variations in separate categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown '
on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.
3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. '
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable
paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification '
on the cover.of each set..
C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, '
including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such
as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during
construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual
Work performed in comparison with the test of the Specifications and
modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options
and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be 1
readily discerned later by direct observations. Note related record drawing
information and Product Data.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01700-4
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL t
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01700- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the
Construction Manager for the Owner's records.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for
requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection
with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates
of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good
order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and
reference. Submit to the Construction Manager for the Owner's records.
6. FINAL CLEANING
A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General
Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities."
B. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed
for protection of the Work during construction.
C. Silt Fence: At completion of this contract work, the Contractor shall leave in
place the silt fence for subsequent phases of work. The subsequent
maintenance and removal of the silt fence will be by others.
D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and
safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury
debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile,
harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste
materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.
' END OF SECTION 01700
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01700-5
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01710- CLEANING UP
1. GENERAL
A. The Contractors shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
perform all work and services necessary for cleaning up required in
conjunction with work performed, as shown on drawings and as specified, in
accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents and completely
coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental
to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
C. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for final
cleaning at Substantial Completion.
1. Special cleaning requirements for specific elements of the Work are
included in appropriate Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.
2. Multiple Prime Contracts: Except as otherwise indicated, each prime
Contractor is responsible for coordination of final cleaning where more
than one Prime Contractor is involved in final cleaning a single area or
piece of equipment.
3. Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste disposal
operations in compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully
with federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations.
a. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint
thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
b. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the
premises will not be permitted.
4. Related work specified elsewhere:
a. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, include general project closeout
requirements.
b. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities, include general cleanup and
waste removal requirements.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01710- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS '
01710 - CLEANING UP
2. MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the
manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning
agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might
damage finished surfaces.
3. DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building and grounds are maintained free
from accumulation of waste and rubbish.
1. Special attention shall be given to cleaning up the site of debris, waste and
rubbish. The Owner is extremely concerned over items left in the open
that can be thrown through windows.
B. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
C. At reasonable intervals, minimum once a week, clean up site and access and
dispose of debris.
D. Provide metal containers for collection of debris. r
E. Remove debris from site. Legally dispose of off Owner's site. ■
F. Vacuum interior areas when ready for painting.
G. Handle waste materials in a controlled manner. Do not drop or throw
materials from heights.
H. Schedule cleaning operations so that contaminants resulting from cleaning do
not fall on wet painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01710
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01710-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01720-PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
1. GENERAL
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools,equipment, and
performing all work and services to provide record documents as specked, in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, and completely
coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project
Record Documents.
I1. Project Record Documents required include:
a. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings.
b. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings.
c. Newly prepared Drawings.
d. Marked-up copies of Specifications, addenda and Change Orders.
e. Marked-up Product Data submittals.
f. Record Samples.
g. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
h. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.
2. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store record documents and
Samples in the field office apart from Contract Documents used for
construction. Do not permit Project Record Documents to be used for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order, and in a
clean, dry, legible condition. Make documents and Samples available at
all times for inspection by the Architect.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01700 - Project Closeout, includes general project closeout
requirements..
2. Section 01300 - Submittals, includes general requirements for submittal of
Project Record Documents.
2. RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Mark-up Procedure: During the construction period,maintain a set of blue- or
black-line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project
Record Document purposes.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01720- 1
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01720-PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
3. RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. During the construction period, maintain one copy of the Project
Specifications, including addenda and modifications issued, for Project
Record Document purposes.
1. Mark the Specifications to indicate the actual installation where the
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Specifications and
modifications issued. Note related Project Record Drawing information,
where applicable. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of
product options, and information on concealed installations that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
a. In each Specification Section where products, materials or units of
equipment are specified or scheduled, mark the copy with the
proprietary name and model number of the product furnished.
2. Upon completion of mark-up, submit record Specifications to the
Architect for Owner's records.
4. RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. During the constructioneriod, maintain one copy of each Product Data
P
submittal for Project Record Document purposes.
1. Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where the
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data
submitted. Include significant changes in the product delivered to the site,
and changes in manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for
installation.
2.. Give articular attention to information on concealed,.products.. and.
P
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
3. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record Drawings, where
applicable.
4. Upon completion of mark-up, submit a complete set of record Product
Data to the Architect for the Owner's records.
5. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual, instead of
submittal as record Product Data.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01720-4
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01720-PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
1. Mark these Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the
installation varies appreciably from the installation shown originally. Give
particular attention to information on concealed elements which would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later. Items required to be
marked include but are not limited to:
a. Dimensional changes to the Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on the Drawings.
c. Changes made by Change Order.
d. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
2. Mark completely and accurately record prints of Contract Drawings or
Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical
conditions. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on
Contract Drawings location.
3. Mark record sets with red erasable colored pencil; use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the
same location.
4. Mark important additional information which was either shown
schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
5. Note construction change directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change
Order numbers and similar identification.
6. Responsibility for Markup: Where feasible, the individual or entity who
obtained record data, whether the individual or entity is the installer,
subcontractor, or similar entity, is required to prepare the mark-up on
record Drawings.
a. . Accurately, record. information., in an.. understandable.. Drawing
technique.
b. Record data as soon asP ossible after it has been obtained. In the case
of concealed installations, record and check the mark-up prior to
concealment.
c. At time of Substantial Completion, submit record Drawings to
Architect for Owner's records. Organize into sets, bind and label sets
for Owner's continued use.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01720-2
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01720-PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
6. Each prime Contractor is responsible for mark-up and submittal of record
Product Data for its own Work.
5. MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping
requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities.
Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records
and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for use
and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.
1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but
are not limited to the following:
a. Field records on excavations and foundations.
b. Field records on underground construction and similar Work.
C. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines.
d. Invert elevations of drainage piping.
e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels.
f. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances.
g. Records of plant treatment.
h. Ambient and substrate condition tests.
i. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products.
j. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records.
k. Testing and qualification of tradesmen.
1. Documented qualification of installation firms.
in. Load and performance testing.
n. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities.
o. Leakage and water-penetration tests.
p. Fire resistance and flame spread test results.
q. Final inspection and correction procedures.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01720- 5
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION, MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01720 -PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
6. RECORDING
A. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait
until the end of the Project. The Architect will periodically review record
documents to assure compliance with this requirement.
END OF SECTION 01720
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01720- 6
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01720-PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
7. Preparation of Transparencies: Immediately prior to inspection for
Certification of Substantial Completion, review completed marked-up
record Drawings with the Architect. When authorized,prepare a full set of
corrected transparencies of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
a. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on
print sets. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where
applicable. Identify and date each Drawing; include the printed
designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS" in a prominent
location on each Drawing.
b. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Construction Manager for
resolution.
c. One set of transparencies of original Contract Drawings will be
furnished to the Contractor by the Owner for use in recording changes
and additional information. Other printing as required is the
Contractor's responsibility.
d. The Contractor is responsible for printing original Contract Drawings
and other Drawings as required to produce transparencies. The
Architect will make original Contract Drawings available to the ,
Contractor's print shop.
e. Copies and Distribution: After completing the preparation of
transparency record drawings, print 3 blue-line or black-line prints of
each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were
recorded. Organize the copies into manageable sets. Bind each set
with durable paper cover sheets, with appropriate identification,
including titles, dates and other information on cover sheets.
(1) Organize and bind original marked-up set of prints that were
maintained during the construction period in the same manner.
( ) Organize anize record transparencies into sets matching the print sets.
g P
Place these sets in durable tube-type Drawing containers with
end caps. Mark the end cap of each container with suitable
identification.
(3) Submit the marked-up record set, transparencies, and 3 copy sets
to the Architect for Owner's records; the Architect will retain one
copy set.
EXISTING ORONO MIDDLE SCHOOL-NEW MEDIA CENTER SECTION 01720-3
BID PACKAGE 1: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION,MECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL
SECTION 01730
OPERATING,MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY DATA
1.01 GENERAL
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products
finnished under the Contract.
B. Prepare operating, maintenance and warranty data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent
section of Project Manual.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.
D. Related requirements specified in other sections:
1. Shop drawings,product data and samples: Section 01300.
2. Project Closeout: Section 01700.
3. Project Record Documents: Section 01720.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel with the following qualifications:
1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products.
2. Completely familiar with requirements of this Section.
3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data.
4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Owner's personnel.
B. Format shall conform to the following:
1. Size: 8Y2'x 11".
2. Paper: 20 pound,min mum,white,for-typed pages.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data,or neatly typewritten.
4. Drawings
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab,bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages.
01730-1 No.99132-CP2
5. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product,or each piece of operating equipment.
a. Provide typed description of product,and major component parts of equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING, MAINTENANCE AND
WARRANTY INSTRUCTIONS". List:
a. Title of Project
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
C. Binders
1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic cover.
2. Maximum ring size: 2 inch.
3. When multiple binders are used,correlate the data into related consistent groupings.
1.04 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Arrange neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume,in the following systematic order.
1. Contractor,name of responsible principal,address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included,indexed to the content of volume.
3. List,with each product,the name,address and telephone number of:
a. Contractor or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor,as appropriate.
C. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
e. Include warranty information as specified.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols such as set in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
01730-2 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PARTE GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: All formwork for cast in place concrete,including permanent formwork:
1. Design forms.
2. Furnish,install and prepare for concrete pour.
3. Strip and remove from site.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Section 03200-Concrete Reinforcement.
2. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Division 15-Furnishing and Setting of Mechanical Inserts.
4. Division 16-Furnishing and Setting of Electrical Inserts.
C. Work installed by this Section,furnished by others:
1. Built-in anchors,inserts and bolts for connection of other materials.
2. Built-in sleeves,thimbles,dovetail slots.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall comply with the referenced specifications and codes.
1 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated-by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. American Concrete Institute,ACI 301-89-"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. American Concrete Institute,ACI 318-89-'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
3. American Concrete Institute,ACI 3478-88-"Guide to Formwork for Concrete".
03100-1 No.99132-CP2
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. On delivery to job site,place materials protected from weather.
B. Store materials above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing
for adequate air circulation or ventilation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the furnishing and setting of all inserts.
B. Notify other trades sufficiently in advance of setting formwork to allow for timely delivery of inserts.
PART 2: PRODUCTS �►
2.01 CONCRETE FORMS �+
A. Except for metal forms,use new materials. Materials may be re-used during progress of the Work, provided they
are completely cleaned and reconditioned, re-coated for each use, and capable of producing formwork of the
required quality.
B. For footings and foundations, use metal forms or Douglas Fir boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes,
substantially constructed to shapes indicated and to support the required loads.
C. For studs,walls,and supports,use Standard grade or better Douglas Fir,dimensions as required to support the loads
but not less than 2"x 4".
D. Wall Forms:
1. Exposed concrete surfaces:
a. Use 3/4" minimum thickness Douglas Fir plywood, APA grade BB, class I or II, exterior, sanded both
sides,complying with PS-1.
b. Seal edges and coat both faces with colorless coating which will not affect application of applied
finishes.
c. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
2. Concealed concrete surfaces:
a. use sound,clean plank,boards plywood or metal forms.
E. Column and Pier Forms:
1. For square or rectangular columns,use 2"thick Douglas Fir planks or joists,surfaced one side and two edges,
or use metal forms.
2. Construct column forms with right joints and securely clamped together with steel clamps.
F. Use reusable metal curb forms standard to local authority.
G. Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces,except as noted herein.
03100-2 No.99132-CP2
H. Permanent metal floor forms: Wheeling Superbond 150, Type 20, galvanized or equal, or as shown on the
drawings.
2.02 FORM TIES
A. Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form
deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
B. Provide ties so that portion remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts is at least 3.8 cm(1-1/2")from
the outer concrete surface. Provide form ties which will not leave a hole larger than 2.5 cm(1") diameter in the
concrete surface.
C. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together with combination steel ties and spreaders accepted by the
Architect. Richmond Screw Anchor Co.Con-Right Tyscru Ties,or equal.
1. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows,each tier plumb from top to bottom and each row level. Receive tie
spacing acceptance by the Architect.
2. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6"below the pour lines. Tighten after concrete has set and
before the next pour is made.
2.03 FORM COATINGS
A. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect
concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion,nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing
compounds.
B. Form releasing agent equal to W. R. Grace "Formshield", L & M Construction Chemicals "Debond", or WR
Meadows"Duogard".
2.04 DESIGN OF FORMWORK
A. General:
1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support vertical and lateral loads that
might be applied,until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure.
2. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained
adequate strength for that purpose.
3. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position.
4. Design forms and�faalsework-to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment
operated on the formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature,
foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of the structure during
construction.
5. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement during
concrete placing operations,using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof.
6. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.
7. Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent objectionable deflection.
03100-3 No.99132-CP2
8. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh
concrete and construction loads.
9. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment,free from irregularities,and
within the allowable tolerances.
10. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly
buttjoints,and provide backup material at joints as required,to prevent leakage and prevent fins.
2.05 EARTH FORMS
A. Side forms for footings may be omitted, and concrete may be placed directly against excavation, only when
requested by the Contractor and accepted by the Architect.
B. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional concrete 2" on each side of the minimum design profiles
and dimensions shown on the Drawings.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct forms to shapes, lines and dimensions called for on drawings, true to line, plumb and level with joints
mortar tight. Provide proper bracing and supports of sufficient strength to carry,without appreciable deflection and
with absolute safety,the dead.load of concrete as a liquid together with live loads of men,equipment and materials.
B. Provide sufficient forms so that work can be carried out without delay. Build forms of materials of sufficient
strength to hold concrete without bulging or sagging between supports. For concrete to be exposed to the weather,
glue or seal the edges to prevent loss.
C. Securely place in forms all accessories specified and shown on the drawings. This includes anchor bolts,anchoring
items,reglets,guards,curb angles,dock nosings,etc. Cooperate with all trades for installation of inserts.
D. Provide openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, reglets, sleeves, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
bulkheads,anchorages,inserts and other features required.
E. Comer Treatment: Unless shown otherwise,form chamfers with 2 cm x 2 cm(3/4"x 3/4")strips,accurately formed
and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and right edge joints on exposed concrete. Extend terminal edges
to required limit and miter chamfer strips at changes in direction.
F. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and screeds accurately to produce the designed elevations, slopes in the
finished surfaces. Provide required slope to drains.
G. Cleaning and Coating: Sweep;clean and coat forms before reinforcing is placed.
H. Coat form contact surfaces with form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Do not allow excess form
coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with surfaces which will be bonded to fresh
concrete. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Wetting Forms: In hot weather,wet down forms with hose immediately before placing concrete.
031004 No.99132-CP2
3.02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams, soffits, slabs and other structural elements may not be
removed in less than 7 days, and not until concrete has attained 75% of design minimum 28 day compressive
strength. Re-shore members required to support superimposed loads until concrete has attained its specified 28 day
strength. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens
representative of the concrete location or members,as specified in other Sections.
B. Formwork not supporting concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 10 degrees C (50
degrees F) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form
removal operation,and provided that curing and protection operations are maintained.
C. Form facing material may be removed four days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have
been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3.03 RE-USE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in the Work. Split,frayed,delaminated or otherwise damaged form
facing material are not acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as
specified for new formwork. When forms are reused for successive concrete placement,thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and laitance,and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.
3.04 PERMANENT METAL FORMS
A. Place permanent metal forms as shown on the Drawings.
B. Clean thoroughly of oil,grease,rust and elements that would reduce adhesion of concrete.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Structural Testing and Inspection.
1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in
accordance with the provision of Section 01410.
2. Personnel Qualifications:
a. Special Inspector-Technical: Not used.
b. Special Inspector-Structural:
1.) Structural I-Graduate civil/structural engineer,with experience in the design of structural systems
of this type. Inspection shall be performed under the direct supervision of a registered
civil/structural engineer.
2.) Structural II-Civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of structural systems of this
type,registered in the state in which the project is located. The registered engineer shall review and
approve all inspection reports.
3. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector for the following inspections:
a. Verify formwork for all concrete requiring Special Inspection per Section 03200 will result in member
size,location,and configuration as described on the contract documents.
END OF SECTION 03100
03100-5 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: All steel reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Concrete Formwork-Section 03100.
2. Cast-In-Place Concrete-Section 03300.
3. Masonry Reinforcement-Section 04150.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI MSP-1-85,"Manual of Standard Practice".
2. American Concrete Institute ACI 315-80(Rev. 1986),"Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement".
3. American Concrete Institute ACI 318-89, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
4. American Concrete Institute ACI 301-89,"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
5. ASTM A185-90a,"Steel Welded Wire Fabric,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement".
6. American Welding Society(AWS)D1.4-79"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel".
7. ASTM A615-92b,"Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
8. ASTM A706-92b,"Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall comply with the referenced standards and codes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit fabrication and placement drawings in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Indicate reinforcing size,length,bending details,spacing and method of supporting reinforcing.
03200-1 No. 99132-CP2
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver reinforcement to the job site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size and length,and store free
of ground. Protect from damage and rusting.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Standard Bars: New Billet stock,deformed,ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed or as shown on the drawings. Free
of mill scale,excessive rust,or other coating that would prohibit proper bond with concrete.
B. Column Ties and Beam Stirrups: ASTM A615,Grade 60,deformed.
C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric:ASTM A185,unless otherwise noted,provide 6x6-W I A x W I A fabric in all slabs on
grade.
D. Supports and Accessories: Conform to ACI 315. Where concrete surface is exposed to view or weather, or to be
painted,use plastic supports. Complement the various conditions encountered with various types of individual and
continuous slab bolsters and chairs.
E. Fiber Reinforcing: 100%Virgin polypropylene,manufacturer to conform to ASTM C116. Fibermesh or approved
equal. Acceptable in topping at the rate of 1.5#/cubic yard as a substitution to WWF.
2.02 DETAILING
A. Detail concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318.
B. Include all spacers, chairs, ties, slab bolsters, clips, chair bars, and other devices for properly assembling, placing
spacing,supporting,and fastening the reinforcement.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to size, dimension and shape shown on approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in
ACI 301 and in accord with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. After fabrication,sort,bundle,and metal tag reinforcement before delivery to the job site.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place concrete reinforcement in accordance with the approved placing drawings,and CRSI 63 (Reinforcing Bars),
and.CRS165(Bar Supports),and.in accordance with tolerances specified in ACI 301.
B. Place only reinforcement that is free of excessive mill scale, excessive rust, or other coating that would prohibit
proper bond with the concrete.
C. Support reinforcement and guard against displacement during concreting. Do not allow supports to puncture or tear
moisture barrier.
D. Continue reinforcement through construction joints but do not continue reinforcement through expansion joints
unless so detailed.
E. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,conduits or embedded items.
F. Do not heat,bend or cut bars without approval of Architect.
03200-2 No. 99132-CP2
G. Tie securely or use splice devices to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement.
H. Support and wire together reinforcing to prevent displacement by construction loads and placing of concrete.
Welding of cross bars is not permitted for assembly of reinforcement. On grade,supporting concrete brick may be
used. Over formwork use approved bar chairs and spacers.
I. Unless approved by the Architect,do not bend reinforcement after being partially embedded in hardened concrete.
J. Show lap and spacing of reinforcing on shop drawings.
K. Embed conduit and pipes after placing reinforcing steel in a manner that will not impair the strength of
construction. Do not embed conduit and pipes larger in outside diameter than one-third thickness of slab, wall or
beam,nor space closer than 3 diameters o.c.without approval of the Architect. For conduit or pipe which parallels
principal reinforcement maintain 1-1/2"clear from reinforcing.
3.02 CONCRETE COVER
A. For minimum concrete protection over reinforcement see ACI 318 Chapter 7 and as detailed on the Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Structural Testing and Inspection
1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in
accordance with the provision of Section 01410.
2. Personnel Qualifications:
a. Special Inspector-Technical: Not used.
b. Special Inspector-Structural:
1.) Structural I - Graduate civillstructural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the Structural
Engineer of Record (SER), with the experience in the design of structural systems of this type.
Inspection shall be performed under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
2.) Structural H-Civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of structural systems of this
type,registered in the state in which the project is located. The registered engineer shall review and
approve all inspection reports.
3. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector for the following inspections:
a. Inspect reinforcement in all cast in place concrete, excluding slabs on grade,footings without transverse
reinforcement,and topping slabs. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the-following:
1.) Reinforcing bar grade.
2.) Reinforcing bars are free of oil,dirt,excessive rust,and damage.
3.) Reinforcing bars are adequately tied, chaired, and supported to prevent displacement during
concrete placement.
4.) Proper clear distances between bars and to surfaces of concrete.
5.) Reinforcing bar size and placement.
6.) Bar laps for proper length and stagger.
7.) Bar bends for minimum diameter,slope and length.
8.) Mechanical splices are placed in accordance with the plans, specifications and reviewed shop
drawings.
END OF SECTION 03200
03200-3 No. 99132-CP2
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: All steel reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Concrete Formwork-Section 03100.
2. Cast-In-Place Concrete-Section 03300.
3. Masonry Reinforcement-Section 04150.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI MSP-1-85,"Manual of Standard Practice".
2. American Concrete Institute ACI 315-80(Rev. 1986),"Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement".
3. American Concrete Institute ACI 318-89,'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
4. American Concrete Institute ACI 301-89,"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
5. ASTM A185-90a,"Steel Welded Wire Fabric,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement".
6. American Welding Society(AWS)DIA-79"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel".
7. ASTM A615-92b,"Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
8. ASTM A706-92b,"Low-Alloy Steel Deforme ,Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall comply with the referenced standards and codes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit fabrication and placement drawings in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Indicate reinforcing size,length,bending details,spacing and method of supporting reinforcing.
03200-1 No. 99132-CP2
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver reinforcement to the job site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size and length,and store free
of ground. Protect from damage and rusting.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Standard Bars: New Billet stock, deformed,ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed or as shown on the drawings. Free
of mill scale,excessive rust,or other coating that would prohibit proper bond with concrete.
B. Column Ties and Beam Stirrups: ASTM A615,Grade 60,deformed.
C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric:ASTM A185,unless otherwise noted,provide 6x6-W I A x W I A fabric in all slabs on
grade.
D. Supports and Accessories: Conform to ACI 315. Where concrete surface is exposed to view or weather, or to be
painted,use plastic supports. Complement the various conditions encountered with various types of individual and
continuous slab bolsters and chairs.
E. Fiber Reinforcing: 100%Virgin polypropylene,manufacturer to conform to ASTM C116. Fibermesh or approved
equal. Acceptable in topping at the rate of 1.5#/cubic yard as a substitution to WWF.
2.02 DETAILING
A. Detail concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318.
B. Include all spacers, chairs,ties, slab bolsters, clips, chair bars, and other devices for properly assembling,placing
spacing,supporting,and fastening the reinforcement.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to size, dimension and shape shown on approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in
ACI 301 and in accord with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. After fabrication,sort,bundle,and metal tag reinforcement before delivery to the job site.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place concrete reinforcement in accordance with the approved placing drawings, and CRSI 63 (Reinforcing Bars),
and CRSI 65(Bar Supports),and in accordance with tolerances specified in ACI 301.
B. Place only reinforcement that is free of excessive mill scale, excessive rust, or other coating that would prohibit
proper bond with the concrete.
C. Support reinforcement and guard against displacement during concreting. Do not allow supports to puncture or tear
moisture barrier.
D. Continue reinforcement through construction joints but do not continue reinforcement through expansion joints
unless so detailed.
E. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,conduits or embedded items.
F. Do not heat,bend or cut bars without approval of Architect.
03200-2 No. 99132-CP2
G. Tie securely or use splice devices to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement.
H. Support and wire together reinforcing to prevent displacement by construction loads and placing of concrete.
Welding of cross bars is not permitted for assembly of reinforcement. On grade,supporting concrete brick may be
used. Over formwork use approved bar chairs and spacers.
I. Unless approved by the Architect,do not bend reinforcement after being partially embedded in hardened concrete.
J. Show lap and spacing of reinforcing on shop drawings.
K. Embed conduit and pipes after placing reinforcing steel in a manner that will not impair the strength of
construction. Do not embed conduit and pipes larger in outside diameter than one-third thickness of slab, wall or
beam,nor space closer than 3 diameters o.c.without approval of the Architect. For conduit or pipe which parallels
principal reinforcement maintain 1-1/2"clear from reinforcing.
3.02 CONCRETE COVER
A. For minimum concrete protection over reinforcement see ACI 318 Chapter 7 and as detailed on the Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Structural Testing and Inspection
1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in
accordance with the provision of Section 01410.
2. Personnel Qualifications:
a. Special Inspector-Technical: Not used.
b. Special Inspector-Structural:
1.) Structural I - Graduate civil/structural engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the Structural
Engineer of Record (SER), with the experience in the design of structural systems of this type.
Inspection shall be performed under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
2.) Structural II-Civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of structural systems of this
type,registered in the state in which the project is located. The registered engineer shall review and
approve all inspection reports.
3. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector for the following inspections:
' a. Inspect reinforcement in all cast in place concrete, excluding slabs on grade, footings without transverse
reinforcement,and topping slabs. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following:
1.) Reinforcing bar grade.
2.) Reinforcing bars are free of oil,dirt,excessive rust,and damage.
3.) Reinforcing bars are adequately tied, chaired, and supported to prevent displacement during
concrete placement.
4.) Proper clear distances between bars and to surfaces of concrete.
5.) Reinforcing bar size and placement.
6.) Bar laps for proper length and stagger.
7.) Bar bends for minimum diameter,slope and length.
8.) Mechanical splices are placed in accordance with the plans, specifications and reviewed shop
drawings.
END OF SECTION 03200
03200-3 No. 99132-CP2
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,and related notes on the Structural Drawings apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SCOPE
A. Section includes: All Cast-In-Place concrete work.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Concrete formwork-Section 03100.
2. Concrete reinforcement-Section 03200.
3. Grout-Section 03600.
4. Masonry grout-Section 04200.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. American Concrete Institute,ACI 301-89"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. American Concrete Institute,ACI 306R-88,"Cold Weather Concreting".
3. American Concrete Institute,ACI 305R-89"Hot Weather Concreting".
4. American Concrete Institute,ACI 318-89"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
5. Portland Cement Association,"Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures".
6. America Concrete Institute,ACI 308-81 (Rev. 1986), "Standard Practice for Curing Concrete".
7. American Concrete Institute(ACI)309R-87,"Guide for Consolidation of Concrete".
8. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 304R-89, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete".
9. ASTM C31-91,"Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field".
10. ASTM C33-90, Concrete Aggregates".
11. ASTM C39-86,"Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens".
12. ASTM C94-92,"Ready-Mixed Concrete".
03300-1 No.99132-CP2
13. ASTM C136-84a,"Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate".
14. ASTM C143-90a,"Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete".
15. ASTM C150-92, "Portland Cement".
16. ASTM C171-91, "Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete".
17. ASTM C231-916b,"Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method".
18. ASTM C260-86, "Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete".
19. ASTM C309-91, "Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete".
20. ASTM C330-89, "Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete".
21. ASTM C494-92,"Chemical Admixtures for Concrete".
22. ASTM C567-91,"Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete".
23. ASTM C618-92a, "Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
Portland Cement Concrete".
24. ASTM C881-90,"Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete".
25. ASTM C 1107-91 a, "Packaged,Dry,Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Non-Sbrink)".
26. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)"Quality Control Manual'.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor to employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner and
Architect to perform Source Quality Control and specified portion of Field Quality Control.
B. Work shall comply with the referenced specifications and codes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete mix designs.
B. Source quality control documentation.
C. Cold weather concreting procedures.
D. Technical data sheets for admixtures,accelerators,mixing agents,etc.
E. Submit drawings showing locations of control joints and construction joints for interior building slabs noting
scheduled floor finishes.
F. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
1.06 NATIONAL VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND(V.O.C.)EMISSION STANDARDS
A. All products shall comply with the E.P.A. rulings which establishes national volatile organic compound (V.O.C.)
emission standards for Architectural coatings as listed n the Federal Register: September 11, 1998 (Volume 63,
Number 176), [Rules and Regulations] [Page 48848-48887].
03300-2 No.99132-CP2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Ready-mixed per ASTM C94.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I,use only one brand of cement throughout the work. Be responsible
for whatever steps are necessary to insure that no visual variations in color will result in exposed concrete,and
place on order a sufficient quantity of this cement to complete the concrete work.
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33,normal weight. ASTM C330,lightweight.
a. Maximum sizes: Footings 1-1/2"
Topping 3/8"
All other concrete 3/4"
3. Water: Clean,free of deleterious amounts of acids,alkalies or organic materials,potable.
4. Admixtures:
a. Water Reducing Agent: ASTM C494 when accepted by the Architect,free of chloride.
b. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C260. Use in all concrete exposed to weather as a supplement, as
required,to produce a total air entrainment as specified in Table 4.1.1 of ACI 318 for severe exposure.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Type C. Substitution for portland cement shall not exceed 20% by weight of
cement.
d. High-Range Water Reducing Agent(superplasticizer): ASTM C494,Type F or G when accepted by the
Architect,free of chlorides.
e. Do not use admixtures to cause accelerated or retarded setting of cement in concrete without written
approval of the Architect.
£ Premix admixtures in solution form and dispensed as recommended by the manufacturer. Include the
water in the solution in the computation of water-cement ratio.
5. Grout: Pre-mixed,non-shrinking,non-metallic.
2.02 CONCRETE RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion Joint Filler: Pre-formed,non-extruding type,ASTM C1751.
B. Expansion Joint Cap: Brock White No.38315 or equal.
C. Interior Curing Compound: Sonnebom "Kure and Seal W", equivalent products by Euclid Chemical Co., L & M
Chemicals,Inc.,Masterbuilders or WR Meadows.
D. Curing Compound for use with hardener: Sonneborn "Kure n Harden", or equivalent products by L & M
Construction Chemicals,Masterbuilders,Euclid Chemical Company or WR Meadows.
E. Exterior Curing Compound: Exterior Concrete Work-Wax base membrane forming curing compound,conforming
to ASTM C309-79,Type II, White Pigment such as W. R. Meadows WP40 or similar products by Brock White,
Prokrete Industries and Sonnebom.
03300-3 No.99132-CP2
F. Moisture-Cover Curing (used when high performance coatings are scheduled): Waterproof paper complying with
ASTM C171,opaque polyethylene sheeting complying with AASHTO M171 or Burlene.
G. Slab Joint Key: Pre-formed asphalt hardboard,Brock-White 1/4"or equivalent product by W.R.Meadows.
H. Dovetail Slots: Dur-O-Wall D/A 100.
I. Non-Slip Aggregate: "Buco Non-Slip"by Euclid Chemical Company or equivalent product by A.C. Horn,L&M
Construction Chemicals.
J. Waterstop Mastic: Brock White"Waterstop Plus"or equivalent product by American Colloid Company.
K. Vapor Barrier and Sheathing Tape: 6 mil poly;3M#8086 contractor sheathing tape.
2.03 CONCRETE N=S
A. Type and Strength:
1. Compressive Strength: In place, at 28 days, minimum as follows (unless indicated otherwise by structural
drawings):
Interior slabs on grade 3,500 psi
Topping,footings,piers 3,000 psi
All other concrete,including all concrete exposed to weather 4,000 psi
2. Following concrete types shall contain%%-7%z%entrained air:
a. Exterior sidewalks,aprons and slabs
b. Semi-exterior slabs at overhead doors,loading dock,etc.
C. Exterior walls,piers,columns,etc.
B. Slump and Workability:
1. Slump: As determined by ASTM C143 as follows:
Footing 311-411
Walls,columns Y-511
Slabs on grade 311-4"
Structural slabs,beams 311-411
2. Determine slump prior to addition of superplasticizer.
3. Workability: So that concrete will completely fill forms without voids and embed and bond to reinforcing
without separation of materials.
C. Water/cement ratio shall be as follows:
Footings less than 0.6
Slabs on Grade less than 0.5
Exterior Concrete less than 0.45
D. Mixing: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
1. Cooled or heated water shall be used in accordance with ACI 306 and 305.
033004 No.99132-CP2
2. Ready mixed concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in
excess of rated capacities. Discharge at the site shall be within one(1)hour after charging.
3. Attention is called to the importance of scheduling and dispatching trucks from the batching point so that they
shall arrive at the site of the work just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of
concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms.
4. Air-entraining and chemical admixtures, if approved, shall be charged into mixer as a solution and dispensed
by an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Powdered admixtures shall be weighted or measured by
volume as recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete,provided such admixtures are added separately during
batching sequence. Admixtures used in combination shall retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect
on concrete or on properties of each other.
6. Do not add water after the initial introduction of the mixing water for the batch, except at the start of
discharge, when the measured slump of the concrete is less than that specified and no more than 60 minutes
have elapsed from the time of batching to the start of discharge. In this case, water may be added by the
producer in an amount not exceeding that allowed by the producer to achieve the design water/cement ratio.
The drum blades shall then be turned an additional 30 revolutions minimum at mixing speed. Water shall not
be added to the batch at any later time. Concrete may be used as long as it is of such slump that it can be
placed and properly consolidated without the addition of any other water to the batch,but in no case shall the
time between batching and complete discharge exceed 120 minutes.
7. Water may be added to the concrete at the Project site,subject to the following conditions:
a. Ready-mix plant is notified and approves in writing.
1 b. Truck tickets indicate maximum amount of water to be added.
C. Water is added in a manner to control volume.
d. Special Inspector is notified,if concrete placement requires inspection.
Reject concrete if water is added and these conditions are not met.
E. To use materials other than those accepted originally,or if the materials from the source originally accepted change
in characteristics, make additional tests with proposed new materials which will verify production of concrete
meeting with the stated requirements without causing objectionable change in the color or appearance of the
structure. Pay the testing agency for these additional tests. Do not use concrete made from such different materials
until the Architect has given his approval.
F. If,during the progress of the work,it is impossible to secure concrete of the required workability and strength with
the materials being furnished by the Vendor,the Architect may order such changes in the proportions or materials,
or both,as may be necessary to secure the desired properties,subject to the stated requirements. Make any changes
so ordered without extra compensation.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Proportioning of Design Mixes
1. Prepare design mixes for each type and application of concrete required. Include in the mix design report
project name, concrete supplier, contractor, number for strengths, compressive strength at 28 days, water-
cement ratio, portion of structure, design temperature, product names, material types and source, aggregate
analysis,proportions and slump.
03300-5 No.99132-CP2
2. Examine design reports and when satisfied that mix proportions will produce specified strength and
requirements, sign reports and submit to Architect for approval at least 14 days prior to the proposed starting
date for placing concrete.
3. Air-entraining admixtures, pozzolanic materials and proprietary chemical admixtures to be approved and in
accordance with recommendation of the manufacturer.
4. Use accelerator, if approved, in proportions recommended by the manufacturer when the temperature of
concrete as placed is less than 40F.
5. Water-reducing and set-controlling admixtures may be used in proportions recommended by the manufacturer
when temperature of the concrete as placed exceeds 65F.
6. Select proportion of ingredients to produce proper placability, durability, strength and other required
properties.
7. Design mix shall conform to procedures set forth in ACI 318 and 301 and in PCA's "Design and Control of
Concrete Mixtures",twelfth edition.
B. Aggregate
1. Test proposed aggregate according to ASTM C33 and C136.
2. Submit test reports for approval.
3. Utilize test data in proportion of design mixes.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Cold Weather:
1. Concrete placed during cold weather shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.1.
2. Cold weather is defined as 3 or more successive days when the average daily outdoor temperature is less than
40°F.
3. Do not place concrete on frozen sub-grades.
4. Record concrete temperatures at least 3 times in each 24-hour period.
5. Maintain protection and leave forms in place for the entire curing period and as follows:
a. Maintain protection for columns,walls, and supported slabs until at least 4 field cylinders,prepared and
cured in accordance with ASTM C31, reach 85 percent of the specified 28-day strength, or laboratory
cured cylinders reach the specified 28-day strength.
6. Submit detailed procedures for cold weather concreting. Review shall be for information only.
7. Follow recommended practices of ACI 306R.
03300-6 No.99132-CP2
B. Hot Weather:
1. Apply recommendations of ACI 305.
2. Employ suitable means to prevent too rapid drying. Shade fresh concrete as soon as possible without marring
surface.
' C. Wet Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided,do not place concrete in rain,sleet or snow.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Coordinate the installation of all required inserts prior placing reinforcing steel.
B. Coordination with other Trades:
1. Include installation of anchors,sleeves,tiles,angles,etc.,furnished by contractors responsible for the facilities
to be attached to these devices. Leave openings for pipes, ducts, etc., required for the ventilation, heating,
electrical and plumbing work. Provide concrete pads for outside pipes and utilities as required. Notify all
trades concerned with sleeves,inserts,etc.,to check their work before concrete is placed.
2. Embed no pipes other than electrical conduit and snow melting pipes in any structural concrete. Provide
sleeves or holes for pipes passing through footings,foundations,beams and slabs. Refer to ACI 318-83.
3.03 INSPECTION
A. Assure than excavation and form work are complete.Remove snow,ice and excess water.
B. Check that reinforcement is secured in place.
C. Verify that expansion joint material,anchors,and other embedded items are secured in position.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. Lay vapor barrier below sand cushion for all interior slabs on grade.
B. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal with sheathing tape.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Concrete: (ACI 304"Guide for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting and Placing Concrete").
1. Convey concrete from mixer to final position by method which will prevent separation or loss of material.
1 2. Maximum height of concrete free fall 48".
3. Regulate rate of placement so concrete remains plastic and flows into position.
4. Deposit concrete in continuous operation until panel or section is completed.
5. Place concrete in horizontal layers 18 in.maximum thickness.
6. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement.
03300-7 No.99132-CP2
i
B. Consolidating Concrete:
1. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation.
2. Vertically insert and remove hand-held vibrators at points 18 in.to 30 in.apart.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms.
4. Minimum vibrator speed 7,000 rpm
5. Vibrate concrete minimum amount required for consolidation.
C. Control/Construction Joints:
1. Provide in slabs and toppings as indicated in the Structural Notes.
2. For large areas, make alternate pours in a checkerboard pattern. Provide diamond- shaped pours at column
base plates.
3. Clean and roughen surface of concrete,and remove laitance.
4. Wet concrete surface and flush with neat cement grout before placing additional concrete.
5. Pour interior slab on grade and topping tight to walls,without filler. Use kraft paper as a bond breaker.
6. Install expansion joint filler and cap between exterior concrete slabs and walls, interior slabs, or elsewhere
shown on Drawings.
7. Provide in walls as indicated in the Structural Notes.
D. Finishing:
1. Formed concrete:
a. Tops of forms:
1) Strike concrete smooth at tops of forms.
2) Float to texture comparable to formed surfaces.
b. Formed surfaces: (Concealed)
1) As-cast finish.
2) Patch tie holes and defects after form removal.
3) Remove fins from surfaces. ,
C. Formed surfaces: (Exposed finish concrete): Same as b. above except provide rubbed finish per ACI
301.
2. Flatwork:
a. General:
1) Strike and level concrete.
2) Do not work surface until ready for floating.
b. Floated finish: Float per ACI 301.
03300-8 No.99132-CP2
C. Troweled finish:
1) Power trowel surface to smooth finish.
2) Hand trowel areas inaccessible to power trowel.
d. Broom or belt finish: Draw broom or burlap belt across surface after floating in accordance with P.C.A.
instructions.
e. Conform to ACI 301,Section 11.9,Class B tolerance.
E. Finish Schedule
1. As-Cast Finish: Concealed walls,columns,beams,slabs.
2. Rubbed Finish: Exposed concrete-walls,columns,beams,and wall caps.
3. Float Finish: Slabs to receive topping or setting beds.
4. Troweled Finish:
a. Interior concrete floors: Steel troweled finish
' b. Exposed concrete stair treads: Steel troweled finish with non-slip aggregate.
5. Broom Finish
a. Exterior platforms,aprons,ramps,loading dock.
3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect fresh concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures and maintain with minimal
moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature above 55°F for a period of time given below.
tB. Follow finishing operations with initial curing. Keep concrete continuously moist after finishing until curing
materials are applied. Use the following materials or methods:
1. For concrete to remain exposed (not scheduled for finish): Apply one coat of interior curing compound
initially and an additional coat just prior to substantial completion.
2. For interior concrete to receive floor finish (except high performance coatings): Apply one coat of curing
compound for use with hardener and apply hardener coat to concrete that is dry, clean, free of dirt, oil grease
and cured for seven days. Apply coatings in strict accordance to manufacturers printed instructions.
3. For interior concrete to receive high performance coating or concrete floor sealer: Use moisture-cover curing
technique.
4. For exterior or semi exterior concrete: Apply one coat of exterior curing compound in strict accordance with
manufacturers printed instructions. After allowing concrete to cure for at least 28 days and insuring concrete
is dry,clean,free of dirt,oil,grease,loose scale or other contaminates,apply two coats of linseed oil treatment
in strict accordance to manufactures printed instructions.
C. Continue curing until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof,not necessarily consecutive,during which
temperature of air in contact with concrete is above 50°F has totaled 7 days. Do not permit rapid drying at end of
curing period. Maintain curing for members with specified strengths of 6000 psi and above until laboratory
cylinders reach the 28-day specified strength.
03300-9 No.99132-CP2
D. Keep steel forms heated by sun and wood forms in contact with concrete during final curing period wet. If forms
are to be removed during curing period,employ one of specified curing materials or methods immediately.
E. When mean daily temperature of atmosphere is less than 50°F,maintain the temperature of concrete between 50°F
and 60°F for curing period. Make the arrangements for heating, covering, insulating or housing concrete work in
advance of placement and maintain required temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to
concentration of heat. Vent all fuel-burning heaters.
F. During hot weather,make arrangements for installation of windbreaks,shading,fog spraying,sprinkling,ponding or
wet covering in advance of placement and take such protective measures as quickly as concrete hardening and
finishing operations will allow.
G. Changes in temperature of concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5°F in any 1 hour or 50°F
in any 24 hour period.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Structural Testing and Inspection
1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in
accordance with the provision of Section 01410.
2. Personnel Qualifications: '
a. Special Inspector-Technical:
1.) Technical I - ACI Certified Grade I Technician. Inspector shall be employed by a testing
laboratory,under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
2.) Technical II - ACI Certified Grade II Inspector. Inspector shall be employed by a testing
laboratory,under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
3.) Technical III-A civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in this type of work,with a initnnm of
4 years experience and registered in the State in which the project is located and is an employee of a
qualified and approved testing laboratory. The registered engineer shall review and approve all
reports.
b. Special Inspector-Structural:
1.) Structural I - Graduate civi/structinal engineer, or other personnel acceptable to the Structural
Engineer of Record (SER), with the experience in the design of structural systems of this type.
Inspection shall be performed under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
2.} Structural II-Civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of structural systems of this
type,registered in the state in which the project is located. The registered engineer shall review and
approve all inspection reports.
3. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector for the following inspections:
a. Tests for cast in place concrete. Qualifications: Technical I.
1.) Prepare compression test specimens(ASTM C31),one set of four standard cylinders of concrete for
each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured specimens.
03300-10 No.99132-CP2
2.) Perform compressive strength tests (ASTM C39). One set of four cylinders for each day's pour
between one and 25 cubic yards. If a day's pour exceeds 25 cubic yards, one set of four cylinders
for each additional 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof. One specimen tested at seven days, two at
28 days,and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
3.) Slump (ASTM C143): one test at point of discharge for each set of compression test specimens;
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to have changed.
4.) Air entrainment(ASTM C231): test the first batch of air entrained concrete and one additional test
for each set of compression test specimens.
5.) Test concrete temperature hourly when air temperature is 40°F and below and when 80°F and
above;and each time is set of compression test specimens is made.
1 b. Perform concrete mix verification. Qualifications: Technical I. Verify the following:
1.) Mixer truck trip ticket conforms to approved mix design.
2.) Total water added to mix on site does not exceed that allowed by concrete mix design.
3.) Concrete quality is indicative of adequate mixing time,consistency,and relevant time limits.
C. Inspect preparation and placement of all concrete, excluding slabs on grade, strip footings without
transverse reinforcement,and topping slabs. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following:
r1.) Acceptable general condition of concrete base prior to placement.
2.) Concrete conveyance and depositing avoids segregation and contamination.
3.) Concrete is properly consolidated.
4.) Reinforcement remains at proper location.
d. Observe protection and curing methods for all concrete, excluding slabs on grade, strip footings without
transverse reinforcement,and topping slabs. Qualifications: Structural I. Verify the following:
1.) Specified curing procedures are followed.
2.) Specified hot and cold weather procedures are followed.
B. Conventional Testing and Inspection Requirements
1. The Owner will employ a testing agent to perform density test of lightweight concrete per ASTM C567. One
test,per-hghtweight pour
C. Contractor Requirements:
1. Provide services of an independent laboratory to perform the following:
a. Make and test additional cylinders to determine time for form removal.
b. Make and test additional cylinders to determine termination of curing procedures.
C. Make and test additional cylinders to determine termination of cold weather practices.
03300-11 No.99132-CP2
D. Evaluation of Concrete Strengths
1. The strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of test results equal or
exceed the required strength and no individual strength test result falls below the required strength by more '
than 500 p.s.i.
2. Concrete in the area represented by the core tests will be considered structurally adequate if the average of the
three cores is equal to at least 85 percent required strength, and if no single core is less than 75 percent of
required strength.
3. If strength acceptance criteria are not met by the core tests, and if structural adequacy remains in doubt, the
Architect may order load tests as outlined in ACI 318 for the questionable portion of the structure, or take
other action appropriate to the circumstances.
END OF SECTION 03300
03300-12 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Work includes: Furnishing and placing of grout for steel base plates,grout bedding for equipment,grout for anchor
bolt settings,grout for concrete surface repair,and all other grout not specified elsewhere.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Cast-in-place concrete-Section 03300.
2. Grout for filling cores in masonry-Section 04200.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials(specific standards denoted in Part 2 of this section).
2. Corps of Engineers Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout-CRD C-621.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall comply with the referenced standards and codes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
' A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets demonstrating compliance with the specifications.
C. Submit copies of recent independent laboratory tests certifying technical compliance.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Grout may be job mixed or ready mixed. If job mixed, mix in a power operated machine until there is uniform
distribution of materials and mixture is uniform in composition and consistency. Completely discharge each batch
before mixture is,recharged.
B. Mix and deliver ready-mixed"grout in accordance with ASTM C94. Place grout within one(1)hour of time mix
is placed in truck.
C. Do not indiscriminately re-temper or add water to increase slump after concrete is first mixed.
03600-1 No.99132-CP2
D. Convey grout from mixer to place of final deposit by means which will prevent segregation or loss of material. Do
not let grout fall freely more than four(4)feet.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Quality of manufacturers: The products named herein are specified to establish standards of quality and
performance. The manufacturers approved for grout are U. S. Grout Corporation, Master Builders, Sonneborn,
Euclid Chemical Company,W.R.Meadows,and L&M Construction Chemicals.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Equipment, Anchor Bolt and Base Plate Grouting: Non-metallic, non-staining, non-shrink cemetitious grout,
ASTM C1107. Compressive strength shall be a minimum of 5000 p.s.i. at 28 days and a 1 day strength of 3000
p.s.i.
B. Surface Repairs: For repair of concrete surfaces use the grout specified for equipment. Use an epoxy bonding
compound to bond the repair grout to existing concrete.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Base Plate Grouting: Proportion grout in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Remove all loose or foreign materials which would prevent bond between the grout and mating surfaces. Clean and
thoroughly moisten surfaces prior to starting Work. Completely fill all recesses and assure grout material is in
complete contact with all steel and concrete surfaces.
B. Anchor Bolt Grouting: Drill or cast in the concrete holes at locations shown on the plans or shop drawings. Make
size of holes at least 1/2"larger than the bolt or dowel to be grouted. Clean and wet holes. Remove all loose water
from the holes, fill about two-thirds full with grout; rod thoroughly to remove any entrapped air; insert the bolt or
dowel and secure in place by use of templates.
C. Surface Repairs to Concrete: Chip out concrete area requiring repairs to sound concrete. Clean reinforcing if
exposed. Cut or saw edges to give a minimum of 1/2" surface perpendicular to the surface to be repaired. Coat all
surfaces to be repaired with an epoxy bonding compound prior to placing the grout. See Concrete Specification ,
03300 for curing requirements.
END OF SECTION 03600
03600-2 No.99132-CP2 ,
SECTION 04100
MORTAR
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
r1.02 SUMMARY
A. Products fim ished but not installed under this Section:
1. Mortar for concrete unit masonry.
' 2. Colored mortar for face brick.
' B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Installation of mortar-Section 04200.
2. Grout for masonry-Section 04200.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirement of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. ASTM C 144-Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
2. ASTM C150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
3. ASTM C207-Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
4. ASTM C270-Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
5. ASTM C780 - Standard Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design: Submit mix designs for each mortar type at least seven days prior to preparation of job mortar and
delivery to the site. Include copies of test reports for aggregate and mortar strength.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard colors for preliminary selection. If requested, prepare and
submit custom-mixed samples to match materials or colors as directed by the Architect. Prepare custom color
samples using specified mix design; make 3/8" wide, tool concave smooth. Up to two different custom mortar
colors may be selected for brick,in addition to standard grey mortar and colored pointing mortar.
04100-1 No.99132-CP2
C. References: Submit copies of the listed reference specifications for review, to be maintained in the Contractor's ,
field office.
D. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner and Architect for
performance of specified Source Quality Control.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S.
C. Aggregates: ASTM C144.
D. Water: Clean,potable,free of deleterious amounts of acids,alkalies or organic materials. '
E. Antifreeze Compounds: Not allowed in mortar to lower freezing point.
F. Mortar Colorant: Inert, sunfast, weather resistant, alkali resistant, water insoluble, free of deleterious fillers and
extenders. By Solomon Grind-Chem Service,Inc.,Euclid,Twin City Concrete Co.,Tamms Industries Co.or Prism
Pigments.
1. Colors: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Section 1-4 of Details of Construction.
2.02 MEASURING AND MUONG
A. Measure and mix in accordance with ASTM C270 and the following:
1. Mix mortar as required for immediate use only and discard any mixed for a period exceeding 2-1/2 hours.
2. Accurately maintain and control the specified proportions of the mortar materials during the entire progress of '
the work.
3. Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and aggregates with the amount of water to produce satisfactory
workability. Machine mix all mortar.
4. Proportion colorant for mortar in accordance with printed instructions by pigment manufacturer to avoid
reducing mortar properties,at a rate not to exceed 10 pounds per 94 pound bag of portland cement.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test proposed aggregate for conformance to ASTM C144 and these specifications.
B. Test each mortar mix design for water re-tentative and compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C270.
i
04100-2 No.99132-CP2 '
C. Mix mortar in the laboratory from representative samples of materials to be used in the Work, including selected
colorants. Average compressive strength at 28 days shall be as follows:
Mortar Type Compressive Strength Range
M 2,500 psi-3,000 psi
S 1,800 psi-2,200 psi
' N 750 psi-1,100 psi
D. Adjust mix design so as to achieve compatibility with brick to be supplied, considering initial rate of absorption of
brick and water re-tentative of mortar.
E. Do not start masonry work until Architect has reviewed test reports and accepted mix design.
F. Prepare and test new mix designs if mortar does not meet specifications or if, during the course of the Work,
significant changes occur in aggregate or other materials.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. See Section 04200 for installation of mortar.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform the following:
1. Field test mortar for consistency and water content in accordance with ASTM C780. Make one test for each
2,500 square feet of wall area.
' 2. Test brick prisms constructed under Section 04200 for flexural bond strength in accordance with ASTM
C1072. Make one test for each mortarlbrick combination.
3. Provide test results to Architect for comparison with laboratory results.
END OF SECTION 04100
' 04100-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 04150
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. All accessories related to masonry work.
' B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Installation of accessories-Section 04200.
2. Loose steel lintels-Section 05500.
' 3. Firestopping-Section 07240.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of all specified materials for review.
B. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Horizontal Wall Reinforcement: ASTM A-82,Dur-O-Wal or equivalent products by AA Wire,as follows:
1. Load bearing single wythe masonry walls: "Ladur"type,minimum standard weight with No. 9 side and cross
rods.
r2. Non-load bearing partitions: "Ladur"type standard weight with No.9 side and cross rods.
3. Exterior cavity wall reinforcing: Galvanized"Ladur" type,No. 9 side and cross weight with 3/16" diameter
adjustable brick tie, "Dur-O-Eye".
4. Anchors for dovetail slots by others: D/A 723 galvanized.
Veneer anchors for steel studs: Veneer Anchor#D/A 213 14 gauge galvanized with 3/16"ties.
6. Width: Approximately 2 inches less than nominal thickness of wall or wythe.
04150-1 No.99132-CP2
7. Comers: Furnish pre-fabricated comers and tees except where masonry control and expansion joints
indicated. Use for all comers and intersections of masonry walls,including intersections of exterior walls with
partitions.
B. Masonry veneer anchors: Veneer with steel back-up: 3/16" diameter wire adjustable anchor with 14 gauge plate, r
all components galvanized steel. Anchor with corrosion resistant fasteners.
C. Reinforcing Steel: New billet stock, deformed bars, ASTM A615 Grade 60, free of mill scale, excessive rust or
other coating that would prohibit proper bond with grout or mortar.
D. Hardware Cloth: 1/4"galvanized wire. ,
E. Concrete block control joint: Dur-O-Wal "Rapid" Control Joint, Rubber Compound, Regular D/A 2001 or
equivalent product by Vinylex,Everlastic,or Vulcan Metal Products.
F. Brick expansion joint: Dur-O-Wal"Rapid"Expansion Joint,Everlastic Neo-Seal IV or equal.
G. Compression Seal: Flexible semi-closed urethane, Brock White No. 4290 Shok Pak or equal. Installed 1/2" ,
thicker than joint thickness.
H. Flashing
1. Flexible Flashing: Miradri TWF 40 mil. Products with equivalent thickness as manufactured by WR Grace,
Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing and Polyken are acceptable. Primer for masonry and concrete surfaces to
be as recommended by flashing manufacturer '
2. Metal Flashing: 24 ga. G-90 hot dipped galvanized steel, prefinished with Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000
fluorocarbon coating. Conform to requirements of Section 07600. Color: See Material Finish/Color '
Schedule,Section 1-4 of Details of Construction.
I. Cavity Wall Insulation,Type No. 3: Extruded polystyrene, ASTM C578-87a, Type X, as manufactured by U. C.
Industries,Dow Chemical,DiversiFoam Products or Amoco Foam Products. ,
J. Fiberglass Mesh: Dur-O-Wal"Fil-Stop"fiberglass mesh or equal.
K. Galvanized Items: Minimum ASTM A641 Class 3.
L. Cavity Weep/Vent: Dur-O-Wall cell vent D/A 1006. Color as selected from manufacturers full range of available
colors.
M. Rope Wicks: 1/4"cotton sash cord.
N. Pea Gravel: Washed,3/8"minimum diameter. ,
O. Sheathing Tape: #8086 Contractor sheathing tape as manufactured by 3M. ,
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES IN MASONRY
A. See Section 04200 for installation of accessories.
END OF SECTION 04150
04150-2 No.99132-CP2 '
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Furnish and install concrete masonry units and brick where shown on the Drawings.
2. Install precast concrete lintels and sills, mortar, cavity insulation, masonry accessories, masonry reinforcing
and loose steel lintels and other items embedded in masonry construction.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Mortar-Section 04100.
' 2. Masonry accessories-Section 04150.
3. Steel lintels and shelf angles-Section 05500.
1.03 REFERENCES
' A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
1. ASTM C67-Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.
2. ASTM C55-Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick.
3. ASTM C90-Standard Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
' 4. ASTM C216-Standard Specification for Facing Brick(Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
5. ASTM C476 Standard Specification-for Mortar,and•Grout for Reinforced Masonry.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform the specified Source Quality
Control.
04200-1 No.99132-CP2
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports
1. Submit test reports in duplicate indicating compliance with applicable specifications for compressive strength, '
absorption, weight, moisture content and dimensions for each type of masonry unit. Prior test data for tests
performed within one year of bid date will be acceptable.
2. Submit reports on manufacturer's normal quality control.
3. Provide report on modified ASTM C67 test for face brick as follows: Test to determine if the exterior face '
brick will meet the SW grade requirements of ASTM C216. Testing is recommended to document
compressive strength, saturation coefficient, dimensions, distortion and potential for efflorescence. For this
testing, a total of 15 bricks will be required. Make the samples representative of the whole lot of brick from
which they are selected and include specimens representative of the complete range of colors and sizes of the
brick in the shipment. Upon completion of testing, cut several of the brick samples and observe the cross
section for the presence of stratification.
B. Samples '
1. Manufacturer's samples: Preliminary selection of brick type and color has been based upon manufacturer's
samples supplied to the Architect prior to bidding. Brick supplied to the site which, in the judgment of the
Architect,varies significantly from these samples in color,color range or finish will be rejected.
2. Preliminary sample panels: At the site, erect a 2'-0" square panel of each brick type, incorporating the ,
preliminary mortar selection(s)and the full range of brick color to be expected. After review by the Architect,
construct additional sample panels to adjust brick range and mortar color. Do not begin final production
and/or delivery of materials until acceptance of preliminary sample panel. ,
3. Composite sample panel: After acceptance of preliminary sample panel,construct a square panel as detailed
incorporating all brick types, mortar colors and brick pattern shown on Drawings. Construct panel as a
complete cavity wall system with insulation,flashing,rope wicks,cavity vents,ties and scored concrete block '
backup. Maintain panel as a quality control guide until completion of masonry work.
C. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300. ,
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle,transport and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.
B. Protect masonry units from water. Deliver the units to the job cubed on pallets.
C. Deliver and store scored masonry units with cardboard separators to reduce chipping and other damage to block
surface and edges:
D. Store materials under cover in dry place; in manner to prevent damage, intrusion of foreign material. During
freezing weather protect all masonry units with tarpaulins or other suitable material. Store concrete masonry under
covers that will permit circulation of air,prevent excessive moisture absorption;protect against wetting prior to use.
04200-2 No.99132-CP2 '
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE BLOCK
A. Units
1. Hollow load bearing units: ASTM C90,Grade N-1,normal weight. Type I.
2. Concrete building brick: ASTM C55,Grade N,nominal weight. Type I.
B. Requirements
1. Prism strength: fm=2,000 psi.
' 2. Fire-Resistant Construction: Wherever a fire-resistant classification is indicated for unit masonry construction,
provide concrete block units as tested and listed for the particular construction.
3. Where exposed in interior spaces to receive paint,match adjacent existing units. Provide bullnose comers at
all exposed outside comers in finished rooms and as detailed on drawings.
' C. Fabrication: Use clean,smooth forms to eliminate voids,ridges and other blemishes visible in the finished work or
which might be subject to damage during shipping and installation.
2.02 FACE BRICK
' A. Quality: ASTM C216-85a,Grade SW.
B. Manufacturer,Type: Blend
1. Brick No. 1: Hebron Brick,"Tan",Rugg Texture: 45%
' 2. Brick No.2: Hebron Brick,"Light Tan",Rugg Texture: 45%
3. Brick No.3: Hebron Brick,"Red",Rugg Texture: 10%
' 2.03 GROUT FOR MASONRY
A. Grout for concrete masonry: Conform to ASTM C476,
B. Aggregates: ASTM C-404.
' C. Proportion grout by volume and add sufficient water to produce consistency for pouring without segregation.
Compose grout by volume of one part Portland cement,up to one-tenth part by volume hydrated lime or lime putty,
and sand two and-one-fourth to three times the sum of the volumes of the cementitious materials. Achieve grout
slump of 8"to 9". Attain a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days.
D. Do not use any antifreeze compound in grout.
' 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests of each brick type in accordance with ASTM C67 to determine compliance with ASTM C216, Grade
SW. Document compressive strength, saturation coefficient, initial rate of absorption, dimensional tolerance and
potential for efflorescence.
04200-3 No.99132-CP2
B. Perform tests of each brick/mortar combination to determine flexural bond strength in accordance with ASTM
C1072.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT
A. Unless noted on Drawings as 'blear", all dimensions on Drawings are modular, from center to center of vertical
joints and from bottom to bottom of horizontal joints.
B. Lay out exposed masonry to achieve joint pattern shown on Drawings. Where not shown,lay out exposed masonry ,
to minimise cutting of units. Where possible, provide full 8" wide units at outside comers, jambs, and other
openings.
3.02 MORTAR
A. Mortar proportioning and mixing is specified in Section 04100.
B. Tempering: The consistency of mortar may be adjusted to the satisfaction of the mason. Use mortar within two and
one half(2-1/2)hours after mixing.
C. Type: Lay masonry in mortar of the type specified below,as adjusted for compatibility with masonry units.
Kind of Masonry Mortar Type
Concrete masonry in contact with the ground S
Load bearing concrete masonry S '
Brick masonry exposed to weather N
All other masonry S
3.03 PRECAUTIONS ,
A. Cold Weather Requirements
1. Cold weather conditions exist when temperature is 40 degrees F.or below. i
2. Keep masonry units dry. Do not use wet or frozen masonry units.
3. Following general rules may be modified as approved by Architect to suit project conditions. '
AIR TEMP. '
(Degrees F.) CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
40-32 Heat mix water or sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees F. and 120
degrees F.
32-25 Heat mix water and sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees F. and 120
degrees F. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above 40 degrees F. Employ ,
windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 MPH.
25-20 Heat mix water and sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees F. and 120 '
degrees F. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above 40 degrees F. Heat
masonry units so their temperature when laid is not less than 20 degrees F. Utilize
sources of heat on both sides of wall under construction. Employ windbreaks when wind
is in excess of 15 MPH.
042004 No.99132-CP2
' 20 and below Heat mix water and sand to produce mortar temperature between 40 degrees F. and 120
degrees F. Maintain temperature of mortar boards above 40 degrees F. Heat Masonry
units to minimum 20 degrees F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air
' temperature above 32 degrees F.for 24 hours.
MEAN DAILY AIR
TEMP.(Degrees F.) PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
40-32 Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours.
32-25 Completely cover masonry for 24 hours.
25-20 Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or approved equal protection for 24
hours.
20 and below Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F. for 24 hours by enclosure and
approved supplementary heat.
B. Protect facing material against staining; keep top of walls covered with non-staining waterproof coverings when
work is not in progress.
' C. Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean, roughen, lightly wet set masonry before new
masonry is joined. Make necessary horizontal stop-offs by racking back masonry,do not tooth.
' D. Where units are specified to be wetted,uniformly wet units 3 to 4 hours before using.
3.04 LAYING MASONRY UNITS
A. Lay masonry plumb,true to lines. Unless noted on Drawings as 'blear", all dimensions on Drawings are modular,
from center to center of vertical joints and from bottom to bottom of horizontal joints.
' B. Lay hollow masonry units 4 inches or less in thickness,all solid masonry units in full beds of mortar with full head
joints.
' C. Lay hollow masonry units exceeding 4 inches in thickness with divided bed,head joints.
D. Avoid over-plumbing,pounding of comer,jambs after setting masonry in position. Where an adjustment must be
made after mortar has started to harden,remove mortar,replace with fresh mortar.
E. Lay masonry within one minute of placing mortar.
' 3.05 BONDING AND ANCHORAGE
A. Anchor abutting or intersecting non-load bearing walls,partitions at vertical intervals of 2 feet with corrugated ties.
' B. Where indicated anchor walls, partitions abutting or facing against steel columns, beams with flexible anchors.
Unless indicated otherwise,maximum spacing; 16 inches vertically at columns, 16 inches horizontally at beams.
' C. Anchor exterior walls,veneer facing against concrete beams,columns,walls with dovetail anchors spaced 16 inches
vertically, 16 inches horizontally.
' D. Anchor exterior walls parallel to open web joists with prefabricated anchoring and reinforcing assembly with
adjustable rectangular ties welded to structural steel as indicated.
04200-5 No.99132-CP2
E. Bond non-bearing walls,partitions of more than one wythe with wire ties;use at least one tie for each 3%z sq. ft.of
wall surface;spaced maximum of 16 inches vertically,36 inches horizontally,stagger alternate rows. Embed ties in
horizontal joints.
F. Anchor veneer to backup with ties spaced 16"horizontally and vertically. ,
G. Bond bearing walls of more than one wythe as required for non-bearing walls. Fill all collar joints between all
wythes with mortar. '
3.06 BUILT-IN WORK
A. Consult other trades in advance, make provision for installation of their work in order to avoid cutting, patching.
Build-in work specified under other sections as work progresses.
B. Set steel lintels in beds of mortar. Fill door and borrowed light frames solid with grout around jambs, heads of ,
bucks,frames.
C. Flexible Flashing:
1. Apply where concealed wall flashing is indicated;at heads;sills of exterior masonry openings;at exterior wall
damp courses under all precast concrete copings;as otherwise indicated.
2. Flashing Installation: Properly clean and dry backup prior to applying primer as recommended by flashing
manufacturer. Lay one layer of flexible flashing on bed joint of brick. Install continuous metal flashing and
adhere another layer of flexible flashing over metal and continue up vertical back-up material a minimum of 8 ,
inches. Lap all flashing joints a minimum of 8 inches.
3. At heads, sills of masonry openings;carry head flashing 6"beyond ends of steel lintels; at heads,sills turn up
ends to form pans,with corners folded,not cut.
4. Fully adhere flexible flashing to steel lintels.
D. Where masonry is built around steel columns, wrap columns with 1%2' thick batt insulation and remove mortar ,
- droppings from around columns.
3.07 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS ,
A. Concrete masonry erection, workmanship: Conform to latest standard specifications for concrete masonry as
published by the National Concrete Masonry Association(NCMA). '
B. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
C. Make necessary cuts of concrete masonry with motor driven masonry saw.
D. Units with open cells exposed in wall will not be permitted. '
E. Provide reinforced cast-in-place lintels over square head openings where indicated; formed in place with special
shaped load bearing bond beam or lintel units;jointing,texture to match adjacent wall units. Fill lintels solid with
grout; reinforce as indicated. Provide minimum of 8 inches bearing at ends. Provide temporary support under ,
lintels as necessary.
F. Provide continuous vertical control joints in concrete masonry walls where indicated;where joints are not indicated, '
locate maximum of 20 feet on center. Locate joints a minimum of 4'-0" beyond lintel bearing. Form joints as
indicated. Bond beam reinforcing shall be continuous through control joints.
04200-6 No.99132-CP2 '
G. Finish face joints in scored concrete masonry units with metal tool to form a "V"joint. In non-scored exposed
units,finish joints with metal tool to form concave joints.
' H. In unexposed units or in block scheduled for tile or veneer plaster make joints uniform, approximately 3/8" wide,
cut flush.
I. Lay concrete masonry in running bond unless indicated or hereinafter specified otherwise. Scored block to have
stack bond appearance.
J. Install vertical reinforcing in concrete masonry where indicated. Fill reinforced cores solid with grout or concrete.
' K. Fill cores of concrete masonry solid with grout or concrete where indicated.
3.08 INSULATION
A. Install cavity wall insulation against face of concrete block with boards horizontal,tight butted joints. Fasten with
adhesive or mechanical fasteners. Stagger end joints and seal joints with sheathing tape. Insure that insulation is
clean and dry prior to placing tape. Carefully seal up to and around reinforcing penetrating insulation. Fit tightly
around reinforcing,wall penetrations.
1 3.09 BRICK
A. Clay Masonry Erection,Workmanship: Conform to latest recommended standard specifications for clay masonry as
' published by the Brick Institute of America(BIA).
B. Moisten brick with absorption rates in excess of 20g/30 sq. im/min- as determined by ASTM C67, so that rate of
absorption when laid does not exceed this amount.
C. Finish face joints exposed on exterior walls with metal tool to form concave joint,close hair cracks,crevices.
' D. Finish face joints on interior walls with metal tool to form raked joint 1/4"deep.
E. Remainder of Joints: Cut off flush.
' F. Lay bricks in running bond to match existing. Provide header courses, soldier courses and corbeling where shown
on Drawings.
' G. Provide continuous vertical 3/8" expansion joints in brick where shown on Drawings. Where not shown, provide
within two feet of outside comers,at inside comers,between dissimilar materials and no more than 20 feet on center
elsewhere. Verify location and alignment with Architect.
' H. Provide weep vents 24 inches o.c. in exterior masonry in vertical joints immediately above all flashing, at base of
cavity,veneer walls;use rope wicks where shown on Drawings.
' I. Keep air space within cavity walls clean, free from obstruction. Provide positive means of catching mortar
droppings,or cleanouts to remove mortar from base of cavity.
' J. Install pea gravel to a minimum depth of 4" above all flashings. Lay bricks no higher than 8" above flashings until
pea gravel is installed.
3.10 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Point up exposed masonry,fill holes,joints,remove loose mortar,cut out defective joints,repaint with mortar.
' 04200-7 No.99132-CP2
B. Point all joints, including scores, of glazed masonry units with colored pointing mortar. Tool joints concave '
smooth.
C. Thoroughly clean exposed masonry. Before applying any cleaning agent to entire wall,apply to sample wall area of '
approximately 20 sq.ft.in location approved by Architect. Do not proceed with cleaning work until sample area is
approved.Use approved cleaning material,method on remaining wall area.
D. If stiff brushes, water do not suffice clean the surface on which no green efflorescence appears with Sure-Klean '
Vana-Trol as manufactured by Pro So Co.,Inc.
E. Remove"problem" stains as follows with the as specified formulations of Pro So Co.,Inc.,or equal: '
1. Green Efflorescence-"Sure-Klean No.800 Stain Remover".
2. Tar,Asphalt-"Sure-Klean Asphalt&Tar Remover". ,
3. Ferrous Stains-"Sure-Klean Ferrous Stain Remover".
F. Do not use acid solutions for cleaning masonry units unless specifically approved by Architect.
G. Clean off loose mortar,remove stains from concrete masonry units.
H. Schedule,complete cleaning work as soon as possible;in any event, before Owner's signage work is commenced.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Structural Testing and Inspection
1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection shall be performed by qualified parties as specified herein, and in '
accordance with the provisions of Section 01410.
2. Personnel Qualifications ,
a. Special Inspector-Technical
1.) Technical I - ACI Certified Grade I Technician. Inspector shall be employed by a testing '
laboratory,under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
2.) Technical II - ACI Certified Grade II Inspector. Inspector shall be employed by a testing '
laboratory,under the direct supervision of a registered civil/structural engineer.
3.) Technical III-A civil/structural engineer regularly engaged in this type of work,with a minimum of '
4 years experience and registered in the State in which the project is located and is an employee of a
qualified and approved testing laboratory. The registered engineer shall review and approve all
reports-
4.)
eports 4.) Testing laboratory shall have C.C.R.L.certification at the National Bureau of Standards.
3. The Owner will employ a Special Inspector for the following tests: ;
a. Concrete masonry prism test for compressive strength according to ASTM E447-Method B. Conduct
one set of three prisms at the start of construction and for each 5,000 square feet of block installed. '
Qualifications: Technical 11.
END OF SECTION 04200 '
04200-8 No.99132-CP2 ,
SECTION 05100
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
' A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
' 1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Furnish and erect structural steel framing as shown on the Structural Drawings.
' B. Related work specified in other sections:
' 1. Grouting of base plates-Section 03600.
2. Metal joists-Section 05200.
' 3. Metal decking-Section 05300.
4. Cold formed metal framing-Section 05400.
' 5. Metal fabrications-Section 05500.
' 6. Fireproofing-Section 07250.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference. Materials and operations shall comply
with requirements of latest issue of published reference. Where provisions of these Project Specifications are at
variance with those reference specifications,the maximum criteria or requirements shall govern.
' 1. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC), "Manual of Steel Construction-Allowable Stress Design",
9th Edition and LRFD 2nd Edition.
2. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC), "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings",June 1989.
3. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC),"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges",
' Adopted 1986.
4. American Welding Society(AWS)D1.1-88,"Structural Welding Code:Steel".
' 5. ASTM A36-91,"Specification for Structural Steel".
6. ASTM A53-90b,"Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless".
' 7. ASTM A307-92a,"Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 PSI Tensile Strength".
8. ASTM A325-92a, "Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSI Minimum Tensile
Strength".
9. ASTM A490-92a, "Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts 150 KSI Minimum Tensile Strength.
05100-1 No.99132-CP2
10. ASTM A500-90a, "Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in '
Rounds and Shapes".
11. ASTM A572-92a, "Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural '
Quality".
12. ASTM A123-89a, "Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coating on Iron and Steel Products".
13. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation "Specification for '
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts",November 1985.
14. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, "Steel Structures Painting '
Manual",4th Edition.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following,except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC),"Manual of Steel Construction-Allowable Stress Design". '
2. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC),"Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings".
3. American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC),"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". ,
4. American Welding Society(AWS)D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel". ,
5. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". '
6. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC)Volume 2,4th Edition,Systems and Specifications,"Steel Structures
Painting Manual".
B. All shop and field welding shall be performed by personnel qualified according to Section 5.3 of AWS D1.1.
1.05 SUBMITTALS ,
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide shop drawings of structural steel,based on design drawings. '
2. Give necessary information for fabrication. Painting of structure,based on AISC specifications. Include size,
camber and weight of members and type and location of all shop and field connections. '
3. Do not fabricate until approved drawings are returned to Fabricator.
4. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. '
B. Welder's Certificates: Submit copies of shop and field welder's certificates to special inspector indicating
certification in accordance with"AWS"reference specification. '
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to coincide with related Work being performed. '
B. Store off ground in manner that will prevent rust, damage. Repair or replace all damaged steel to "as fabricated"
condition. ,
05100-2 No.99132-CP2 '
C. Use care in storing,handling and erecting all materials and support same properly at all times to insure that no piece
will be bent, twisted or otherwise damaged. Correct material damage due to carelessness to the approval of the
Architect before erection.
1 1.07 MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify all dimensions given on the Drawings and make such field measurements as are necessary to lay out the work
properly and assure proper fit and proper elevations.
B. Be fully responsible for accuracy of all measurements and laying out of the work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM A36 (W14-W36 beams, W8-W14 columns, and other members noted
ton Drawings to be ASTM A572,Grade 50 ksi).
B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A500 Grade B.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53,Type E,Grade B.
D. High Strength Threaded Fasteners (Bolts, Nuts and Washers Connecting Steel to Steel): ASTM A325, minimum
' diameter 3/4".
E. Standard Threaded Fasteners
1. Bolts and Nuts Connecting Steel to Concrete: ASTM A307,Grade A with hexagonal heads and nuts.
2. Plain Washers: ANSI B27.2,Type A.
F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307,Paragraph 1.3.
' G. Filler Metals for Welding: In accordance with Section 4.1 of"AWS"reference specification.
H. Welding Electrode: E70 Electrode.
' I. Expansion Bolts: ICBO approved, wedge anchors. Hilti "Kwik Bolt II" or "HSL", ITW Ramset/Red Head
"Trubolt"wedge anchor.
' J. Grout: See Section 03600.
K. Shop Paint Primer. Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting primer.
L. Galvanize all steel exposed to weather,i.e.lintels incorporated into structural steel.
M. Adhesive Anchors: ICBO approved,size and embedment as shown on the drawings.
' 1. To Concrete or Solid Masonry: Hilti - "HVA", or "HIT-HY150", ITW Ramset/Red Head "Epcon", or
approved equal.
2. To Masonry with Voids: Hilti-"Hit HY-20 Adhesive Anchor",ITW Ramset/Red Head"Epcon with screen",
or approved equal.
1
' 05100-3 No.99132-CP2
2.02 FABRICATION '
A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with referenced AISC publications.
B. High Strength Bolted Construction Assembly: Tightening shall be done in accordance with Section 5, reference
"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
C. Welded Construction: In accordance with"AWS"reference specification. '
D. Do bracing,blocking,cutting,fitting,drilling,tapping,welding,punching,etc.as may be required to complete work
and to join work of other trade contractors. Weld clip angles and plates to beams and punch holes for fastening '
work of other trades as shown on drawings.
E. Provide all holes and connections for Work specified in other sections or shown for other trades and required to be
fastened to steel furnished in this Section. '
F. During fabrication,provide all known holes specified in other sections or shown for other trades.
G. Fabricator shall design shop and field connections unless detailed on the drawings. '
H. Bolt field connections,unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2.03 SHOP PAINTING '
A. Shop paint all steelwork. Steel work to receive fireproofing to be painted with appropriate UL tested primer or left ,
unpainted.
B. Preparation Method: Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPQ SSPC-SP3, SP6 or SP10 surface preparation '
acceptable.
C. Paint Application: One coat,2.0 mil dry thickness,in accordance with AISC publications.
D. Hot-dip galvanize all ferrous metal exposed to weather in the finish work. Paint with recommended primer for use
with galvanized metal.
2.04 GALVANIZING '
A. ASTM A123,Class B.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION ,
A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide as required with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.
Remove temporary members, connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. '
Provide temporary guy lines as required to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds.
B. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC"Code of Standard Practice". '
C. Attached column bases, beam bearing plates, similar structural members: Aligned with wedges and shims. Grout
per grout manufacturer's printed recommendations. '
D. Field Assembly: Fastening of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought
completely into contact.
05100-4 No.99132-CP2 '
E. High Strength Bolted Construction Assembly: Tighten in accordance with Section 5, reference "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts."
' F. Welded Construction: In accordance with"AWS"reference specification.
G. Gas Cutting: Field correcting of fabrication by gas cutting is not permitted on members in the structural framing
without prior approval of the Architect.
H. Paint Touch-up: After erection of structural steel,touch-up paint field connections,bolt heads and nuts,welds and
abrasions in the shop paint coating,with same paint used for shop painting.
' I. Repair galvanizing after completion of field welding according to ASTM A780.
J. Install expansion bolts and adhesive anchors in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
' A. Special Structural Testing and Inspection
1. Special Structural Testing and Inspection and Conventional Testing and Inspection shall be performed by
qualified parties as specified herein and in accordance with the provisions of Section 01410.
' 2. If special inspection of Fabricator's work is required, special inspector may test and inspect structural steel at
plant before shipment.
' 3. Qualifying Agencies:
a. A.S.N.T.: The American Society for Non-destructive Testing
b. N.D.E: Non-destructive Evaluation
' C. A.W.S./C.A.W.I.: American Welding Society/Certified Associate Weld Inspector
d. A.W.S./C.W.I.: American Welding Society/Certified Weld Inspector
4. Personnel Qualifications:
a. Special Inspector - Technical: Shall be employed by a testing agency and shall be supervised by an
' A.W.S./C.W.I.with a minimum of 10 years experience or an A.S.N.T. Level III with a minimum of 10
years experience. Individuals shall satisfy the following requirements:
1.) Technical I: Non-destructive Testing Technician A.S.N.T.-TC-IA Level 1,and/or A.W.S./C.A.W.I.
2:), Technical II: Non-destructive Testing Technician A.S.N.T.-TC-IA Level II, (NDE Technician II),
A.W.SJC.A.W.I.,with minimum 3 years experience,or an A.W.SJC.W.I.
3.) Technical III: A.S.N.T.Level III with a minimum of 10 years experience or an A.W.SJC.W.I.with
a minimum of 10 years experience.
5. The Owner will provide the following tests and inspections:
a. Test high strength bolted connections according to the requirements of R.C.S.C. "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts",UBC Standard 27-7 and as follows:
1.) Preparation: Visually inspect mating surfaces and bolt type for all bolted connections for general
' conformance with the contract documents prior to bolting. Qualifications: Technical H.
05100-5 No.99132-CP2
1
2.) Slip Critical Bolts and Tension Bolts: Test bolt tightening in 10%of all bolts. Test a minimum of '
two bolts in each connection. Verify that all plies connected elements have been brought into
contact at 100%of connections. Verify all tips are removed from"twist-off'bolts. Qualifications: '
Technical H.
3.) Bearing Bolts: Visually inspect to confirm all plies of connected elements have been brought into
contact at 100% of connections. (Applies only to bolts designed with threads included in failure '
plane;all other bolts require testing as for tension bolts.) Qualifications: Technical II.
4.) Shop Fabricated Work: Delete bolt testing if fabrication shop satisfies AISC Quality Certification '
Program - Category I, or more stringent criteria, or is approved by Building Official and SER
Special Inspector to determine if the above requirements are met.
b. Test welding as follows: '
1.) Fillet Welds: Visually inspect 100%of all fillet welds,for size,length,and quality,per AWS D1.1.
Qualifications: Technical H. '
2.) Partial Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all partial penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using
Ultrasonic Testing per AWS D1.1, Section 6. Test 25% of all penetration welds less than 5/16
inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E-109 performed on root pass and on finished '
weld. Qualifications: Technical 11.
3.) Full Penetration Welds: Test 100% of all full penetration welds exceeding 5/16 inch, using '
Ultrasonic Testing per AWS D1.1 Section 6. Test 25%of all full penetration welds less that 5/16
inch, using Magnetic Particle Testing per ASTM E-109 performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Qualifications: Technical II.
4.) Procedures and Preparation: Verify the following:
a). Qualifications of all welders as AWS certified. '
b.) Proposed welding procedures and materials.
c.) Adequate preparation of faying surfaces.
d.) Preheat and interpass temperatures of steel, proper technique and sequence of welding, and '
cleaning and number of passes.
Qualifications: Technical 1I
5.) Shop Fabricated Work: Delete fillet weld and partial penetration weld testing if fabrication shop ,
satisfies AISC Quality Certification Program-Category I,or more stringent criteria,or is approved
by Building Official and SER Special Inspector to determine if the above requirements are met.
C. Expansion Bolting and Adhesive Anchoring: Be present on the job site continuously during installation '
to verify bolt type and dimensions, concrete type and compressive strength,pre-drilled hole dimensions,
embedment,spacing,edge distances,slab thickness,and tightening torque. '
Qualifications: Technical H.
END OF SECTION 05100
05100-6 No.99132-CP2 '
SECTION 05400
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
' 1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Steel stud framing for non-load bearing exterior walls and fascias,shown on the Drawings.
' B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Metal studs for interior partitions-Section 09250.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Reference Specifications
1. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association-"Steel Framing Systems Manual'.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) - "Specification For the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural
Members", 1980 edition.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Shop Drawings indicating fastening methods,stud and bracing placement,member sizes.
' B. Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature.
1 PART 2: PRODUCTS
' 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL STUDS
A. Manufacturer: Clark Steel Framing Systems,Dietrich Industries or equal.
' B. Steel Studs: 6"deep,type CSJ, 16 gauge,A=.555 int,Ix=2.83 ire, Sx=.95&,Rx=2.26in,ASTM A-653,structural
steel quality,grade 50, [345]Class 2.
C. Track: Unpunched deep leg, 18 gauge;ASTM A653,structural steel quality,grade 33.
D. Bridging: N-2-1/2 x 16 gauge.
' E. Finish: G60 coating per ASTM A653.
05400-1 No.99132-CP2
PART 3: EXECUTION '
3.01 ERECTION
A. All Framing Members: Cut squarely or at an angle to fit squarely against abutting members; held in position until '
properly fastened. Prefabricated panels: Square, braced against racking. Attachment of similar components: By
Welding. Attachment of dissimilar components: By welding,screw attachment or bolting. Wire tying of framing
components in structural applications shall not be permitted.Adjust welding amperage to prevent bum through. '
B. Track: Securely anchored to floor,overhead structure or structural backup member.
C. Studs: Seated squarely in track with stud web and flange abutting track web,plumbed or aligned,securely attached '
to flanges or web of both upper and lower tracks.
D. All Welds: Fillet,plug,butt or seam '
E. For walls up to 10 ft.high provide one row of bridging at mid-height.
F. For walls over 10 ft.high provide bridging rows spaced 4'-0"o.c.maximum. '
G. All Wall and Fascia Panels: Diagonally braced with 2 inch x 16 gauge strap; field weld both edges to track and
each stud. '
END OF SECTION 05400
1
1
05400-2 No.99132-CP2 '
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
r A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: All labor, material necessary to complete all items of miscellaneous metal as listed on the
' schedule in Part 2 and shown on the Drawings.
1. Miscellaneous metal includes all the various metal items manufactured to more or less standard details in sizes
conforming to specific requirements of the project.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Installation of loose lintels and other items embedded in concrete masonry-Section 03300 and 04200.
2. Steel support brackets for countertops-Section 06401.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings required for all items. Show all work to be fabricated with all construction details shown in
appropriate scale,methods of attachment to other materials,finished dimensions,shop welds and grinding of welds,
field assembly joints,etc. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300.
!j B. Coordinate work with other suppliers and subcontractors; obtain their approved shop drawing where necessary, or
obtain any necessary additional detail information regarding mounting conditions or other aspects of related work.
1.04 PRODUCT PROTECTION
A. Package, handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage or deformation. Damaged
material will be rejected.
B. Furnish items to be built into concrete,masonry,carpentry,etc.as the work progresses.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Verify dimensions in field,as required,for pre-cut or prefabricated items.
rB. Examine job conditions and adjoining construction which may affect the acceptability of the work.
' PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN
A. All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, appearance, and of the best commercial
quality for the purposes indicated. Structural properties shall be such to withstand safety all strains and stresses to
which they will be normally subjected.
05500-1 No.99132-CP2
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Steel: Mild Steel
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A36.
C. Fastenings: Bolts,welds,rivets or other fastenings as required.
D. Anchor Bolts,Nuts: ASTM A307,Paragraph 1.3.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A120 or A-53.
F. Carbon Steel: ASTM A-366 or A569.
G. Grating and Grating Treads: Welded steel gratings with 1'/" x 3/16" plain bearing bars, galvanized and prime '
painted 12-1/8" wide treads, with cast iron abrasive nosing, Klemp KW-194, for interior treads and formed steel
safety nosing at exterior.
H. Shop Paint Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibiting primer. 1
I. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167,Type 302 or 304,#4 satin finish.
J. Galvanizing: ASTM A123,Class B.
2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FABRICATION
A. Weld permanent connections wherever possible;use continuous welds where exposed and grind smooth, straighten
members after welding.
B. Do shop cutting,drilling,fitting wherever possible. Take field measurements before fabrication when required.
C. Provide all supporting members,fasteners,framing,hangers,bracing,brackets,straps,bolts,angles,etc.required to
set,connect the work rigidly and properly to other construction.
2.04 SHOP COATS PROTECTIVE TREATMENT
A. Clean free of all mill scale, rust and foreign matter by wire brushing, scraping, sandblasting or flame cleaning.
Remove grease,oil with solvent. Dust,dirt: Remove with air blast or brush.
B. Apply one shop coat of specified primer to all ferrous metal products, except galvanized. Provide primer for field
touch up. Be responsible for quality and adhesion of shop prime finish.
C. Hot-dip galvanize all ferrous metal items exposed to weather in the finish work and shop prime with primer
recommended for use on galvanized metal.
2.05 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS
A. Items listed in this Section are intended only as a guide,but this does not relieve responsibility for quantity and to
include all similar items. Thoroughly examine all Drawings for items of miscellaneous metal fabrications.
1. Loose and fixed masonry lintels,as scheduled.
2. Field welded steel angles for support of storefront and masonry walls.
3. Other miscellaneous metal items shown on Drawings.
05500-2 No.99132-CP2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Anchor to masonry with expansion or toggle bolts where built-in anchorage is not provided; do not fasten to wood
plugs set in masonry.
B. Vertical members set into concrete or masonry: As shown.
C. Bolts,screws,etc.,for field connections: Same material,finish as base material.
3.02 FIELD SPLICES,WELDS
A. Continuously weld field splices and grind smooth where exposed to view.
B. Fill exposed splice joints with body filler and sand smooth.
C. Touch-up joints,welds with specified primer.
END OF SECTION 05500
1
05500-3 No.99132-CP2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
SECTION 06100
CARPENTRY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Miscellaneous blocking,sleepers and milers,shown on Drawings or required.
2. Preservative treated blocking for anchorage of windows,storefront and entrances.
3. Blocking within gypsum wallboard partitions for support of markerboards, grab bars, toilet accessories,
casework,hardware,other wall mounted specialties.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Concrete Formwork-Section 03300
2. Architectural Woodwork and Casework-Division 6.
3. Miscellaneous Specialties-Division 10
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grades: Western Wood Products Association"Product Use Manual".
B. Preservative Treated Lumber: American Wood Preservers Bureau, "LP-2 Pressure Treated with Water-Borne
Preservatives".
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish certificates for preservative treated lumber.
B. Submit roofing material manufacturer's current printed instructions for installation of milers.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Immediately upon delivery to fob site,place materials in area protected from weather.
B. Store materials a minimum of 6 in. above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective water proof
covering providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation.
C. Do not store seasoned material in wet or damp portions of building.
D. While unloading,protect sheet materials from comers breaking and damaging surfaces.
06100-1 No.99132-CP2
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate blocking for windows,storefront and entrances with Section 08521.
B. Coordinate blocking for miscellaneous specialties with Division 10 suppliers.
C. Coordinate blocking for door stops in gypsum walls with Section 08700.
E. Obtain product data,sizes and anchorage requirements prior to installation of blocking.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Nails, spikes, screws,bolts and similar items of size and types to rigidly secure members in place or as otherwise
indicated.
B. Non-corrosive type fasteners for redwood and preservative treated wood such as stainless steel or double dipped
galvanized.
2.02 LUMBER
A. Framing, blocking lumber: No. 2 or better, S4S, Douglas Fir-Larch, Hem-Fir or Southern Pine, moisture content
not to exceed 19%.
1. Provide preservative treated lumber for use in roof work, in contact with roofing materials or otherwise
exposed to moisture.
2. Provide fire-retardent lumber for all interior framing and blocking.
B. Redwood: No.2 or better under R.I.S.rules.
C. Hardwood: Solid laminated maple. .
2.03 PLYWOOD
A. Meet APA C-D exterior,thickness as shown on Drawings.
B. Provide preservative treated plywood in contact with roofing materials or otherwise exposed to moisture, and as
shown on Drawings.
C. Interior Finish Plywood: Paint grade birch.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. Provide wood nailers of size,shape where indicated,required.
B. Fasten securely to substrate with appropriate fasteners. Use expansion-type anchors at masonry or concrete, self-
tapping screws at steel. Use corrosive resistant fasteners for roofing applications or where otherwise exposed to
moisture.
C. Install work that is component of the roofing system according to roofing material manufacturer's current printed
instructions.
06100-2 No.99132-CP2
D. Install blocking for windows, storefront and entrances according to approved Section 08521 Shop Drawings.
Blocking shall be continuous the width or height of rough openings,unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
E. Install blocking for finish materials, such as windows and sheet metal fascias, with minimum number of joints,
plumb, level,true and straight with no distortions. Discard materials which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted,
improperly treated,not adequately seasoned.
3.02 FINISH CARPENTRY
A. Install hardwood with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces to the greatest extent possible.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns,miter at comers,to produce tight fitting joints with
full surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
B. Secure hardwood to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for a complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with
finished surface,and matching final finish where transparent is indicated.
END OF SECTION 06100
06100-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 06401
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK AND CASEWORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions to the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Work includes:
1. Plastic laminate casework,including hardware and accessories.
2. Plastic laminate counters.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Blocking and grounds-Section 06100.
2. Sinks,fittings-Division 15.
3. Electrical outlets,work-Division 16.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. The 1978 edition of the Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) apply, and are by
reference a part of this Specification.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300,indicate the following:
1. Casework: Elevations and locations of each assembly. Indicate dimensions,thicknesses, surfacing materials,
drawers,doors and door swings,sections of typical and special cases. Indicate core-materials,edge treatments
and construction.
2. Work Surfaces: Plans and locations of each work surface. Indicate dimensions. Indicate locations and sizes
of all openings including those for sinks. Indicate provisions for securing work surfaces to cases, window
sills.-
B. Submit manufacturer's product data for stock items.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING,STORAGE AND DELIVERY
A. Deliver, store and handle work to prevent damage, staining and disfigurement. Do not store woodwork in wet or
damp areas. Jobsite storage areas shall be enclosed,dry,and ventilated.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All materials to be guaranteed for a period of 5 years from manufacturer's defects and workmanship. Submit in
accordance to Section 01730.
06401-1 No.99132-CP2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Casework manufactured by L.S.I. Corporation of America is specified. Custom casework or products by
T.M.I./Trimline Systems Design Corporation, Compro Architectural Casework, Sidney Millwork, Northern
Woodwork, Stevens Cabinet Co. and Fixture, Gray Wolf are acceptable with minor deviations from these
specifications with the exception of:
1. Lamination System: Doors, finished end panels, and other decorative exterior laminate surfaces shall be
composed of minimum 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) core, laminated exterior with .030 inch (.76 mm) high pressure
plastic laminate, and interior with .020 inch (.51 mm) high pressure cabinet liner. Lamination with hybrid
P.V.A.Type III water resistant adhesives. Total thickness 13/16 inch(20.6 mm). No exceptions.
2. Structural Cabinet Body: Cabinet backs shall be minimum 3/8 inch(9.5 mm) thick, inset from rear of body,
fully housed four sides, and back-shimmed. Provide 3/4 inch(19.1 mm)thick stiffeners glued and fastened to
back/body as specified herein. Back perimeter and stiffeners to be fully seated with hot melt adhesive.
3. Interior Space: All cabinets shall have clear span interiors. No vertical dividers allowed unless by specified
architectural design.
4. Heavy Components: Wall cabinet tops and bottoms, and all bookstack shelves shall be minimum 1 inch(25.4
mm)thick, for additional load support. Shelves in door cabinets 30 inches (762 mm)wide and over shall be 1
inch(25.4 mm)thick. Shelves in open cabinets,regardless of width,shall be 1 inch(25.4)mm thick.
5. Structural Drawer Body: Drawer body material shall be multi-directional fiberboard with bottom recessed,
captured all four sides and sealed with hot metal adhesive. Provide under body stiffener as specified herein.
Particleboard bodies and/or surface applied bottoms are not acceptable.
6. Drawer Suspension: Drawer slides shall be self-closing design, epoxy power coated, with positive instop,
outstop, and out-keeper. Dynamic (operational) load rating to be minimum 100 lbs (45 kg). Minimum 150
lbs.{68 kg)static load rating.
7. Structural Cabinet Support: Cabinet sub base shall be of a separate and continuous ladder-type platform
design leveled and floor mounted prior to cabinets body placement. Material to be exterior grade plywood.
No cabinet sides-to-floor will be allowed.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Lumber and Plywood
1. Painted plywood: Paint grade birch,A.W.I. Section 100,custom grade.
2. Plywood for cabinet bases: 3/4"water resistant A-C interior fir plywood with exterior glue.
3. Particle board for casework and countertops: 47 lb. density high performance particle board with moisture
content not to exceed 8%. Meet requirements for type and classification under Commercial Standard CS-236-
66,Federal Specification LLL-B-800A,and ASTM D 1037-78.
4. Hardboard: Tempered hardboard, smooth both sides,minimum 1/4"thick. Meet requirements of Commercial
Standard CS-251 and Federal Specifications LLL-B-00810.
B. Plastic Laminate:
1. Products by Wilsonart, Formica, Westinghouse, Pionite and Nevamar are acceptable. Architect reserves the
right to select from any of the above manufacturer's if a specific color is not noted in the material finish/color
schedule.
2. Exposed vertical cabinet surfaces,cabinet bottoms, shelving and other storage surfaces: High pressure plastic
laminate,0.030"thick,meeting NEMA LD3-1991 GP 28 standards including thickness.
3. Countertops: High pressure plastic laminate,0.050"thick,matte textured finish.
4. High pressure cabinet liner: .020"in thickness,meeting NEMA LD3-1991 Grade CL-20. Balance with high
pressure cabinet liner at other semi-exposed,and concealed locations.
5. Semi-exposed cabinet interiors behind doors and drawers, except storage shelves, and underside of wall
cabinets: Melamine resin impregnated sheet, min_finum 80 grams/sq. minimilm permanently bonded to
substrate,meeting NEMA LD3.3-1991 GP28 standards and NEMA LD3-1991 CL20 standards. Balance with
same melamine at other semi-exposed locations, balance with phenolic resin saturated overlay at concealed
locations.
6. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule Section 1-4 of Details of Construction.
C. Edging
1. Countertops and shelving: Plastic laminate self edge,color and grade to match horizontal surface.
2. Cabinet body edges: Self edged color and grade to match vertical surface.
3. Cabinet doors and drawers: 3mm thick"flat edge" solid,high impact color thru, acid resistant P.V.C.applied
with hot melt adhesive, trimmed and buffed. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule, Section 1-4 of
Details of Construction.
D. Hardware
1. Hinges
a. Heavy duty,five knuckle 2-3/4" institutional type hinge. Mill ground,hospital tip,tight pin feature with
all edges eased. Hinge to be full wrap around type of tempered steel.095 inch thick. Each hinge to have
n ininalm nine screws,#7,5/8"FHMS to assure positive door attachment.
b. One pair per door to 48"height. One and one-half pair over 48 inches in height.Hinge to accommodate
13/16"thick laminated door,and allow 270 degree swing.
C. Finish to be'LH-301 dull chrome for fixed cabinetry.
2. Pulls: ABS plastic, semi-recessed. Size 5'/4"x 1-3/4" similar to LSI LH-331,Trimline Systems Design Corp.
or Hardware Concepts,Opalocka,Florida. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Section 1-4 of Details
of Construction.
3. Sliding Door Hardware
a. Sliding glass doors 1/4 inch thick: LH-370 double track rolling door assembly.
b. Sliding glass doors, 3/4" thick stile and rail type: LH-372 top mounted track with dual roller hangers.
Vertical adjustment for accurate alignment.
06401-3 No.99132-CP2
4. Drawer Slides
a. Standard Drawers: LSI Lab Series Slide, LH 375, epoxy powder coated to match drawer body color,
with positive in-stop, out-stop and out-keeper to maintain drawer in 80% open position. Captive nylon
rollers,both front and rear. Minimum 100 lb.dynamic load rating at 50,000 cycles.Provide adjuster cam
to regulate body side sway.
b. File Drawers: Full extension, 3 part progressive opening slide, minimum 100 1b. zinc plated or epoxy
coated at manufacturer's option.
c. Provide body mounted molded rails for hanging file system for legal or letter size as indicated by
manufacturer's model number. Cutting or machining of drawer body/face not allowed.
d. Paper Storage Drawers: Full extension,3-part progressive opening slide,minimum 100 lb.zinc plated or
epoxy coated at manufacturer's option.
5. Catches: LH-340 5 lb.magnetic catch for base and wall cabinets. Provide two 7 lb.pull at each tall cabinet
door.
6. Adjustable Shelf Supports: To be LH-353 with locking device to prevent accidental shelf slide-off. Load
rating to be minimum of 300 lbs. each support without failure in accordance with ANSI A161.1-1980 and
NEMA LD3-1991. Cabinet interior sides shall be flush,without shelf system permanent projection.
7. Wardrobe Rod: To be 1-1/16"chrome steel rod,LH-362,supported by LH-363 chrome flange.
8. Coat Hooks
a. Single coat hooks: LH-365 or Ives 581 satin aluminum
b. Double coat hooks: LH-366 or Ives 405 satin aluminum
9. Plastic Cable Grommets: Doug Mockett or equal,locations as shown on drawings. Provide round grommets
for wiring,paper slot grommets where shown.
10. Locks: To be disc tumbler lock keyed alike by room and master keyed.Dull chrome finish.
a. Hinged doors and drawers,National Lock No.M4-7054.
b. Sliding doors 13/16"thick,National Lock No.M4-0057.
C. 1/4 inch sliding panel doors,National Lock#08741.26.
E. Brackets: Pre-finished painted steel support brackets for counter top support
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Casework Construction
1. Cabinet Sub-base: To be separate and continuous(no cabinet body sides-to-floor),waterproof plywood with
concealed fastening to cabinet bottom Ladder-type construction, of front, back and intermediates, to form a
secure and level platform to which cabinets attach.
2. Cabinet Top and Bottom-Wall and Base
a. Base cabinet bottoms to be plastic laminate on particle board interior side, 3/4" thick with backer sheet
on concealed side.
064014 No.99132-CP2
b. Solid sub-top to be 3/4"melamine laminated particle board,all base cabinets.
C. Wall cabinet bottoms and tops to be 1"thick
d. Exterior exposed wall cabinet bottoms to be melamine laminate bottom,plastic laminate top. Assembly
devices to be concealed on bottom side of wall cabinets.
e. Hang Rail: 3/4"thick x width of cabinet glued to backside and mechanically to end panels.
3. Cabinet Ends
ra. Manufacturer's standard colored melamine laminated particle board interior side, 3/4" thick with
phenolic neutral color back sheet on concealed side. Library stack end panels 1"thick. Holes drilled for
adjustable shelves 1-1/4"on center.
b. Exposed exterior cabinet ends to be laminated with plastic laminate.
4. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves
a. Melamine laminated particle board one side. Tops of shelves to be high pressure plastic laminate,0.030"
thick. Wilsonart Vertical Surface,Type 335. Leading exposed edge of shelves to be self-edged.
b. Thickness: 3/4 standard shelving to 27"wide. One inch shelving 27 wide and over and on all exposed
cabinet shelving regardless of width.
5. Cabinet Backs
a. Standard cabinet back to be 3/8" thick,prefinished for use on all cabinets with or without doors. Rear,
unexposed side of back to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between back and sides/top/bottom
for sealing against moisture and vermin,and further contribute to case rigidity.
b. Exposed exterior backs to be 3/4"particle board faced with high pressure plastic laminate.
6. Doors and Drawer Fronts
a. Plastic laminate hinged and sliding doors and drawer fronts to be 13/16 inch thick Core material to be
3/4" thick, 45 lb. density particle board bonded on exterior with high pressure laminate and with high
pressure cabinet liner on interior face. Drawer fronts and hinged doors are to overlay the cabinet body.
Maintain a maximum 1/8" reveal between pairs of doors, between door and drawer front, or between
multiple drawer fronts within the cabinet.
b. Exposed edges are to be 3mm PVC.
7. Drawers
a. Drawer fronts shall be applied to separate drawer body component sub-front.
b. Sides and back of drawers to be 1/2"thick colored fiberboard,sub-front same,to be 5/8"thick.
C. Fiberboard to be of uniform density and meet the following minimum standards:
Screw holding,face 355 Is.
Screw holding,edge 300 lbs.
Modulus of rupture 4,500 psi
Modulus of elasticity @ 500,000 psi
Internal bond 100 psi
06401-5 No.99132-CP2
d. Drawer sides shall be dadoed to receive front and back,machine squared and held under pressure while
glued and pinned together.
e. Drawer bottom to be melamine laminate hardboard, 3/8" thick, housed and glued into front, sides and
back. Underside of drawer to receive continuous hot melt glue at joint between bottom and
back/sides/front for sealing and rigidity. Reinforce drawer bottoms as required with intermediate
spreaders.
f. Paper storage drawers to be fitted with hood at back. �I
8. Vertical and Horizontal Dividers: One of the following as indicated by cabinet number:
a. Tempered hardboard 1/4 thick,smooth both faces. Secured in cabinet with molded plastic clips.
b. Melamine laminated particle board 3/4" thickness. Secured in cabinet with molded plastic clips or
dowels.
9. Door/Drawer Spreaders: Provide minimum 3/4" x 6" x full polyester finished cabinet body spreaders
immediately behind all door/drawer and multiple drawer horizontal joints to maintain exact body dimensions,
and close off reveal.
10. Heavy Duty Shelf Standards, Brackets, Tubing: Knape and Vogt No. 83 with No. 183R, 183L or 183C
support brackets. Tubing No. 770-5 for clothes rod with No. 192 Hang Rod Saddle. Steel with brushed
chrome finish. Use for rear supported adjustable shelves.
B. Countertops: High pressure laminate bonded to particle board core. Underside to be properly balanced with heavy
gauge backing sheet. Edges to be high pressure plastic laminate to match horizontal surface color. Furnish
countertops in design as shown on drawings. Provide continuous tops for counter type cabinets fixed in a line.
C. Workmanship
1. Plastic laminate surface/backer to core under controlled conditions, by approved and regulated laminating
methods to assure a premium lamination. Natural-setting hybrid P.V.A. type water resistant adhesives that
cure thru chemical reaction containing no health or environmentally hazardous ingredients are required.
Methods requiring heat are not allowed;"contact"methods of laminating are not allowed.
2. Cabinet parts shall be accurately machined and bored for premium quality grade joinery construction utilizing
automatic machinery to inure consistent sizing of modular components.
3. End panels shall be doweled to receive bottom and top. Back panel shall be fully housed into cabinet sides,
top and bottom to insure rigidity and a fully closed cabinet.
4. Drawer bottoms shall be fully housed into sides,back and subfront. Sides of drawer shall be fully dadoed to
receive drawer back,locked in fully to sub-front,fastened with glue and mechanical fasteners.
5. 3/4" thick hang rails shall be applied to back side of all wall base and tall cabinets for extra rigidity and to
facilitate installation.
6. Rear of cabinet back,and underside of drawer bottom joints to receive a continuous bead of hot melt adhesive
to add to unit body strength and develop moisture seal.
7. All cases shall be square,plumb and true.
06401-6 No.99132-CP2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with related work of other sections as necessary to obtain proper installation of all
items.
B. Verify site dimensions of cabinet locations in building prior to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Storage and Protection: Casework shall be protected in transit. Store under cover in a ventilated building not
exposed to extreme temperature and humidity changes. Do not store or install casework in building until concrete,
masonry and plaster work is dry.
B. Workmen: Install casework under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative with factory-trained
mechanics authorized by manufacturer.
C. Workmanship
1. Erect casework straight,level and plumb and securely anchor in place. Scribe and closely fit to adjacent work.
Cut and fit work around pipes,ducts,etc.
2. Install all items complete and adjust all moving parts to operate smoothly.
3. Leave surface clean and free from defects at time of final acceptance.
D. Clean-up: Remove all cartons, debris, sawdust, scraps, etc. and leave spaces clean and all casework ready for
Owner's use.
END OF SECTION 06401
06401-7 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Insulation type 7-Batt and loose insulation.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Insulation type 1 -Division 7,Section"Roofing".
2. Insulation type 3-Section 04150.
3. Insulation type 5-Section 03300.
4. Insulation type 6-Section 08521.
5. Insulation type 8-Section 09250.
6. Insulation type 9-Section 07250.
1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material to the site in unopened packages,with identification labels intact.
B. Store under water resistant cover and protect from weather and direct sunlight.
C. Remove damaged materials from site.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install rigid insulation when temperature is below 40o F., during rain or wet weather, or when surfaces are
wet.
1.05 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation with other trades whose work may be affected or have effect.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Insul 7: Unfaced glass fiber batts conforming to Federal Specification HH-I-521E,Type 1. CertainTeed,Manville,
Owens Corning acceptable.
B. Vapor Barrier: Glass reinforced or laminated polyethylene sheet, minimum perm rating 0.1 when tested in
accordance with ASTM-E96,Procedure A. Fortifiber"Moistop",Rufco SS-300,Glas-Krafat,Inc.acceptable.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape: Compatible polyethylene self adhesive tape recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer.
07210-1 No.99132-CP2
D. Insulation Adhesive: Compatible adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer to secure insulation to
substrate.
E. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners as required to secure insulation to substrate.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Insu17
1. Install snugly between framing members flush with inside face of framing. Correct any voids or depressions.
2. Cut to fit tightly around wall penetrations, blocking, bridging, electrical boxes and conduit, etc. Insure
minimum 1/2 full insulation depth behind or around all items.
3. Stuff loose insulation around door and window frames and other voids and penetrations. Do not allow any
voids or gaps in the insulation envelope.
C. Vapor Barrier
1. Install vapor barrier over inside face of framing at Insulation Type 7. Secure to framing with minimum
penetrations.
2. Provide sufficient material at perimeter to lap over openings,framing,penetrations.
3. Lap and seal at all joints,penetrations and to adjacent surfaces and materials with specified tape.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect insulation from damage until covering materials are installed.
B. Remove accumulations of waste materials,excess insulation and containers and dispose of off site.
END OF SECTION 07210
07210-2 No.99132-CP2
i
SECTION 07240
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Firestopping of openings,joints and penetrations in rated walls and floors.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Firestopping of penetrations for mechanical or electrical equipment-Divisions 15, 16.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Fire Resistive Directory,Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 1989.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: For each firestopping application,provide all materials from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction listed by Underwriters Laboratories for
hourly rating requirements indicated,and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver product in manufacturer's original unopened packages with labels legible,intact.
B. Identify manufacturer,brand name,model,size,finish,location of installation.
C. Store in unopened packages in protected dry,heated area to prevent damage.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data indicating contents of fireproofing products,including information showing that no asbestos is
contained in product.
B. Submit appropriate product literature with UL test numbers for appropriate rating to be achieved.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Systems by 3M are specified. Other manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with appropriate UL
requirements.
07240-1 No.99132-CP2
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials classified by UL to provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. Provide asbestos free materials that comply with applicable codes and have been tested under positive pressure in
accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other
substances that may affect proper fitting,adhesion,or the required fire resistance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL Fire Resistance Directory and in
accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
B. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier.
C. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inches in width and subject to traffic or loading,
install firestopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor.
D. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetration by other trades.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean up spills of liquid components.
B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.
C. Remove equipment,materials and debris,leaving area in undamaged,clean condition.
3.05.SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Construction Condition UL Designation
A. Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Round Opening CAJ 1001,CAJ7001,CAJ 1007,FB 1002,
CAJ 1027,CAJ 1044,CAJ7003,WJ 1010
B. Insulated Metal Pipe Through Round Opening CAJ5001,CAJ5002,CAJ5003,CBJ5002,
CBJ5003,FA1002,FA5001,FA8001,
CAJ5005
07240-2 No.99132-CP2
C. Metal Pipes or Conduits Through Large Opening CAJ1001,CAJ7001,CAJ1002,CAJ1006,
CAJ3005,CAJ5030,CAJ8001,FA1001,
CBJ1015,CBJ1020,CBJ3016,CBJ5004,
CBJ8004,CBJ1021,CBJ3017,CBJ8005,
CAJ 1044,CAJ7003,WJ 1010
D. Busway Through Rectangular Opening FA6001,CAJ6001
E. Cables Through Opening CAJ3001,CAJ3002,FB3002,CAJ3021,
CAJ3030
F. Cable Tray CAJ4011,CAJ4003,FB4002
G. Glass Pipe Through Opening CAJ2006,CAJ2013
H. Blank Opening CAJ001,CAJ002,CAJ004,CBJ007,
CAJO09
I. Non-metallic(Plastic)Pipe or Conduit Through Opening CAJ2001,CAJ2002,CAJ2003,CAJ2004,
CAJ2005,FA2001
J. Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall WL1001,WL1002,W1,1003,WL5001,
WL5002,WL1016
K. Non-metallic(Plastic)Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall WL2002,WL2003,WL2004,
WL2005
L. Cables Through Gypsum Board Wall WL1001,W1,1002,W1,1003,W1,5001,
WL5001
M. Insulated Metal Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall WL3001
N. Glass Pipe Through Gypsum Board Wall WL2006,WL2013
O. Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Wood Construction FC1001,FC1002,FC7001
P. Non-metallic(Plastic)Pipe or Conduit Through Wood Construction FC2001,FC2002
Q. Cables Through Wood Construction FC3001
END OF SECTION 07240
07240-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 07520
BUILT-UP ROOFING
1 PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General
' Requirements,apply to the work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Scope of work includes cutting in and patching of vents,curbs,drains and/or any other miscellaneous work
identified on Architectural,Mechanical or Electrical plans.
B. Provide either asphalt bitumen or cold tar type built-up roofing system,including insulation. Contractor responsible
to determine suitable system to be compatible with existing roofing system.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit roofing contractors letter certifying roof has been inspected and composition of existing roof determined.
B. Submit for approval samples,product data,warranty,test reports,maintenance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver,handle and store materials in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. FM Class I,UL Class A,Class 90 wind uplift.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard signed warranty indicating extent of warranty coverage. Warranty period is 10 years from
date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt system;Johns Manville,Firestone,Tampko.,GAF or approved equal:
1. Slip sheet: 5 lb.rosin-sized paper if recommended by manufacturer.
2. Base ply: 281b.glass fiber base sheet.
3. Ply felts: 2 plies of Type 4 asphalt glass fiber felts.
4. Interply bitumen: Roofing asphalt,ASTM D 312,type as required by slope.
5. Deck primer at concrete deck.
1 B. Coal-Tar System;Koppers,Allied Signal or approved equal.
1. Slip sheet: 5 lb.rosin-sized paper if recommend by manufacturer.
2. Base ply: 1 ply coated base sheet.
07520-1 No.99132-CP2
3. Ply felts: 3 plies coated ply sheet.
4. Interply bitumen: Coal Tar Pitch,ASTM D 450-78,type as required by slope.
5. Deck primer at concrete deck.
6. Tape: Fiberglass roof tape.
7. Temperature limitations:
a. Maximum 400°F.
b. Minimum 300°F.
C. Recommended 375°F. (350°F max.in kettle storage)
8. Envelopes as required.
9. Follow precautions contained in NIOSH Publication DREW 78-107.
C. Aggregate: Clean,smooth river gravel,ASTM D 1863.
D. Insulation: Rigid glass fiber boards with integrally bonded top covering of saturated felt or Kraft paper.
E. Walkway protection boards(if required): Mineral surfaced bituminous composition boards;Carey-Tread by r
Celotex Corp.or approved equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Inspect substrate and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrate.
Coordinate installation with other trades,including carpentry,flashing and penetrating work.
B. Comply with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Clean,prime and prepare substrate.
D. Install insulation in one layer with tightly butted joints and neatly fitted around penetrations.
E. Install walkway protection membrane at locations indicated and where required to provide access to roof mounted
equipment.
F. Restore or replace damaged components. Protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION 07520
r
r
r
07520-2 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS AND CAULKING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: All caulking,sealants,and related accessories for:
1. Interior and exterior joints in masonry.
2. Interior and exterior joints around hollow metal.
3. Joints in slabs and at edges where painted,exposed or sealed concrete is shown on Drawings.
4. Sealant at resilient flooring wall joint where vinyl base is not scheduled.
5. Joint between top of masonry,gypsum board,and plaster walls and structure.
6. Miscellaneous joints where"sealant"or"caulk"is indicated on Drawings.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Sealant for firestopping—Section 07240.
2. Caulking around windows storefront and curtainwall-Section 08521.
3. Glazing-Section 08800.
4. Acoustical sealant-Section 09250.
5. Sealing at plumbing fixtures and mechanical penetrations through rated walls-Division 15.
6. Sealing of electrical penetrations through rated walls-Division 16.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Color Samples: Submit actual samples of color range of material for Architect's selection, or samples of custom
color matches for Architect's acceptance.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendation: Submit technical data including performance requirements, recommendations
and application instructions to the Architect for approval of materials used.
07900-1 No.99132-CP2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANT,ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant: Two-part polyurethane, Tremco Dymeric, Pecora Dynatrol H. (Pecora GC-5 Synthacalk) or Sonneborn
"Sonolastic NP2"and SIK.A SIKAFLEX 2-C are acceptable.
Colors: As selected from manufacturer standard colors.
B. Horizontal Joint Sealant: Two-part self-levelling polyurethane, similar to Tremco THC/900, Pecora NR-200
Urethane or Sonnebom"Sonolastic SL2"and SIKH SIKAFLEX 2-CSL.
C. Expansion Joint Gasket, for joints larger than 3/4": Evazote 50 E.S.P. by E-Poxy Industries, Inc. with
manufacturer's recommended primer and adhesive.
D. Primer- When required,as recommended by the Sealant Manufacturer.
E. Caulking Back-up: Round bars of Ethafoam,Polycel,compatible with sealant.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Inspect joints for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerance, and other conditions
affecting joint sealant performance. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
B. Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants, in accordance with joint sealant manufacturer's
recommendations and the following requirements:
1. Remove from joint substrates foreign material which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including
paints other than permanent protective coating tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by
sealant manufacturer,oil,grease,waterproofing,water repellants,water dirt,and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrates using approved methods such as brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, and acid washing as appropriate, or a combination of these methods, to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal and other nonporous substrates by using chemical cleaners or other means that neither are harmful
to substrates nor leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer. Apply
primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to area of joint sealer bond;
do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces; remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing seal.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
07900-2 No.99132-CP2
B. Installation of Sealant Backings:
1. Install joint filler to provide support of sealant during application and at position required to produce the
cross-sectional shape and depth of installed sealant relative to joint width that allows optimum sealant
movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear joint fillers.
C. Remove fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry materials.
C. Installation of Sealant:
1. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in direct contact with and full wetting of joint substrates by
joint sealant, completely filling recesses provided and providing uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths
relative to joint widths.
2. Immediately after sealant application and prior to the skinning or curing begins,tool sealants to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents
which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or which are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect joint sealers, during and after curing, from contamination or damage. Cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated sealers and replace with new materials.
B. Clean excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 07900
07900-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 08100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. All hollow metal doors,door frames and borrowed light frames.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Grouting of frames,anchors-Section 04200.
2. Finish hardware Section 08700.
3. Glazing:Section 08800.
4. Painting-Section 09900.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with the SDI Standard 100-"Recommended Specifications Standard Steel
Doors and Frames"and as herein specified.
B. Obtain hardware templates from hardware supplier (Section 08700) and obtain necessary hardware for factory
application.
C. Where noted on Door Schedule,provide nationally recognized testing agency label of proper classification. Label
requirements take precedence over conflicting details.Advise the Architect of any conflict before fabricating work
on that item is started.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete working drawings showing all features of construction and anchorage, locations and details of
field splices. Coordinate with any special conditions of anchorage. Submit door schedule on shop drawings
indicating relationship of door,number of room, number and function of door, such as Corridor A-13 to Lavatory
A-14.
B. Submit documentation for UL 10C or other approved testing agency stating doors have passed UBC Standard 7-2.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
1.05 PRODUCT PROTECTION
A. Deliver doors and frames in suitable crating or packaging to prevent damage in transit and storage.
08100-1 No.99132-CP2
B. At job site,store doors under cover in a dry area with doors set upright with 1/4 inch spacers between doors. Keep ,
doors at least 4"above ground.Remove all wet cardboard or similar wrappings immediately.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturer(s): Steelcraft,Pioneer,Ceco,Curries,Amweld.
B. Accompany any request for acceptance of alternative manufacturers by descriptive details or brochures
demonstrating compliance with specifications,and sample frame corner.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Commercial quality, level, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A366, free of scale and surface defects.
Commercial quality hot rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM A569 may be used at contractor's option for
interior frames. Where noted, form frames of galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A526 or A527, A90 zinc
coating.Gauges are as follows unless otherwise noted:
1. Interior Frames: 16 gauge. ,
2. Exterior Frames: 14 gauge,galvanized.
3. Flush Doors: 16 gauge galvanized(exterior), 18 gauge(interior). '
4. Rough Bucks and Stiffeners: 12 gauge.
5. Miscellaneous Trim 16 gauge.
B. Rust-Inhibitive Primer
1. Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive baked-on primer. Provide additional primer for touch-up.
2. Pretreat galvanized metal in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Stainless Steel: Type 316B stainless with a#4 satin finish
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Make hardware mortises and reinforcements according to templates. Provide hinge, lock, door holder and closer
hardware reinforcements. Mortise, drill tap for hardware; fabricate grooves, rabbets as necessary for
weatherstripping,soundstripping.
B. Fabricate doors to a maximum tolerance of 1/16 inch from a straight edge when laid on face of door in any
direction,including diagonal.
C. Attach proper testing agency's labels as indicated on the Drawings. Provide equal labeled frames for labeled doors.
Frames with glazing in rated walls must conform to UBC Standard 7.4 (hose stream test). Provide intumescent fire
and smoke material for fire rated openings as required by door and frame manufacturer to comply with UL 10C,
UBC Test 7-2.
D. Clearances: Edge clearances shall be provided as follows:
1. Between doors and frame,at head and jambs-1/8"
08100-2 No.99132-CP2
2. At door sills: where no threshold is used - 5/8"maximum to finish floor surface
where threshold is used - 1/4"maximum between door and threshold
where required for hardware operation - as recommended by hardware manufacturer
3. Between meeting edges of pairs of doors- 1/8"
2.04 METAL FRAMES
A. Provide custom metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or schedules and complying with SDI
100 for materials and construction requirements.
B. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, as shown on the
drawings. Provide thermally broken frames at exterior wall.
C. Miter comers on face of all frames, internally weld face and grind smooth exterior. Die coped frames at mullions
and stops. Provide with floor anchors.
D. Provide one removable and one fixed stop at perimeter of openings for glazed frames. Removable stop on secure
side.
' E. Provide closed metal covers over all hardware cutouts to protect against mortar.
F. Provide integral channel frames, subframes and stiffeners to structure where indicated or required for fastening and
stiffening frames.
G. In masonry walls,provide three(3)- 16 gauge corrugated, adjustable, slip type standard frame anchors up to 7'-6"
height jamb;frames T-6"to 8'-0"-4 anchors;frames over 8'-0"- 1 anchor for each 2'or fraction thereof in height.
' In labeled frames,anchors shall be non-removable.
H. Provide steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of both jambs for welded frames.
I. Provide three factory installed silencers on single door frames at strike jamb; four(two at each head) silencers on
double door frames.
J. Hinge reinforcements to have 10 gauge straps welded directly above and below each hinge pocket.
2.05 FLUSH HOLLOW METAL DOOR
A. Provide custom metal doors for the types and styles indicated on the Drawings or schedules and complying with
SDI 100 for materials and construction requirements. Fully insulate exterior doors.
B. Close top and bottom edges of all doors with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 ga., full width
spot welded to both faces. Provide an additional flush closing channel at top edge for exterior doors. Provide
openings to bottom closure of exterior door to permit escape of moisture.
IC. Edge profiles to be 1/8"bevel in 2".
D. Provide glass light openings as indicated complete with one fixed stop and one removable stop fastened with flat
head phillips screws not over 10 inches o.c.
E. For 60 minute and greater rated doors installed in enclosed stairways,conform to maximum transmitted temperature
end point of 450°as specified in UBC Standard No.43-2.
F. All doors to have minimum 16 gauge lock reinforcement and either continuous 14 gauge hinge rail or minimum 8
gauge plate hinge reinforcement.
i
' 08100-3 No.99132-CP2
G. All faced edge seams to be continuously wire welded,finished smooth.
2.06 HARDWARE LOCATION
A. Prepare for hardware at mounting heights and locations as recommended by the Builder's Hardware Manufacturing
Association.
2.07 SHOP PAINTING
A. Completely clean all frames by degreasing process,followed by one coat rust inhibitive primer equal to a salt spray
test(5% solution) of 70 hours. Thoroughly prime all surfaces without runs, smears, or bare spots, and under and
inside all removable stops.
B. Completely clean all doors of impurities and pressure sand to a smooth surface and correct all irregularities with
metallic putty sanded smooth. Provide one(1)spray coat of primer,baked on. Thoroughly paint unexposed inside
surfaces of exterior doors,fire doors,and other doors occurring in excessive moisture area.
C. Provide vinyl wash pre-treatment of galvanized steel as recommended by shop primer manufacturer.
D. Provide one(1)quart minimum of primer for field touch up of splices,connections,welds and abrasions.
2.08 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING HOLLOW METAL ,
A. Where modifications to existing doors or frames are required to accept new doors or hardware, neatly make
modifications in field per hardware templates. Provide flush metal blank off plates, welded in place, ground
smooth,filled with body putty,where existing hardware is removed. Or,provide new door or frame conforming to
project requirements.
PART 3: EXECUTION ,
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten Work in place,without twists, warps,bulges or other unsatisfactory defacing of workmanship. Set
plumb,level square to proper elevation true to line and eye. Set clips and other anchors with piston driven fasteners
equal to Ramset or drilled-in anchors as approved. Fasten units and trim together with neat, uniform and tight
joints.
B. As masonry is being laid fill jambs solid with mortar and provide accurately cut wood spreaders temporarily at mid-
section of fiames,install jamb anchors.
C. At steel columns and/or concrete surfaces,install sub-frame or rough bucks as specified. At steel columns use 5/16"
diameter self-tapping metal screws and at concrete use expansion bolts of the same diameter. Install frame to sub-
frame and/or rough buck with countersunk self-tapping metal screws. Fill screw holes with a suitable metallic filler,
sand,and prime.
D. Where field installed hardware is required,provide wood or other suitable filler to avoid drilling and tapping into
mortar inside frames.
E. For all attachments including removable stops, use flat head self-tapping screws. Drill and tap in the field for
surface mounted closers, brackets, rim exit devices, door holders, and other surface hardware. At horizontal
exterior surfaces, set screws with neoprene gaskets or set with caulking compound under screw head and wipe
clean.
F. All field splices to be welded and filled with body putty and ground smooth, no exposed screw heads will be
accepted. Locate splices where shown on final reviewed shop drawings.
081004 No.99132-CP2 '
G. Touch up field splices,connections,welds and abrasions with specified primer after installation.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed hollow metal work against damage from other construction.
B. Repair or replace all damaged work at no extra cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION 08100
r
08100-5 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 08200
WOOD DOORS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work or this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Solid core flush wood doors.
2. Factory finishing of wood doors.
3. Factory preparation for hardware(premachining).
' 4. Glazing stops and preparation of doors to receive glazing.
B. Related sections:
1. Metal door frames: Section 08100.
2. Finish hardware: Section 08700.
3. Glazing: Section 08800.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program; Architectural
Woodwork Institute(AWI)7th Edition Version 1.0; 1997.
B. National Wood Window and Door(NWWDA)Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97.
C. NFPA 80-1997 Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. National Fire Protection Association; 1997.
D. American National Standards Institute(ANSI)A115.W Series.
E. ASTM E 152-81 a—Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1981.
F. How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install and Maintain Wood Doors; National Wood Window and Door Association
(NWWDA);undated.
G. Uniform Building Code(UBC)Current Edition
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data for each type of wood door, including details of core and
edge construction,and trim for openings.
08200-1 No.99132-CP2
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating the following:
1. Location and size of each door.
2. Elevation of each kind of door.
3. Details of construction.
4. Location and extent of hardware blocking.
5. Fire ratings.
6. Requirements for factory finishing.
7. Documentation for UL l OC or other approved testing agency stating doors have passed UBC Standard 7-2. ,
C. Samples: Submit samples for the following:
1. Beads for glazed openings: Submit 6-inch-long sections of glazing beads for each material, type, and finish
required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Quality Standards: Provide flush doors complying with the following standards:
1. AWI quality standards: Section 1300, "Architectural Flush Doors", of "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program, " published by Architectural Woodwork
Institute(AWI).
2. AWI standard for factory finishing: Section 1500, "Factory Finishing," of"Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program," published by Architectural Woodwork
Institute(AWI).
B. AWI Quality Certification: Have fabricated doors inspected in accordance with AWI "Architectural Quality
Certification Program." Submit Inspection Service Report to the Architect. On-site inspection is not required.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors:
1. Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame
assemblies per ASTM E 152.
2. Acceptable testing and inspection agencies include: ,
a. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc:
b. Warnock Hersey International,Inc.
D. Manufacturer: Member of AWI and NWWDA.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood doors during transit,storage,and handling to prevent damage,soiling and deterioration. Comply with
requirements of referenced standard and recommendations of NWWDA I.S. 1, Appendix, "How to Store, Handle,
Finish,Install,and Maintain Wood Doors,"as well as with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Package doors at factory prior to shipping,using manufacturer's standard method.
08200-2 No.99132-CP2
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers using temporary,removable,or concealed markings.
1. Correlate door identification with designation system used on shop drawings.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by
manufacturer, installer, and contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which warp (bow, cup, or
twist), which show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or which do not conform to tolerance
limitations of specified quality standards. This warranty shall be in addition to,and not a limitation of, other rights
the Owner may have against the contractor under the contract documents.
1. Include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was
not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of substantial completion:
a. Solid core flush interior doors: Life of installation.
3. Submit per Section 01730.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
' 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made by one of the following:
a. Algoma Hardwoods,Inc.
b. Weyerhaeuser Company.
c. Eggers Industries.
B. Flush Doors: comply with requirements of AWI Section 1300.
C. Fire Rated Doors:
1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction in accordance with testing agency requirements for
fire rating indicated,and as specified herein.
2. Edges: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge(stile)construction for use with mortise hinges and for
indicated fire resistance ratings.
3. Labels: Permanently affixed to hinge stile.
2.02 SOLID CORE WOOD FACED DOORS
A. Solid Core Door(non-rated):
1. AWI Type: PC-5;Custom Grade A.
2. Application: Non-rated interior door.
S
' 08200-3 No.99132-CP2
i
3. Faces:
a. Species: Red oak
b. Cut: Plain sliced.
4. Adhesives: Type 1,Hot Plate process-waterproof.
5. Construction: 5-ply. '
6. Core: Particleboard or structural composite lumber.
B. Solid Core Door(rated):
1. AWI Type: FD
2. Application: Labeled fire door.
3. Faces: Same as non-rated door. ,
4. Core: High density mineral core laminated to both sides of 3/4"fire retardant plywood.
5. Reinforcing for Hardware: Fire retardant treated top rail and lockblocks for secure anchorage of hardware, i
without thm bolts as noted in NWWDA I.S.I-A- 1997.
6. For 60 minute and greater rated doors installed in enclosed stairways, conform to maximum transmitted
temperature end point of 450°as specified in UBC Standard No.43-2.
7. Provide factory primed rated astragals or metal edges as required by listing agency. '
8. Provide intumescent fire and smoke material for fire rated openings as required by door and frame
manufacturer to comply with UL l OC,UBC Test 7-2.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Beads:
1. Non-rated and 20 min. rated doors: Fabricate glazing beads from solid stock fire-retardant treated wood of
species to match door face veneers. Finish to match door. Provide concealed metal glazing clips and fasteners
as required to meet requirements for a 20 minute fire rating.
2. Rated fire doors: Install nationally recognized agency listed, prime painted, vision frame with concealed
fasteners one side, countersunk tamper-proof fasteners other side, mitered and welded comers, Anemostat '
BFL-123 or equivalent product by other manufacturer. Provide for glass thicknesses as scheduled.
3. Add solid wood lock blocks at doors with flush cup pulls.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Openings: Cut,trim,and seal openings in doors at the factory. '
B. Prefitting: Fabricate and trim doors to size at factory to conform to hollow metal frames as shown on approved
frame shop drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish schedule.
C. Premachining: Make all mortises and cutouts required for hardware at the factory to conform to approved hardware
schedules,hardware templates,and door frame shop drawings.
1
08200-4 No.99132-CP2
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: comply with applicable requirements of AWI Quality Standards, Section 1500,for types of finish systems
indicated.
B. Transparent Finish:
' 1. Type: Factory finish to be water-based stain and ultraviolet(UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply with
EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Finish must meet or
exceed performance standards of AWI TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
2. Stain color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
3. Grain effect: Closed.
4. Sheen: Satin(low luster).
' 5. Grade: Premium.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
' A. Require installer to examine door frames after their installation, and doors prior to their hanging, for the following
purposes:
1. To verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics.
and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. To verify that doors are free of defects.
B. Obtain installer's written report listing conditions detrimental to compliance with requirements of this section.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
B. Hardware Installation: Section 08700.
C. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced standards.
1. Installation of the wood doors,and labeled wood doors shall comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, Installation and
NFPA 80.
2. Dimensional tolerances for hardware cutouts, undercuts, meeting edges, heights and width shall comply with
NWWDA I.S.1-A,G-14.
D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as
required for fit and uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Shop-Finished Doors: Restore finish on edges of shop-finished doors before installation, if fitting or machining is
required at the project site. Touch up any scratched doors to satisfaction of Architect prior to substantial
completion or replace doors.
08200-5 No.99132-CP2
3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT '
A. Replace doors that are warped,twisted,show through or not true in plane and that do not follow the warranty.
B. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely,as directed by the Architect.
C. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation,as directed by the Architect.
D. Institute protective measures as recommended and accepted by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be
without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 08200
r
08200-6 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 08305
ACCESS PANELS
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
' A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
' 1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Wall and ceiling access panels as noted on Drawings and specified herein.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
' 1. Openings in masonry-Section 04200.
2. Openings in gypsum board-Section 09250.
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
' 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
' A. Package,handle,deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Nystrom Products is specified, with comparable units by Milcor, Inc., Karp Associates, JL Industries and Cesco
Products acceptable.
2.02 UNITS
A. Access Panel#1 (AP#1): Flush mounted wall access panel model APNW(cam latch),(16"x 24"door)for drywall
with camlatch.
PART 3: EXECUTION
' 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that openings are correctly dimensioned to receive doors.
B. Verify proper rating on fire rated panel.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's current printed recommendations, in locations indicated on architectural
reflected ceiling plans and architectural floor plans.
08305-1 No.99132-CP2
B. Coordinate exact locations to access mechanical/electrical equipment. ,
C. Attach double layer of gypsum board to recessed ceiling panels in gypsum board ceilings and a single layer of ,
gypsum board and a layer of acoustical tile in areas with acoustical tile glued to gypsum board.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust latching mechanism to operate smoothly.
B. Leave work area clean and free of debris.
END OF SECTION 08305
08305-2 No.99132-CP2 '
SECTION 08521
ALUMINUM WINDOWS,STOREFRONT/ENTRANCES AND CURTAINWALL
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
' A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
' 1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum storefront noted"SF-#"on drawings.
' 2. Glass
3. Joint sealants in contact with aluminum components.
' 4. Sealing of the cavity wall at openings in exterior wall.
B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section:
1. Finish hardware-Section 08700.
C. Related Sections:
1. Finish hardware-Section 08700.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NAAMM-Metal Finishes Manual,3rd ed.,Jan. 1976.
B. AAMA 501-83-Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls.
C. AAMA 603.8-85 -Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on
' Extruded Aluminum.
D. AAMA 605.2-85-Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels.
E. AAMA 1502.7-1981 -Voluntary Test Method for Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall
Sections.
F. AAMA 1503.1-1980 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall
Sections.
G. AAMA 606.1-76-Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
' H. AAMA 607.1-77 - Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
08521-1 No.99132-CP2
I. AAMA 608.1-77: Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color '
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
J. ASTM E 283-84— Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls, and
Doors; 1984.
K. ASTM E330-84 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1984. '
L. ASTM E331-86—Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1986. ,
M. ASTM C 509-84—Specification for Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material.
N. ASTM D 3656-89 — Specification for Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass Fiber ,
Yam.
O. ASTM E 783-84—Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors. '
P. ASTM E 1105-86 — Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls,and Doors by Uniform Cyclic Static Pressure Difference. '
Q. ASTM F 588-85—Test Method for Resistance of Window Assemblies to Forced Entry Excluding Glazing.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS '
A. Exterior Assemblies: Design and fabricate to comply with the performance characteristics listed below.
B. Thermal Movement: Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 degrees '
F(49 degrees Q.
C. Wind Loading: Provide capacity to withstand the following loadings without deformation and without deflection '
greater than 1/175 of span:
1. Uniform pressure of 20 psf inward. '
2. Uniform pressure of 20 psf outward.
D. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break" construction, provide units tested for ,
thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less
than: 45 for single and double hung and 50 for all others.
E. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U-valve of not more than 0.65 BTU/(hr.x sq. ,
ft.x deg.F)at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.
F. Air Infiltration Rate
1. Fixed windows/storefront/entrance curtainwall not be more than 0.06 cfin per sq. ft. of window area for an
inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf per sq.ft.,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. ,
G. Water Penetration: There will be not water penetration,as defined in ASTM E 331,when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure of 10.00(6.24 for storefront)lb per sq.ft. ,
08521-2 No.99132-CP2 ,
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submitted for approval by Architect, prior to fabrication. Indicate installation details, materials
used,quantity and size required. Refer to Submittals Section to submittal requirements.
B. Samples:
' 1. Color: One(1) 12 inch extrusions with specified finish,properly labeled.
2. Glass: One(1) 12 inch square samples of each glass type indicated,properly labeled.
' C. Letter from manufacturer approving contractor to install windows.
D. Test reports showing compliance with performance requirements.
E. Warranty: Submit per Section 1730.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Check actual unit opening by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of work.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Manufacturer to be fully responsible for engineering fabrication and overseeing installation to insure a weathertight
installation.
' B. Installer Qualifications: Authorized representative of the manufacturer,with not less than five(5)years experience
in the fabrication and installation of products similar to those specified under this Section.
C. Warranty:
1. Fabricated products: Manufacturer to provide written warranty agreeing to repair or replace product that fail
in materials or factory workmanship within ten(10)years from the date of Substantial Completion.
2. Glass: Provide written warranty of thermal and physical integrity of insulating glass units for ten (10)years
from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following manufacturers/products are approved as noted below with the understanding they will meet the actual
products specified.
Manufacturer Windows Storefront/Entrances Curtainwall
Arch-Amarlite ■ ■
CMI ■ ■
Empirehouse ■
' EFCO ■ ■ ■
Moduline ■ ■
Tubecraft ■
Tubelite ■ ■
' Wausau ■ ■ ■
' 08521-3 No.99132-CP2
2.02 MATERIALS-GENERAL '
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and
application of required finish;ASTM B 221 for extrusions,ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate. '
B. Fasteners: Aluminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel,or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive
and compatible with aluminum components.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. '
2. Exposed fasteners: Match finish of members and hardware being fastened. ,
C. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel,26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.062 inch minimum; or
an alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.
D. Exposed Flashing,Sills: .125 inch minimum shop formed aluminum sheet,finish to match window framing. '
E. Column covers and panels: .090 inch minimum shop formed aluminum sheet,backed with rigid closed cell urethane '
foam laminated with waterproof adhesive,finish to match window framing and be applied after shapes are formed.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or '
hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron,malleable iron,or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
H. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic,zinc chromate paint,or other nonconductive,nonabsorbent
material.
I. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C 864;style as recommended by manufacturer. '
J. Glass and Glazing Accessories: Provide products specified Section 08800.
K. Plastic flashing:20 mil thickness polyvinyl chloride sheet,black in color,with manufacturer's recommended sealant '
and mastic.
L. Joint sealants:conform to requirements of Section 07900. 1
Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule, Sections 14 of Details of Construction.
M. Door Weatherstrip: Silicon treated plastic pile. '
2.03 FINISH
A. See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Section 14 of Details of Construction. '
2.04 ENTRANCE DOORS/STOREFRONT '
A. Model: Empirehouse Magnum 'EM' Heavywall Door and Frame, Tubecraft Monumental Door and 1400 Series
Framing or EFCO D518 Door and Frame.
1. Stile: Width to accept panic hardware without overhanging stile. (Typically 5"minimum.) '
2. Door Thickness: 3/16",Frame Thickness: 1/8"
3. Frame Jamb(hinge&latch)Reinforcing: Continuous full height 1"x 1'/4"x 3/16"steel angle. '
4. Door(hinge stile)Reinforcing: Continuous full height 1'/<x'/4"steel bar stock.
08521-4 No.99132-CP2 '
' 2.05 GLASS
A. Provide products specified in Section 08800.
B. Conform to requirements of Section 08800.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with maximum and minimum dimensions required to
achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. Field verify all opening dimensions.
' B. Fabrication: To greatest extent possible,complete fabrication assembly,and finishing at manufacturers plant before
shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
' 1. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles,with hairline fit of contacting members.
2. Select members for fabrication so that adjacent anodized extruded aluminum members do not have color or
' texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the submitted samples.
3. Factory-install all hardware except surface-mounted items.
4. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work, in
manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.
' a. For hardware,perform these operations prior to application of finishes.
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore
mechanical finish.
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag
resistance,and rigidity;separate dissimilar metals as specified under"Installation."
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify and coordinate installation tolerances.
B. Verify that openings are properly prepared,with blocking installed and cavities sealed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of components.
' B. Install plastic flashing under all sills and sill flashing. Turn up at ends to form end dams. Set in full bed of mastic,
lap flashing 4"minimum and seal. Secure to wall with keeper strip.
' C. Set units plumb,level,and true to line,without warp or rack. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
D. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities
using one of the materials specified. Aluminum,stainless steel,zinc,cadmium,and small areas of white bronze are
not considered dissimilar from each other.
E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials
' specified.
08521-5 No.99132-CP2
F. Install surface-mounted hardware items, complying with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template ,
requirements.
G. Install joint sealers between framing and adjacent surfaces as indicated, to provide weathertight construction.
Comply with requirements of Section 07900 for installation of joint sealers.
H. Install glass as specified in Section 08800 and according to the framing manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Install aluminum panels and flashing as shown on Drawings.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN '
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly without binding,and to close doors tightly.
B. Clean completed systems inside and out,promptly after erection and after installation of glass and sealants,taking '
care to avoid damage to finishes. Remove excess sealants,dirt,and other substances from aluminum surfaces.
C. Clean glass surfaces as specified elsewhere. ,
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Window Testing
1. The Owner will employ an independent testing agent to perform testing as follows:
a. Windows to be field tested in accordance with AAMA 502-90, "Voluntary Specification for Field
Testing of Windows and Sliding Glass Doors",using Testing Method A.
b. Immediately test the first window installed and two additional windows after the completion of the '
project. Architect will identify locations.
C. Air infiltration tests to be conducted at a uniform static test pressure of 6.24 psf. The maximum '
allowable rate of air leakage will not exceed.15 cfin per foot of sash crack length.
d. Water penetration tests to be conducted at a static test pressure of 8 psf. '
e. For each test that fails,the Architect/Testing Agent will select two additional windows to be tested. All
unsuccessful tests, both original and retest as well as additional windows to be tested due to an
unsuccessful test will be paid by the Contractor by deduct change order.
END OF SECTION 08521 ,
08521-6 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
' A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the famishing of butt hinges and the furnishing and installing of all finish hardware material
' specified herein,listed in the hardware schedule,or required by the Drawings.
B. Cylinders for access panel doors as required by Section 08305.
C. Items of hardware include:
1. Finish hardware
2. Thresholds and weatherstrip
' 1.03 RELATED WORK SPEC114UD ELSEWHERE
A. Section 06400-Cabinet Hardware.
' B. Section 08100-Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
C. Section 08200-Wood Doors and Frames.
' D. Division 16-Electromagnetic Holders.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Builders'Hardware Manufacturers Assoc.,Inc.(BHMA),60 E.42nd St.,New York,NY 10017.
1. Recommended locations for builders'hardware.
B. American National Standards Institute,Inc.(ANSI), 1430 Broadway,New York,NY 10018.
1. Al 15.2 -Specifications for standard steel door and frame preparations for bored cylindrical locks for 1-3/8"
and 1-3/4"doors.
' C. National Fire Protection Association,Inc.(NFPA),Battery March Park,Quincy,MA 02269.
1. NFPA 80-Standard for fire doors and windows.
' 2. NFPA 101 -Code for safety to life from fire in buildings and structures.
D. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL),333 Pfingsten Road,Northbrook,IL 60062.
1. Building Materials Directory.
08700-1 No.99132CP-2
E. Builders'Hardware Manufacturers Assoc.,Inc.(BFE A),60 E.42nd Street,New York,NY 10017. '
1. Recommended locations for builders'hardware.
F. Uniform Building Code(UBC), 1997 Edition.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Except where specified in the hardware schedule, finnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of '
hardware.
B. Supplier: Company specializing in the builders'hardware industry. ,
C. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming to UBC Standard 7-2. '
D. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming in compliance with NFPA 80 1995 Edition.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ,
A. Furnish hardware listed by UL testing agency for all rated openings in conformance with requirements for the class
of opening scheduled.
B. Rating requirements have precedence over this specification where conflict exists.
C. Furnish hardware that is in compliance with American with Disabilities Act of 1990(ADA)technical standards. '
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Schedules
1. Immediately after award of the hardware contract, submit a detailed,vertical type hardware schedule and cut '
sheets for each type of hardware for approval. If schedule is submitted larger than 11x17, submit on
reproducible (vellum). On existing buildings field verify existing swings and functions prior to submitting '
schedule.
2. Itemize hardware in the sequence and format established by this specification. ,
a. List and describe each opening separately;include door number,room designations,degree of swing,and
hand.
b. List related details; include dimensions, door and frame material, and other conditions affecting '
hardware.
C. List all hardware items; include manufacturer's name, quantity, product name, catalog number, size, ,
finish,attachments,and related details where applicable.
3. Submit manufactures cut sheets on each type of hardware proposed.
4. Resubmit the corrected schedule when required.
08700-2 No.99132CP-2 '
' C. Samples: Submit samples of hardware items as may be required by the Architect;identify each sample and indicate
the location of subsequent installation in the project.
' D. Templates: Furnish a copy of the approved hardware schedule and all pertinent templates or template information
to each fabricator of material factory-prepared for the installation of hardware.
E. Include documentation for UL 10C or other approved testing agency stating hardware has passed UBC Standard
7-2.
1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver hardware to the job site in the manufacturer's original containers that have been marked to correspond with
the approved hardware schedule for installation location.
' B. Store hardware in dry surroundings and protect against loss and damage.
' PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/MATERIALS
A. Butt Hinges
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Hager Stanley McKinney Bommer
a. 1279 F179 T2714 5000
' b. BB 1279 FBB 179 TB2714 BB5000
C. BB 1191 FBB 191 TB2314 BB5002
d. BB 1168 FBB168 T4B3786 BB5004
e. BB 1199 FBB199 T4B3386 BB5006
2. Furnish butt hinges for each door leaf as follows:
a. Quantity: Two (2) hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high. Three (3) hinges per leaf for
exterior hollow metal openings through 60 inches high.
' b. One(1)additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof.
C. One(1)additional hinge per leaf for doors over 36"in width.
' d. Weight and Type:
1) Standard weight,plain bearing hinge 1279;interior openings through 36 inches wide without a door
closer.
2) Standard weight,ball bearing hinge BB1279;
a) Interior openings over 36 through 40 inches wide.
b) Interior openings through 40 inches wide with a door closer.
3) Heavyweight,four-ball-bearing hinge BB 1168;
a) Interior openings over 40 inches wide.
b) Public vestibule openings at exterior doors.
' 4) Heavyweight,four-ball-bearing hinge BB 1199 x NRP;
a) Exterior outswing public entrance openings.
b) Exterior outswing non-public entrance openings.
' e. Size: 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"for 1-3/4"thick doors.
' 08700-3 No.99132CP-2
B. Continuous Hinges '
1. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Markar Stanley '
300 Series 600 Series
2. Continuous hinges shall be full height pin and barrel type hinge providing full height door support up to 600
pounds. Edge mount(unless noted otherwise). '
3. Hinges shall be constructed of heavy-duty 14 gauge material. The stainless internal pin shall have a diameter
of.25 and the exterior barrel diameter of.438. '
4. Hinge shall be non-handed with symmetrical templated hole pattern and factory drilled. Hinge must accept a
minimum of 21 fasteners on the door and 21 fasteners on the frame. '
5. Each knuckle to be 2",including split nylon bearing at each separation for quiet,smooth,self-lubricating
operation.
6. Hinge to be able to carry Warnock Hersey Int.or UL for fire rated doors and frames up to three hours. Note: '
Fire label for doors and frames should be placed on the header and top rail of rated doors and frames.
C. Flush Bolts and Dustproof Strikes
1. Manufactuers and respective catalog numbers:
Ives Door Controls Glynn-Johnson li
a. 489 80 DP-1 1226
b. 559 842NH FB31P — '
C. 556 942NH F1341P —
d. 458 ---- FB6 1358
2. Non-labeled openings: Furnish two flush bolts 458 for the inactive leaf of pairs of locked or latched doors. '
Locate centerline of the top bolt not more than 78" from the finished floor. Furnish dustproof strike 489 for
the bottom bolt.
3. Labeled openings: Furnish automatic flush bolt set 559 or 556, as applicable,for the inactive leaf of pairs of '
doors;fiunish dustproof strike 489 for the bottom bolt.
D. Exit Devices '
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Von Duprin No substitutions ,
99
2. Furnish exit device series and functions specified in the hardware schedule.
3. Furnish sex bolt attachments for devices specified for mineral core door application.
4. Furnish reinforced cross bars for door over 40"wide.
5. Furnish rod guards on all surface mounted vertical rod exit device,on bottom rods. ,
6. Lever Design: Von Duprin 03;Yale CR;Precision Hardware 9LC;Corbin-Russwin LUSTRA,Sargent LNJ.
7. Removable mullion: KR4954/KR1654. Provide with cylinder to match building system '
087004 No.99132CP-2 '
E. Locks
I. Locksets to be supplied and installed by Owner.
2. Lever handles must be cast brass,bronze or stainless steel construction and conform to ASNI Al 17.1.
R Pulls,Push Plates/Bars
' 1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
OualitX Hiawatha Brookline Burns
a. 163 18"c-c 518B-18"c-c 807-18"c-c 26C-18"c-c
b. 40 8x16 200K 69 57
'
C. 40 4x16 200F 54 54
d. 473 1081LBP 220B LBP 422
2. Where pulls,push plates,push bars or push-pulls are listed in the hardware schedule,furnish:
a. Pull 16318"
b. Push plate 40 8x16: Flush doors.
C. Push plate 40 4x16: Doors with 6"stiles.
d. Push bar 473.
G. Coordinators
' 1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Ives Door Control Glynn-Johnson
900 600 COR
2. Furnish a 900 series coordinator for labeled pairs of doors equipped with automatic flush bolts or vertical rod-
mortise lock fire exit device combinations with astragals.
3. Furnish filler bars for total opening width,closer mounting brackets,carry bars,and special preparation for top
' latches where applicable.
H. Closers
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
LCN No Substitutions
' 4011 Series
4111 EDA Series
2. Where closers are listed in the hardware schedule,furnish 4111,PR7500,PR440,350 PED series unless other
fimctions/series are specified in the hardware groups.
3. Furnish complete with all mounting brackets,drop plates and special shoes as may be required by the door and
' frame conditions.
4. Furnish through bolt attachments for closers specified for mineral core doors, unless solid wood blocking is
provided for attachment.
' 08700-5 No.99132CP-2
5. Determine closer size in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for application on the room side of '
corridor doors,stair side of stair doors,and interior side of exterior doors.
I. Kick Plates: Where kick plates are specified in the hardware schedule, furnish 16 gauge, .050" plates, with the '
following dimensions:
1. Width: 2"less than door width.
2. Height: 8"(unless noted different on door schedule.) '
J. Overhead Stops '
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Glynn-Johnson Rixson-Firemark '
a. GJ450 10
b. GJ80 8
2. Furnish a GJ450 series overhead stop for all doors equipped with regular arm surface type closers that swing
more than 140 degrees before striking a wall and for all doors that open against equipment, casework,
sidelights,or other objects that would make wall bumpers inappropriate. '
3. Furnish a GJ80 series overhead holder where listed in the Hardware Schedule.
4. Furnish sex bolt attachments for mineral core door applications,unless solid wood blocking is provided in the '
door for attachment.
K. Floor and Wall Stops and Holders '
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers:
Glynn-Johnson Ives alit Burns '
a. Wall stop 50W 406 W307 570
b. Wall bumper WBllX 443 417ES 530
C. Holder W20X 451 418ES '
d. Floor stop FB 13/14R 438ES 431ES 510/525
e. Wall holder W-40 495 141
f. Exterior Floor Stop F9X/F9R6
2. Furnish a 50W series wall stop, as applicable, for each door leaf except where wall bumber WB11X, floor
stops FB 13X/14R,holders W20X,wall holder W-40 or overhead stops/holders are specified in the hardware
schedule. ,
3. Where wall stops are not applicable,furnish overhead stops as previously specified within this section of the
specification. '
L. Thresholds,Weatherstrips and Jamb Gaskets
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: '
Reese Pemko National Guard
a. Interior threshold S205A 171A 425E '
b. Exterior threshold S245A 229A 325 Alum
C. Weatherstripped threshold S483AV 2005AV 896 Alum(Vinyl)
d. Weatherstrip 755A 2891APK 700NA
08700-6 No.99132CP-2 '
' Reese Pemko National Guard
e. Astragral weatherstrip 804 Pair 309 185
f. Sweep 964A 18061CP B606A
' g. *Head and Jamb Gasket 797B 588D 2525
h. Drip R201 346 16
i. Jamb sound seal F499 350CSR 1038
' j. Auto door bottom F521 430CPKL 420
2. Where specified in the hardware groups,finnish the above products unless otherwise details in groups.
' 3. *Furnish 9090 head/jamb gaskets and NGP 9605 edge stile astragals for pairs,at all fire labeled doors whether
listed in group or not.
' 4. Provide intumescent fire and smoke material for fire rated openings as required by door and frame
manufacturer to comply with UL l OC,UBC test 7-2.
M. Lock Protectors
1. Manufacturers and respective catalog numbers.
' Glynn Johnson
LP 1-LP6
N. Accessibility Closers
1. Manufacturer: LCN is specified.
' a. When the term "accessibility closers" appears on the hardware schedule, provide a complete system,
including all necessary brackets,mounting plates,tubing and the following items:
' 1) Closer: Auto Equalizer#4822.
2) Actuators: #956 Provide two(2)per door leaf.
3) Control Box: #7982 Provide one (1) box for every two (2) door leafs for vestibule locations.
Provide one box for single door leafs at other locations.
' 4) Tubing: #925 (Length as required.)
2.03 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Furnish all necessary hardware accessories such as wood or machine screws,bolts,nuts, anchors, toggle bolts, and
other fasteners,each of the type,size,material and finish for its intended purpose and each according to the material
to which the Hardware is being applied.
2.04 FINISH AND BASE METALS
A. Finish and Base Metal: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
' 08700-7 No.99132CP-2
PART 3: EXECUTION ,
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. '
B. Install hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, so as to maintain the '
label.
C. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work.
D. Remove, cover or protect hardware after fitting until paint or other finish is applied;permanently install hardware t
after finishing operations are complete.
E. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors,stair side of stairways,and interior side of exterior doors. '
F. Mounting heights:
1. Install hardware at mounting heights conforming to the recommended mounting locations of the Builders'
Hardware Manufacturing Association.
2. Install wall stops WB11X,wall holders W20X,and magnetic holders to strike near top of doors,but not more '
than 78"from the finished floor line;install wall stops 50W to engage knobs,levers or pulls.
G. Install pulls at 40"to top of pull and push bars at 36"above finished floor.
H. Deliver to the Owner one complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as famished with the
hardware. '
I. Before hardware installation, general contractor/construction manager shall coordinate a hardware installation
seminar to be conducted on the installation of hardware specifically of locksets,closers, exit devices and overhead '
stops. Manufacturer's representative of the above products to present seminar. Seminar to be held at the job site
and attended by installers of hardware (including low voltage hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood
doors. Training to include use of installation manuals,hardware schedule,templates and physical products samples.
J. Install per door and/or frame manufacturer's supplemental"S"label instructions on fire rated openings. '
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING '
A. At final completion, adjust and test all hardware for function and performance and leave in good operating
condition. Panic Hardware device manufacturer's representative to inspect panic hardware installation and provide
a report to contractor and architect on items that need correction. '
B. Clean all hardware to restore the original finish.
3.03 PROTECTION '
A. Protect the finished installation until acceptance of the project.
B. Provide final adjustment or cleaning where necessary.
08700-8 No.99132CP-2 '
1
1 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
GROUPI GROUP2
' Butts Butts
Store Room Dead Lock By Owner Exit Device 99L-F
Closer—Stop 4111 CUSH Removable core
Kick Plate Cylinder
Threshold Closer
Weatherstrip Kick Plate
Sweep Stop
Gasketing
GROUP 3 GROUP 4
Butts Butts
Classroom Lock By Owner Classroom Lock By Owner
Closer Closer—Stop 4111 CUSH
Kick Plate Kick Plate
Stop
GROUP 5 GROUP 6
Butts Butts
Store Room Lock By Owner Classroom Lock By Owner
Closer—Stop 4111 CUSH Stop
' Kick Plate
END OF SECTION 08700
08700-9 No.99132CP-2
1
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Glass and glazing in steel doors and frames,in wood doors,aluminum windows and entrances.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Steel doors and frames-Section 08100.
2. Wood doors-Section 08200.
3. Aluminum windows and Entrances-Section 08521.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Specification: Glazing Manual by Flat Glass Marketing Association.
B. Materials: Conform in all respects to the "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials" (16CFR 1201)
issued by the Consumer Product Safety Commission and Chapter 24 of the Uniform Building Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's recommended installation instructions,in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit samples for each type glass specified,in accordance with Section 01300.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Package,handle,deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage.Reject scratched glass.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass Products: Globe Amerada Glass Co., HGP Industries, Monsanto Chemical Co., PPG Industries, Inc. and
Viracon,Inc.are acceptable.
2.02 GLASS
A. Glass Type 1: 1/4"thick clear float glass.
B. Glass Type 2: 1/4"thick clear heat-tempered float glass.
08800-1 No.99132-CP2
C. Glass Type 3: 1/4"thick square pattern clear wire glass conforming to ANSI Z97.1-1984 and tested by UL.
D. Glass Type 4: 1"thick insulating glass,inboard light 1/4" clear float glass, 1/2"air space,outboard light 1/4" clear
low emissivity glass.
G. Glass Type 5: Same as type 4 except both lights heat tempered.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Sealant: One-part polysulphide,similar to Pecora GC-9 Synthacalk.
B. Setting Blocks: 70-90 Shore "A" durometer, sized to accommodate size of glass used, compatible with glazing
sealant.
C. Spacers: Compatible with sealant used.
D. Primer-Sealers,Cleaners: As recommended by glass manufacturer.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Check that glazing channels are free of burrs,irregularities,and debris.
B. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections.
C. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements:
1. Measure size of frame to receive glass.
2. Compute actual glass size,allowing for edge clearances.
B. Preparation of Surfaces:
1. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed.
2. Clean glass and glazing surfaces,to remove dust,oil and contaminants.Wipe dry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's current printed instructions.
B. Install sliding lass doors in accordance with manufacture '
g g r s instructions and as shown on Drawings.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass.
B. Remove labels from glass surface as soon as installed.
C. Wash and polish both faces of glass.
08800-2 No.99132-CP2
D. Remove debris from work site.
3.05 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face.
B. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
C. Replace damaged glass.
END OF SECTION 08800
08800-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1: GENERAL
I� 1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
i' A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Non load bearing metal stud framing for lath and plaster and drywall.
2. Gypsum wallboard and joint system.
3. Gypsum sheathing.
4. Installation of rubber closures at steel roof deck.
5. Acoustic insulation#8 and acoustic sealant at gypsum board.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Load bearing and structural stud framing-Section 05400.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Specifications: "Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings" as published by The Gypsum
Association(GA-201-77).
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Handling
1. Deliver materials to the project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
2. Handle materials with care to prevent damage.
3. Deliver fire-rated materials bearing testing agency label and required fire classification numbers.
B. Storage
1. Store materials inside under cover,stack flat,off floor.
2. Stack wallboard so that long lengths are not over short lengths.
3. Avoid overloading floor system
4. Store adhesives in dry area,provide protection against freezing at all times.
09250-1 No.99132-CP2
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
1. Temperature: During cold weather, in areas receiving wallboard installation, maintain temperature range
between 55°0 F to 70° F for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after gypsum board and joint treatment
application.
2. Ventilation
a. Provide ventilation during and following adhesives and joint treatment applications.
r
b. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation.
C. Under slow drying conditions,allow additional drying time between coats of joint treatment.
d. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot,dry weather.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces against damage and stains.
1.06 JOB COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with installation of metal framing and electrical work.
B. Coordinate framing and blocking for wall mounted accessories with Section 06100.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. All Materials: Materials by United States Gypsum Company are specified. Similar material systems by National
Gypsum Gold Bond,Georgia Pacific and Genstar are acceptable. Use materials from one manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C36, long edges tapered; in lengths as long as practical to keep number of end joints to
absolute minimum.
1. Regular Gypsum Wallboard: Thickness shown on Drawings,tapered edges. Use where gypsum wallboard is
indicated.
2. Fire Code"C"Wallboard: 5/8 inch thick;tapered edges.Use on fire-rated walls.
3. Moisture resistant gypsum board - 5/8" thick, tapered edges. Use in vestibules,janitor closets, toilet rooms
and other damp areas.
B. Gypsum Sheathing: Gypsum sheathing board core complying with ASTM C-79, faced with fiberglass mat surface '
both sides, 1/2"thick. Georgia Pacific"Dens-Glass Gold".
C. Accessories
1. Acoustic Sealant: USG acoustic sealant.
2. Metal Trim: USG No.200 A or B. Use at edges of wallboard abutting other finish surfaces,materials.
09250-2 No.99132-CP2
3. Control Joints: USG No.093.
4. Drywall Screws for Wood Framing: 1-1/4"Type W bugle head.
5. Drywall Screws for Metal Framing: 1"Type S-12 or Type S bugle head.
6. Outside Corner Reinforcement: USG No. (101-1" x V), (103-1-1/2" x 1-1/2"), (104-1 1/8" x 1 1/8") comer
beads.
7. Adhesives: USG Durabond 500; for laminating gypsum wallboard to gypsum backing board, for laminating
gypsum wallboard to masonry backing.
8. Insulation Type 8(Insul 8): USG Thermafiber or equivalent sound attenuation blanket by U.S.G. 2"thick at
studs,3"thick elsewhere.
9. Resilient Channels: USG RC-1 channels.
10. Furring Channels on Masonry: USG metal furring channels.
11. Acoustical Sealant: US Gypsum.
D. Metal Studs,Track
1. Use 25 gauge for partitions up to 12"-0"high. Use 20 gauge for partitions over 12'-0"high,and where shown
on Drawings.
2. Use double 20 gauge studs at each door and borrowed light jamb,head.
E. Ceiling Suspension System
1. Chicago Metallic 640 system is specified,drawn with the standard following system acceptable.
2. Hanger Wire: 8 gauge,annealed.
3. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2"cold rolled steel.
4. Screws: USG 1"Type S.
5. Furring Channels: USG metal furring channel,attached with USG f nTing channel clips.
F. Drywall Finishing Accessories
1. Joint Compound: Ready mixed type.
2. Joint Reinforcement for Drywall: USG Perf-A-Tape.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages.
09250-3 No.99132-CP2
3.02 GENERAL
A. Cut wallboards by scoring and breaking,or sawing,scribe neatly at projections surfaces.
B. Apply first to ceiling then to walls.
C. Locate wallboard joints at openings so that no end joint aligns with edge of opening.
D. Fasteners: Set with heads slightly below surface of wallboard. Take care to avoid breaking of face paper.
E. Follow Gypsum Association's recommendations for installation procedures,fastening patterns.
3.03 METAL STUDS
A. Attach metal runners at floor,ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 2"from each end,spaced
24"o.c.
B. Position studs vertically,engaging floor,ceiling runners,spaced 16 inches o.c.when necessary,splice studs with 8"
nested lap,one positive attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with all door frame jambs,abutting
partitions,partition comers,existing construction elements.
C. Anchor studs adjacent to door frames, partition intersection, corners, to ceiling, floor runner flanges with USG
metal lock fastener tool. Securely anchor studs to jamb head anchor clips at metal door frames by bolt or screw
attachment. Over metal frames, place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bent at each
end; secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at
vertical board joints over door frame header.
3.04 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Where gypsum board suspended ceilings are indicated, provide metal suspension system as made by USG or
Chicago Metallic.
B. Suspend carrying channels with 8 ga. hanger wires spaced 48" o.c.,within 6" of ends; wrapped around or through
beams,joists. Install carrying channels 48" o.c., within 6" of walls. Position channels at proper heights, level,
saddle ties with hanger wires. Provide 1"clearance between channel ends and abutting walls,partitions. At splices
interlock flanges,overlap ends 12",secure with 16 ga.double standard tie wire at each end.
C. Erect furring channels at right angles to carrying channels,spaced 24"o.c.within 6" of walls. Provide 1" clearance
between channel ends and abutting wall,partitions; secure to carrying channels with clips or saddle-tie with 16 ga.
double standard tie wire. At splices nest channels at least 8",securely wire tie at each end.
D. Install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability of grillage at openings that interrupt carrying or furring
channels.
E. Apply wallboard of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to furring channels. Position end
joints over channel web,stagger in adjacent rows. Fit ends, edges closely not not forced together. Fasten board to
channels with I"Type S screws spaced 12"o.c.in field of board,along abutting ends,edges.
F. Attach furring channels to bottom of steel joists for gypsum board support in ceilings of rated corridors.
3.05 CONTROL JOINTS
A. At Ceilings: 50'-0"o.c.each way maximum,or where shown on Drawings.
B. At Walls: 30'-0"o.c.maximum,or where shown on Drawings.
09250-4 No.99132-CP2
3.06 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ERECTION
A. Position all ends, edges over nailing members, except when edge joints are at right angles to framing members, or
when end joints are back-blocked. Apply wallboard vertically on walls.
B. Attach wallboard tb metal framing supports by power driven screws. For vertical application space screws 12"o.c.
in field of board,8"o.c.staggered along vertical abutting edges. For horizontal application space screws 12"o.c.in
field,along abutting end joints.
3.07 JOINT TREATMENT APPLICATION
A. Mix joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply compound in thin uniform layer to all joints, angles to be reinforced. Apply reinforcing tape centered over
joint, seated into compound. Follow immediately with thin skim coat to embed tape. Fold,embed tape in interior
angles to provide true angle.
C. When embedding coat is thoroughly dry, apply second coat of compound, filling board taper flush with surface;
cover tape, feather out slightly beyond tape. On joints with no taper, cover tape, feather out at least 4" on either
side of tape. No second coat is required on interior angles.
D. When second coat is thoroughly dry,spread finish coat evenly over,extend slightly beyond second coat; feather to
smooth, uniform finish. Over tapered edges, do not allow finish coat to protrude beyond plane of surface. Apply
finish coat to cover tape,taping compound at taped angles to provide true angle. When necessary, sand between
coats and following final coat to provide smooth surface ready for decoration.
3.08 FINISHING FASTENERS
A. Apply compound to fastener depressions at first coat. Follow with minimum of two additional coats; leaving
depressions level with plane of surface.
3.09 FINISHING BEAD AND TRIM
A. Apply first coat to beads, trim; properly feather out from ground to plane of surface. Embed flanges of comer
reinforcement with compound.
B. When embedding coat is thoroughly dry, apply second coat in same manner as first coat, extending compound
slightly beyond into face of board.
C. When second coat is thoroughly dry apply finish coat to bead, trim, extending compound slightly beyond second
coat, properly feathering from ground to plane of surface. Sand finish coat as necessary to provide flat smooth
surface,ready for decoration.
3.10 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Install gypsum sheathing on exterior face of steel studs at exterior insulation/finish system,and elsewhere shown on
Drawings.
B. Use appropriate length material to avoid end joints. Install edge joints parallel to and occurring over framing
members. Stagger end joints if required. Fit snugly around openings.
C. Screw to steel studs with No. 6 S-12, bugle head, self tapping,rust resistant fasteners, 8" o.c. at perimeter and 8"
o.c. in field. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Install screws no closer than
3/8"from edge of panel.
09250-5 No.99132-CP2
3.11 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Screw Pop
1. Repair nail pop by driving new screw approximately 1-1/2 inches away and reseat screw.
2. When face paper is punctured drive new screw approximately 1-1/2 inches from defective fastening and
remove defective fastening.
3. Fill damaged surface with compound.
B. Ridging
1. Sand ridges to reinforcing tape without cutting through tape.
2. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with topping compound.
3. After fill is dry,blend in topping compound over repaired area.
C. Fill cracks with compound and finish smooth and flush.
END OF SECTION 09250
09250-6 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09290
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM AND CONCRETE UNITS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of sections in Division One of these
specifications apply to the work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers all labor, material, accessories necessary for the complete installation of glass fiber reinforced
interior column covers. Items not mentioned specifically herein, which are necessary to make a complete
installation shall also be included.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Gypsum wallboard and joint finishing-Section 09250.
2. Finish painting- Section 09900. The type of paint recommended by the paint manufacturer shall be suitable
for plaster surfaces.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Indicate materials,construction,dimensions,locations,
connections and installation details.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions.
C. Submit,at the time of shop drawings,the manufacturer's warranty that the materials furnished herein will not warp
or sag for a period of one(1)year when installed in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Reinforced gypsum units shall be stored on the job in an area free from moisture in the manufacturer's crates until
ready for use. If necessary to remove from crates,store in crated position with duplicate supports as was originally
crated.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: Plastrglas,Inc.,4200 North 30th Street, Omaha,NE 68111, (402)455-0652. Equivalent products
by Plasterform Inc.or Casting Designs Inc.are acceptable.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Interior Units: Shall be prefabricated glass fiber reinforced gypsum units using multidirectional unlayered spray
layup procedures and combined with high strength gypsum plaster that is specially formulated for combination with
glass fibers and which requires no special additives.
09290-1 No.99132-CP2
B. Exterior Units: Prefabricated glass fiber reinforced portland cement and silica sand concrete with Alkali resisting
polymer additives and glass fibers using multi-directional unlayered spray lay-up procedures.
C. Interior units to have monolithic joint for taping by Section 09250. Exterior units to have "Y' groove joint for
caulking by Section 07900.
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Wire hangers: 12 gauge galvanized steel wire.
B. Fasteners:
1. Interior: Self-drilling,self-tapping bugle head screws,type G,length required for each assembly.
2. Exterior: Tapcon concrete screws,corrosion resistant.
C. Adhesive: Solvent base construction adhesive suitable for gypsum wallboard application. (Example: Miracle#20
or Fuller's"Black Stuff')
2.03 FABRICATION
t�
A. Moulds shall be rigid and constructed of materials that will result in smooth, finished products conforming to
profiles and dimensions indicated on drawings.
B. Meter glass fiber and plaster slurry rates at spray head to achieve desired mix proportion and glass content.
C. Machine spray in accordance with manufacturer's standards for multi-directional,chopped fibers.
D. Properly imbed wire hanger inserts in matrix to develop full strengths.
E. Carefully remove units from moulds and repair hollows, voids, scratches, or other surface imperfections. Surface
shall be primer ready.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect adjacent construction for conditions that would prevent proper installation of reinforced gypsum units.
B. Expansion joints such as USG 093 shall be installed in runs exceeding 35'.
3.02 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Install reinforced gypsum units true,plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.03 JOINT FINISHING
A. The joints between the reinforced gypsum units themselves and where they join drywall shall be taped and finished
as previously outlined.
B. The joint shall follow the curvature of the unit if applicable. The installing contractor shall be responsible for repair
of any surface imperfections resulting at the job site.
C. Care shall be taken when taping and finishing flat joints between parts to prevent"crowning".
END OF SECTION 09290
09290-2 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART L GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Lay-in acoustic ceilings.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Gypsum board ceilings-Section 09250.
2. Mechanical penetration of ceilings-Division 15.
3. Electrical penetration of ceilings-Division 16.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings indicating installation layouts in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit samples of all acoustical and suspension materials to Architect for approval.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name,
pattern,size,thickness and fire rating as applicable,legible and intact.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling,physical damage or wetting.
C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.
D. Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to complete a room are received.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Complete installation of dampening materials before beginning work.
B. Maintain humidity of 65%-75%in area where acoustical materials are to be installed,25 hours before,during,and
after installation.
C. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 F.to 70 F.prior to,during,and after installation of materials.
09510-1 No.99132-CP2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
A. Products by Armstrong and USG are specified. Equivalent products by either manufacturer must be approved by
Architect prior to bidding.
B. Type 1: 24" X 48" X 5/8" square edge lay-in, Armstrong "Designer Minaboard" #734, USG "Auratone
Touchstone"#5891.
C. Type 2: 24" X 24" X 5/8" square edge lay-in, Armstrong "Designer Minaboard" #735A, USG "Auratone
Touchstone"#5890.
D. Furnish extra materials equal to 1% of each type of acoustical material supplied. Provide materials in new,
unopened cartons labeled as to contents.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Suspension System for Non-Rated Lay-In Panels: 200 Intermediate Duty Snap-Grid System by Chicago Metallic
Corporation,standard white finish,or equivalent system by USG'Donn"or Armstrong.
1. Edge Molding(all types): Provide at all walls, intersection of vertical surfaces. Minimum.020" steel. Color
same as exposed grid.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness,
irregularities,and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.
B. Mark access provisions as to size and location before beginning installation.
3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Grid layout in each space, area located symmetrically in room, space. Coordinate work with other trades so that
lighting fixtures,grilles,other ceiling fixtures work to grid layout.
B. Do not use universal splices or other types whose use would obstruct passage of recessed lighting fixtures through
grid openings,or make untenable their reposition upon flanges of beams.
C. Support suspension system from structure above,not from ductwork,equipment or piping.
D. Space hangers not more than 6 from ends,not more than 4'-0" o.c. Between ends of main runners, provide extra
hangers as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling.
E. Provide additional tee supports,hangers and cut tiles to support and fit to all sides of light fixtures, linear diffusers
and other ceiling penetrations. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical drawings.
3.03 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS
A. Install ceiling panels and tiles using clean gloves,to avoid soiling materials.
B. Install lay-in panels snugly against support system without damaging panels.
09510-2 No.99132-CP2
C. Field rabbit edges of panels where field-cut to match shadow-line profile.
D. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling systems and replace any part which is damaged or faulty.
E. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings,including trim,edge moldings and suspension members;comply with
manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work, which
cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
F. Replace any sagging tile just prior to substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 09510
09510-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Vinyl base and accessories.
2. Vinyl base at freestanding island casework.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Concrete Substrates-Section 03300.
2. Wood Substrates-Section 06100.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit full line of color samples for materials to be furnished for Architect's review and selection.
B. Provide manufacturer's recommended maintenance data and instructions prior to completion of work.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials,to project site in manufacturer's original,unopened containers with labels indicating brand names,
colors and patterns,and quality designations legible and intact.
B. Do not open containers or remove markings until materials are inspected and accepted.
C. Store and protect accepted materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations.
D. Unless otherwise directed, store materials in original containers at not less than 70° F. for not less than 24 hours
immediately before installation.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature in space to receive tile between 70° F. and 90° F. for not less than 24 hours before and 48
hours after installation.
B. Maintain minimum temperature of 55°F.thereafter.
09650-1 No.99132-CP2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 VINYL BASE
A. Manufacturer: Products by Mercer are specified. VPI, Armstrong, Johnsonite, Roppe, Tarkett are acceptable,
subject to approval by Architect for color match prior to bidding.
B. Base: 1/8"thick x 4"high,solid vinyl. Straight base at carpet,coved base at other surfaces.
C. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives,Other Application Material: As recommended specifically by flooring manufacturer.
B. Patching,Leveling,Underlayment: Mastic Latex type equivalent to Armstrong latex underlayment S-180.
C. Transition strips, cap strips: Mercer. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule, Sections 1-4 of Details of
Construction.
2.03 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish 1%of each type/color of flooring,trim used in this project to Owner as maintenance stock.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive resilient finishes: Dry,clean,smooth. Fill defects or grind smooth as required. Sand sub-floors
to remove mortar,paint,other surface irregularities.
B. Do not use curing compounds on concrete sub-floors unless written approval is obtained from flooring
manufacturer.
C. Correct adverse conditions of any type before starting any flooring installation.
D. Where filling, patching, leveling is required of thickness exceeding 1/8" apply latex type underlayment in two or
more applications. Apply compound in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Place resilient reducer strips tightly butted to resilient flooring and secure with adhesive. Provide edging strips or
cap strips at all unprotected edges of flooring.
B. Apply coved base at resilient floors and straight base at carpeted floors.
C. Install non-slip strips on ramps,vestibules 6"o.c.
END OF SECTION 09650
09650-2 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09680
CARPET
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
lA. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. A complete carpet installation where shown on the Drawings and in the Room Finish Schedule.
2. Reducer strips between carpet and concrete.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Vinyl base-Section 09650.
2. Reducer strips between carpet and resilient flooring-Section 09650.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain letter from carpet manufacturer authorizing work by proposed installer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit the name and letter of authorization of the carpet installer for approval prior to the execution of the contract.
C. Submit a sample of the color of carpet selected for the Architect's approval. Sample size, 8" x 8" or larger.Attach
copy of manufacturer's specification to each sample.
D. Submit three copies of carpet manufacturer's current printed floor preparation and carpet installation specifications.
E. Layout Drawings
1. Submit working layout for approval based on field measurements for each area to be covered showing location
of all seams,including trim strips and other installation details.
2. Show minimum cross seaming,planned so that the adjoining pile have the same directional run.
F. Maintenance Manuals
1. Furnish three(3)copies of carpet manufacturer's recommendations for care,cleaning,etc.per Section 01730.
1.06 PRODUCT PROTECTION
A. Exercise care during delivery,handling and storage to prevent damage.
09680-1 No.99132-CP2
B. Close to traffic spaces in which the Work of this Section is accomplished while work is in progress and until such
. time as recommended by the installer to be otherwise.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Allow new concrete to cure 90 days before installation commences.
B. Floor must be free of dust,oils,grease or other foreign matter.Building must be preheated at a minimum 70o F.for
at least 24 hours prior to installation with the relative humidity between 35%and 50%. Keep temperature at same
level night and day during installation.
C. Maintain a minimum temperature of 55 F.after floor is installed.
D. Allow installation a minimum of 24 hours to cure before subjecting it to any traffic, moving of furniture, or other
heavy equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Carpet: Lees"Faculty IV".
1. Requirements:
a. Construction Tufted performance loop pile
b. Gauge 1/8"
c. Rows 8.3 per inch
d. Pile height .18T'
e. Face Yarn Dupont Antron Legacy nylon
f. Dye System Yam dyed
g. Face Weight 77.1 oz./sq.yd.
h. Yam Count 1230/4
i. Backing Material Woven synthetic
j. Width 12 feet
2. Static control: Static propensity(AATCC-134-75) is below normal human sensitivity of 3.0 KV or less under
standard test conditions(70°F,20%R.H.)
3. Flammability: Meth nimine pill test(DOC FF#1-70)passes Floor Radiant Panel Test(ASTM E648) Class 1
Smoke Density Test(ASTM E662)450 or less
4. Warranty: 10 yr.wear warranty. Submit per Section 01730.
5. Colors: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Floor Filler: Type and brand recommended by adhesive and carpet manufacturers.
B. Reducer Strips: Mercer. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule, Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Carpet and Seaming Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.
09680-2 No.99132-CP2
2.04 EXTRA STOCK
A. Allow for 2%overage of each color/type to be left on site wrapped and uncut for Owner's future use.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Do not start installation until other work has been Substantially Completed.
1 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt,oil,grease and other foreign materials so surface is clean and dry.
B. Fill cracks,depressions and other minor defects in concrete floors which will adverse effect carpet installation with
floor filler to make surface true and uniform.
C. Perform necessary work to put existing substrate in acceptable condition for installation of carpet.
D. Perform all floor preparation required by and in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install carpeting in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions as submitted to Architect for review.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove immediately adhesive spots and smears from carpet with solvent.
B. Owner may retain any or all carpet scraps he chooses before they are removed from job site.
C. Clean dirt,debris and stain and remove loose threads,etc.
END OF SECTION 09680
09680-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART l: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Field finish all materials scheduled and/or specified for paint,trim,stain or seal.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Finishing of wood doors-Section 08200.
2. Shop finishing-Applicable Sections.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide three(3) copies of a schedule detailing each substrate in the same order as the schedules used in Part 3 of
this section. Include the following:
1. The specific products to be used for each coat.
2. Documentation that the manufacturer has reviewed and approved each painting system.
3. Data pages for all products listed.
4. On one set of data pages,highlight the following:
a. Type of resin.
b. Dry Film Thickness.
C. Volume Solids.
d. Units of Sheen.
e. Other performance or descriptive data required by Part 2 of this section.
f. If this information is not on the data page provide the information in a letter of certification from the
manufacturer. Attach the letter to the appropriate data page.
B. Submit three (3) drawdowns of each product and color combination. Drawdowns shall be applied using a 4 mil
WFT drawdown bar on Leneta form WD plain white coated cards size 3-7/8"x 6".
1. Label each card with the following:
a. Job name.
b. Date.
C. Product name.
d. Product number.
e. Color number as stated in the material finish/color schedule.
f. Name,address,and phone number of the supplying facility.
09900-1 No.99132-CP2
C. Do not deliver material to site until having received written approval of submitted information and samples.
D. Complete sample area on project as selected by Architect on each type surface and with each type of paint specified.
Do not proceed further with application until receiving acceptance of each sample area by Architect. Accepted
areas will serve as standard of quality for entire project.
1.04 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS
A. Examine the specifications for the work of other trade contractors and to become familiar with their work. All
surfaces that are left unfinished by the requirements of other specifications to be finished by this section.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The existing building may contain lead containing materials, including paint. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
meet all governmental regulations when dealing with and disposing of lead containing materials.
PART 2: PRODUCTS ,
2.01 PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. Painting systems for normal applications are specified using the products of Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W) and ICI
Paints(ICI)to establish standards of quality,except as noted. Comparable systems which are compliant with stated
descriptive and performance requirements of ICl/Fuller O'Brien, Benjamin Moore & Co., Pratt and Lambert Co.,
PPG Industries,and ICl/Devoe Coatings are acceptable.
B. Painting systems for specialty applications are specified using the products of Sonneborn, Aquarius Coatings,
Genesis Coatings,Carboline,Seal-Krete.
C. Use the materials of the same manufacturer for each system.
D. For color selection see Material Finish/Color Schedule,Section 1-4 of Details of Construction.
2.02 PRIMERS(INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR)
A. 100%Acrylic Exterior Masonry Primer:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 37%.
2. Maximum VOC's: 115 gm/L(as packaged).
3. Alkali Resistance: Passes TT-P-1511B4A.11
a. S-W Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300.
b. ICI 2000 Decra-Shield Exterior Acyrlic Latex Primer.
B. 100%Acrylic Exterior Wood Primer:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 34%.
a. S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41.
b. ICI 2010 Durus Acrylic Primecoat.
C. Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 56%.
a. S-W A-100 Exterior Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer Y24W20.
b. ICI 2110 Durus Alkyd Primecoat.
09900-2 No.99132-CP2
D. Heavy Metal Free,Rust Inhibitive,Universal,Alkyd Metal Primer:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 51%.
a. S-W Kern Bond HS B50NZ3 or B50WZ4.
b. ICI 4160 Devguard Multi-purpose Primer.
E. 100%Acrylic,Interior Alkali Resistant Primer:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 37%.
2. Alkali Resistance: Tolerance of PH levels up to 13.
a. S-W Loxon Interior Masonry Primer B28W300.
b. ICI 3210 Aquacrylic Gripper Primer Sealer.
F. 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer:
1. Shall be certifiable for use on gypsum drywall or wood,and to receive wallcovering or paint.
2. Minimum Volume Solids: 39%.
a. S-W PrepRite Latex Wall and Wood Primer B28W101.
b. ICI 3210 Aquacrylic Gripper Primer Sealer.
G. Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 44%.
a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W 1.
b. ICI 4020 Devflex DTM Waterborne Primer Finish.
2.03 BLOCKFILLERS(INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR)
A. Vinyl Acrylic Blockfiller:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 48%.
a. S-W ProMar Blockfiller B25W25.
b. ICI 3010 Ultra Hide Interior/Exterior Block Filler.
B. 100%Acrylic Blockfiller:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 45%.
2. Wind Driven Rain Resistance: Passes TT-C-555B,98 MPH wind velocity.
a. S-W Heavy Duty Blockfiller B42W46.
b. ICI 4000 Bloxfil Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler.
C. Single Component Epoxy Ester Masonry Filler:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 59%.
a. S-W Epoxy Ester Masonry Filler/Sealer B61 W2.
b. Carboline Sanitile VOC CB Base.
c. No substitutions.
2.04 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINTS
A. 100%Acrylic Exterior Satin Coating:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 32%.
2. Sheen: 10-20 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House&Trim A82 series.
b. ICI 2412 Durus Exterior Acrylic Satin.
09900-3 No.99132-CP2
i
B. Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 31%.
2. Sheen: 70-90 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W Super Paint Exterior High Gloss Door&Trim Enamel A85 Series.
b. ICI 3028 Decra-Shield Interior Exterior Acrylic Gloss Enamel.
C. Two-component Aliphatic Acrylic Modified Polyurethane:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 58%.
2. Sheen: 20-30 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W Corothane rI Low VOC,Satin Finish Polyurethane B65W200 SeriesB60V2.
b. ICI 378 Devthane Aliphatic Urethane(Semigloss).
2.05 STAINS,VARNISHES AND WATER REPELLENTS(INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR)
A. Oil Based Wiping Stain:
1. S-W Oil Stain A48 Series.
2. ICI 1700 Woodpride.
B. Polyurethane Satin Varnish:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 38%.
2. Sheen: 20-35 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W Polyurethane Varnish A67 Series.
b. ICI 1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin Varnish.
2.06 INTERIOR FINISH PAINTS
A. Vinyl Acrylic Interior Eggshell Finish:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 36%.
a. S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-shel B20W200 Series.
b. ICI 1412 Ultra Hide Latex Eggshell
B. Vinyl Acrylic Interior Flat Finish:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 27%.
2. Sheen: 0-5 units at 85 degrees.
a. S-W ProMar 400 Latex Flat B30W400 Series.
b. ICI 1230 Ultra-Wall Latex Flat.
C. 100%,Acrylic,Interior Gloss Coating:
1. Blocking Resistant
2. Abrasion Resistance(ASTM D4060): 110 MG maximum.
3. Minimum Volume Solids: 36%.
4. Sheen: 60-80 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W DTM Acrylic Gloss B66W100 Series.
b. ICI 4208 Devflex Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel.
D. Two-component,Epoxy Polyamine Coating:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 75%(catalyzed).
09900-4 No.99132-CP2
2. Sheen: 75-95 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W Sher-Tile High Solids Epoxy B67W200 SeriesB67V200.
b. ICI 224 HS Devran High Build Epoxy Coating.
E. 100%Acrylic,Waterbome Flat Dryfall:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 40%.
2. Sheen: 0-8 units at 85 degrees.
a. S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42WL
b. ICI 1280 Spraymaster Pro Uni-Grip-WB Aquacrylic Flat Primer/Finish
1 F. Two-component,Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 38%(catalyzed).
2. Sheen 20-50 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 SeriesB60V25.
b. ICI 4406 Tru Glaze-WB Waterborne Epoxy Semi Gloss.
G. Two-component Polyester Epoxy:
1. Minimum Volume Solids: 58%.
2. Sheen: 75-90 units at 60 degrees.
a. S-W Armor-Tile HS Polyester Epoxy B67W100 SeriesB67VW100.
b. Carboline Sanitile Sealer and Sanitile 800.
c. No substitutions.
2.07 FLOOR AND WALL SEALERS
A. Concrete Floor Sealer:
1. Primer: Sonneborn"Prime and Kote".
2. Polyurethane Concrete Floor Sealer and Finish: Sonnebom"Sonothane MVP".
2.08 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 2 gallons of each product and each color to Owner in unopened containers.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. General
1. Do not start work until preparation specified in surface Section is completed.
2. Ensure surfaces are dry and adequately protected from dampness.
3. Thoroughly clean surfaces free of loose, rough and foreign substances which will affect adhesion or
appearance of applied coats.
4. Remove mildew and neutralize surface.
5. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, factory finished items, etc. or
provide ample in-place protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items and
protection.
09900-5 No.99132-CP2
6. Complete repainting or refinishing will be required if coats are applied over improperly prepared surfaces.
B. Wood
1. Hand sandpaper to smooth surface. Sand direction of grain, taking care not to mar character of details and
sharp edges. Remove sanding dust.
2. After first coat is dry,thoroughly coat,with shellac(suitably reduced with alcohol for flowing consistency)or
known sealer,knots,pitch pockets and resinous sapwood areas.
3. After first coat is dry,fill nail holes,cracks and defects with colored putty tinted to match stain or paint.
4. Previously painted surfaces must be free of dirt,mildew, loose paint, etc. Excessive chalking or dirt must be
removed by washing with water. Hard glossy surfaces are to be lightly -sanded or dulled with
deglosser/cleaner. Openings permitting entrance of water should be caulked prior to painting. Surfaces in
poor condition must be prepared for repainting by removing loose paint and blisters by scraping, sanding or
burning. Paint in these areas is to be removed at least 12 inches beyond the failing area. Prime before
applying finish coats.
C. Gypsum Board:
1. Fill minor irregularities with patching material and sand to smooth level surfaces taking care not to raise nap of
paper.
2. Previously painted gypsum wallboards must be completely dry, smooth-sanded, clean and free of dust, dirt,
powdery residue, grease, oil, wax or any other contaminants such as flaking or peeling paint before paint
application is started. Treat or remove all contaminants and correct defects. Dull glossy old paint by light
sanding or with a commercial deglosser/cleaner to assure maximum adhesion of the new coating. Patch holes
and cracks with a latex patching compound,sand smooth and spot prime with the paint or enamel to be used as
the final coat.
D. Plaster
1. Fill cracks,holes or imperfections with patching plaster and smooth off to match adjoining surfaces. Do not
sandpaper.
2. In case of high alkali or lime conditions,neutralize with solution recommended by paint manufacturer.
3. Do not paint until moisture content of surface is 12% or below, except as may be required by paint
manufacturer.
4. Previously painted plaster surfaces must be dry, clean, and free of dust, dirt, powder residue,grease, oil, wax
or any other contaminants;free of flaking,crumbling or chalking conditions before paint application is started.
Contaminants must be treated or removed: Defects corrected as necessary. Dull glossy old paints by light
sanding or with deglosser/cleaner to assure maximum adhesion of the new coating. Remove any loose,
chipped, peeling or blistered old paint by scraping and smooth sanding. If highly porous old paint needs
reconditioning before receiving the new application, prime the entire surface with undercoater oil primer.
Patch holes and cracks with latex patching compound per manufacturer's instructions after removing plaster as
far back as necessary to reach firm areas. Spot prime patched areas with sealer-primer.
E. Formed Concrete
1. Remove all traces of form oil.
2. Do not paint until moisture content of surface is 15% or below except as may be required by paint
manufacturer.
09900-6 No.99132-CP2
3. Previously painted surfaces must be free of grease, oil, wax or any other contaminants and loose or flaking
paint. Clean concrete of oil and grease with detergent, hot water and vigorous scrubbing. All loose and
peeling paint must be scraped or sand blasted back to sound adhesion.
F. Masonry
1. Do not paint until moisture content of surface is 15% or below except as may be required by paint
manufacturer.
2. After prime coat is dry, fill remaining small holes, cracks and other defects with Swedish putty made by
1 mixing dry spackle with prime paint.
3. Previously painted masonry surfaces must be dry, clean and free of dust, dirt and any other contaminants.
Hard glossy surfaces are to be lightly sanded or dulled with deglosser/cleaner. Surfaces in poor condition
must be prepared for repainting by removing loose paint and blisters by scraping,sanding or burning. Paint in
these areas are to be removed at least 12 inches beyond the failing area. Patch all holes left after removal of
nails,screws,and anchors. Prime before applying finish coats.
G. Ferrous or Galvanized Metal
1. Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits or solvent recommended by paint manufacturer and clean cloths.
2. If prime coat is not smooth,sand to bare metal,reprime. Touch up scratched or abraided primer.
3. Previously painted metal must be dry, clean and free of contaminants. Hard and glossy surfaces are to be
sanded lightly or dulled with deglosser/cleaner. Remove peeling, loose, chipped,and blistered paint and rust
by scraping and sanding. Prime all sanded areas and areas devoid of paint with an all-purpose metal primer.
H. Aluminum:
1. Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits or solvent recommended by paint manufacturer and clean cloths.
2. All chipped, peeling or blistered paint must be removed by hand or power tool cleaning. Remove all oil,
grease, dirt or other foreign materials. Remove excessive chalking or sanding. Remove any mildew present
by scrubbing with detergent and bleach. Thoroughly clean surface with water prior to repainting.
I. Concrete Floors:
1. To receive paint: Must be dry and free of dirt,oil,grease and other containments.
2. To receive sealer: Shotblast floor to resemble 100 grit sandpaper.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Conditions
1. Do no interior work until building is properly enclosed.
2. Do no exterior work when surface, coating product, or air temperature is below 50° F., while surfaces are
damp or during cold,rainy or frosty weather. Temperature must be at least 5°F above the dewpoint. Avoid
application to surfaces which are exposed to hot sun.
3. Do work under adequate illumination and dust-free conditions.
09900-7 No.99132-CP2
B. Methods: Paint may be applied by brush, roller or spray methods except where particular method will produce
unsatisfactory results. Where spray method is used on concrete block,follow with roller to work paint into voids.
C. Materials: Do not open containers until required for use. Stir materials thoroughly and keep at uniform consistency
during application.
D. Coats
1. Number specified is minimum. Provide sufficient number of coats to provide even, consistent, opaque
coverage of substrate.
2. Touch up suction spots between coats. r
3. Refinish surfaces affected by refitting work.
4. Tint prime and under coats of paint approximately 1/2 to 3/4 depth of final color.
5. Touch up suction and"hot'spots in plaster and concrete after application or first coat and before second coat.
6. Do not apply next coat until previous is thoroughly dry.
7. Provide final coat which is solid and even in color; free from runs, laps, sags, brush marks, air bubbles and
excessive roller stipple and worked into crevices,joint and similar areas.
3.03 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR WORK r
A. General: Do not paint brick,stucco,precast concrete,prefinished aluminum(unless scheduled to receive paint).
1. New Work: Paint or finish all other new, unfinished and primed surfaces, including all rooftop mechanical
equipment, screen, wall louvers (not factory-finished) and prefinished metal copings (color to match brick)
occurring in brick as detailed.
2. Existing Work: Prepare and paint all surfaces as noted on the drawings.
B. Concrete, Stucco, Mineral-fiber Reinforced Cement Panels, Concrete Masonry Units, Fluted Block and Restored
Masonry(except soffits):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Exterior Masonry Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.1 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Satin Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: 100%Acrylic Satin Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.3 mils per coat.
C. Wood-Except trim scheduled to receive stain,water repellent,or varnish finish:
1. Test Patch: If wood is redwood or cedar,apply 4 square feet of acrylic primer. After 4 hours,check for stains
from tannin blend. If no stain is evident, proceed using acrylic primer. If tannin staining is evident,proceed
with alternate alkyd primer.
2. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Exterior Wood Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.4 mils.
3. Alternate 1 st Coat: Alkyd Wood Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 2.3 mils.
4. 2nd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
09900-8 No.99132-CP2
H. Ferrous Metal(except surfaces scheduled to receive polyurethane):
1. Touch-up: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.3 mils per coat.
I. Ferrous Metal-All exposed structural,surfaces subject to light foot traffic(i.e. dock ladders,and grated walkways
or balconies),plus columns and handrails:
1. 1 st Coat: Heavy Metal Free,Rust Inhibitive,Universal,Alkyd Metal Primer.
a. DFT: 2.0-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Aliphatic Acrylic Modified Polyurethane.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Aliphatic Acrylic Modified Polyurethane.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
J. Zinc-coated Metal-Flashing,Decking,and Exposed Mechanical Including Rooftop Mechanical:
1. Touch-up: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Satin Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: 100%Acrylic Satin Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.3 mils per coat.
K. Zinc-coated Metal-Doors,Frames and Handrails:
1. Touch-up: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.3 mils per coat.
L. Aluminum-Mill Finish(scheduled to be painted):
1. 1st Coat: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: Non-blocking, 100%Acrylic Exterior Gloss Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.3 mils per coat.
rN. Gypsum Board Soffits,Cement Plaster Soffits,and Mineral-fiber Reinforced Cement Panel Soffits:
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Masonry Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.1 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Flat Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: 100%Acrylic Flat Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.3 mils per coat.
O. Precast Concrete Wall Panels,Brick and Stucco(scheduled to receive anti-graffiti coating):
1. 1 st Coat: Anti-Graffiti Sealer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1-2 mils per coat.
2. 2nd Coat: Anti-Graffiti Sealer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1-2 mils per coat.
09900-9 No.99132-CP2
3.04 SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR WORK
A. General
1. Paint complete all surfaces noted with a"PT"on Room Finish Schedule.
a. New Work: In unscheduled areas, use paint type to match adjacent areas. In rooms with surfaces not
scheduled for paint on Room Finish Schedule, paint hollow metal doors and frames, metal stairs and
railings as occur.
b. Existing Areas: In unscheduled areas, paint all walls comer to comer in areas where patching has
occurred.
2. Provide specified finish on exposed surfaces including,but not limited to the following:
a. Prime coated mechanical units, piping, pipe covering, sprinkler piping, interior duct surfaces visible
behind grilles,radiation covers,cabinet unit heaters,exposed ductwork,louvers and grilles.
b. Electrical panel box covers and surface raceways(over factory finish),conduits and boxes.
c. Hollow metal doors and frames, steel stairs, ladders and railings, catwalks and safety mesh grilles, fire
extinguisher cabinets, access panels, prime painted hardware, coiling grilles and doors (unless factory
finished),metal supports for counters and exposed miscellaneous metals.
B. Concrete,Cement Plaster,and Mineral-fiber Reinforced Cement Panels-Walls(not scheduled for epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic,Alkali Resistant Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 per coat.
C. Concrete,Cement Plaster,and Reinforced Cement Panels-Ceilings Without Exposed Mechanical:
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic,Alkali Resistant Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.2 per coat.
D. Concrete Masonry Units and Restored Masonry(not scheduled for epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Blockfiller.
a. Minimum DFT: 8.0 mils(75-125 sq.ft./gal).
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 per coat.
E. Gypsum Drywall-Wall(not scheduled for epoxy): ,
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 per coat.
09900-10 No.99132-CP2
' F. Gypsum Drywall-Ceilings(not scheduled for epoxy):
1. 1 st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Pruner.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.2 per coat.
G. Plaster-Walls(not scheduled for epoxy):
1. 1 st Coat: 100%Acrylic,Alkali Resistant Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 per coat.
H. Plaster-Ceilings(not scheduled for epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic,Alkali Resistant Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
3. 3rd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.2 per coat.
I. Wood-Painted:
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 2.5 mils per coat.
rJ. Wood-Transparent Finish:
1. 1 st Coat: Oil Based Wiping Stain.
a. Spreading Rate: As needed to match architect's sample.
2. 2nd Coat: Polyurethane Satin Varnish.
3. 3rd Coat: Polyurethane Satin Varnish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.7 mils per coat.
K. Ferrous Metal(not scheduled for epoxy):
1. Touch-up: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0-mils:
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 2.5 mils per coat.
L. Zinc-coated Metal:
1. Touch-up: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
' a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
3. 3rd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 2.5 mils per coat.
09900-11 No.99132-CP2
M. Cotton or Canvas Covering Over Insulation(except exposed overhead work):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer>
a. Minimum DFT: 1.4 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Vinyl Acrylic Flat Finish.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.4 mils per coat.
N. Aluminum-Mill Finish:
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Gloss Coating. ,
a. Minimum DFT: 2.5 mils per coat.
O. Concrete Floors(scheduled to receive paint):
1. 1st Coat: Two-component,Epoxy Polyamine Coating.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component,Epoxy Polyamine Coating.
a. Minimum DFT: 4.0-8.0 mils per coat.
P. Wall Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Vinyl Wallcovering:
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.4 mils.
Q. Exposed Overhead Work:
1. Touch-up: Rust-inhibitive Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
a. DFT: 2.5-5.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: 100%Acrylic,Waterborne Flat Dryfall.
a. DFT: 3.0-5.0 mils.
R. Gypsum Drywall-Walls(scheduled to receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.4 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.5-3.0 mils per coat.
S. Concrete, Cement Plaster, Mineral-fiber Reinforced Cement Panels, and Plaster - Walls (scheduled to receive
epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic,AflWi Resistant Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.5-3.0 mils per coat.
T. Concrete Masonry Units and Restored Masonry(scheduled to receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Blockfiller.
a. Minimum DFT: 10.0 mils(50-90 sq.ft./gal).
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.5-3.0 mils per coat.
09900-12 No.99132-CP2
U. Gypsum Drywall-Walls and Ceilings(scheduled to receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Interior Pigmented Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 1.6 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.5-4.0 mils per coat.
V. Plaster,Concrete,Cement Plaster,and Mineral-fiber Reinforced Cement Panels-Walls and Ceilings(scheduled to
receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic,Alkali Resistant Primer.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
1 3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.5-4.0 mils per coat.
W. Concrete Masonry Units and Restored Masonry(schedule to receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: 100%Acrylic Blockfiller.
a. Minimum DFT: 3.0 mils.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
a. DFT:2.54.0 mils per coat.
X. Ferrous Metal(scheduled to receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: Heavy Metal Free,Rust Inhibitive,Universal,Alkyd Metal Primer.
a. DFT: 2.0-5.0.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.54.0 mils per coat.
Y. Concrete Masonry Units,Concrete,Cement Plaster,and Mineral-fiber Reinforced Cement Panel Walls and Ceilings
(showers scheduled to receive epoxy):
1. 1st Coat: Single-component Epoxy Ester Masonry Filler.
a Spreading Rate:
' 1) 60-80 square feettgallon for Concrete Masonry Units.
2) 80-100 square feet/gallon for dense cementitious surfaces.
2. 2nd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
3. 3rd Coat: Two-component Polyester Epoxy.
a. DFT: 2.54.0 mils per coat.
Z. Concrete Floors(scheduled to receive sealer):
1. 1 st Coat: Primer.
2. 2nd Coat: Polyurethane Concrete Floor Sealer and Finish.
END OF SECTION 09900
r
09900-13 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 09960
WALLCOVERING
iPART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements,Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Vinyl wallcovering and wall fabric where shown on Drawings or in schedules.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Section 09900: Priming of gypsum board and plaster.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. Submit copy of fabric manufacturer's maintenance recommendations for care and cleaning of fabric,in accordance
with Section 01300.
B. Submit 12"x 12" sample of each type and color of vinyl wall covering to be used on this project,with the
maintenance recommendations.
C. Letter from wall fabric manufacturer approving installer to hang fabric.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver and store in manufacturer's original,unopened containers with legible and intact labels indicating brand
names,colors,patterns,fire hazard classification and quality designations. Do not open containers or remove
markings until materials are inspected and accepted by Architect.
B. Store fabric materials flat. Store in work spaces for no less than 48 hours before installation.
' 1.05 TEMPERATURE OF WORK SPACES
A. Insure minimum of 70 degrees F.and maximum of 90 degrees F.,72 hours before,during application and 48 hours
after application and minimum of 55 degrees F.thereafter.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 VINYL WALLCOVERING
A. General: First quality with each pattern and color from same run.
B. Vinyl:
1. Manufacturer/Pattem: Vycon Upbeat Maharan
2. Fire Resistance: This pattern meets the CFFA Quality Standard for Vinyl Coated Fabric Wallcovering. This
material has been tested for fire hazard classification in accordance with ASTM E-84 Tunnel Test.
r
09960-1 No.99132-CP2
3. Colors: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction. ,
2.02 ADHESIVES
A. Heavy bodied,water soluable paste containing mildew inhibitor and manufactured expressly for use with wall
covering ftmdshed.
2.03 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide in clearly marked,wrapped rolls one percent(1%)of each color and type of vinyl and fabric wall covering
used on this project for maintenance stock. '
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SUB-SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Do not start work until sub-surfaces have been corrected for roughness or unevenness and are thoroughly dry.
3.02 FABRIC APPLICATION
A. Use rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacturer.
B. Locate seams at least 4"from inside and outside comers. No horizontal seams will be allowed. Buttjoint tightly '
without gaps and overlaps.
C. Remove excessive adhesive from each seam as it is made and before proceeding to next.Clean with sponge
dampened with plain warm water and wipe with dry cloth insuring all adhesive residue is removed.
D. Leave installation clean and free of blisters,wrinkles,gaps or other defects. '
END OF SECTION 09960
i
1
1
1
09960-2 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
Specifications,apply to the Work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes: Furnish and install markerboards,tackboards,map rails where shown on the drawings.
B. Related work specified in other sections:
1. Wood blocking-Section 06100.
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submitted for approval by Architect, prior to fabrication. Indicate installation details, materials
used,quantity,location and size required. Refer to Submittals Section for submittal requirements.
B. Samples: Submitted for approval by Architect,prior to fabrication. Consist of 3 inch x 5 inch of writing surface
color,type;6 inch long piece of trim,chalk tray,map rail.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store sheet materials flat on blocking or supports to retain original shape.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 55°F. continuously from 24 hours before installation to 24 hours after
installation.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Assure adequate ventilation when using adhesives.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products specified are Alliance Wall. Equivalent products by Claridge Products are acceptable. Acceptable
' fabricators are W.E.Neal Slate,Claridge Products,Green Steel and Addendum 10.
2.02 MARKERBOARDS
A. Face Sheet
1. Up to 4 feet high and 16 feet long: One piece 28 gauge enameling steel with porcelain/ceramic finish fused to
steel sheet at a temperature of 1500°F. Finish to be Type A acid resistance.
10100-1 No.99132-CP2
2. Up to 5 foot high by 16 feet long: One piece 24 gauge enameling steel with porcelain/ceramic finish fused to ,
steel sheet at a temperature of 1500°F. Finish to be Type A acid resistance.
3. Color and Gloss: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Section 1-4 of Details of Construction.
B. Core Material
1. Units up to 4 feet by 16 feet: '/2" gypsum core with .001" aluminum foil balance sheet core with .001"
aluminum foil balance sheet.
2. Units up to 5 feet high: %Z"particle board core with.015 aluminum sheet. '
C. Assembly: Components to be pressure laminated (using a pinch roller). Laminating adhesive to be waterproof
thermoplastic contact cement.
2.03 TACKBOARDS ,
A. Materials: Narin Cork, 1/4"thick material consisting of homogenous colored,burlap-backed composition cork,not
sanded with a vinyl sealed,fully washable,stain resistant surface. Cork to have a flame spread index of 65(ASTM
E84). Laminated to gypsum board or other low density panel,thickness as needed to provide composite panel with
1/2"overall thickness.
B. Assembly: Components to be pressure laminated using a pinch roller. Laminating adhesive to be waterproof ,
thermoplastic contact cement.
C. Color: See Material Finish/Color Schedule,Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Perimeter Trim: #J-5 Sliptrim and 0-2 Map Rail with cork inserts,free of burrs,sharp edges.
B. Map Rails: #MT-2 with cork insert. Furnish metal map hooks,four per board.
C. Chalktray: #J-11 low profile,free of burrs,sharp edges.
D. Finish: See Material Finish/Color Schedule, Sections 1-4 of Details of Construction.
E. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for temporary support of markerboards and tackboards.
F. Anchors: As recommended by markerboard and tackboard manufacturer. '
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to installation, inspect supporting construction and grounds to assure reinforcement is sufficient for ,
installation of markerboards.
B. Check surface conditions to assure they are: '
1. Free from dust dirt or scaling paint.
2. Free from projections or depressions that affect smooth finished surfaces of markerboard.
10100-2 No.99132-CP2
' C. Verify that surface to receive trim is true and even to allow trim member to lie flat.
D. Do not proceed with installation until deficiencies are corrected.
' 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Keep perimeter lines straight,plumb,and level,and in plane of wall.
B. Form straight joints,balanced symmetrically,joints in markerboard and tackboard surface are not acceptable.
' C. Fit markerboard accurately and neatly around projections and outlet boxes.
D. Fit aluminum frames to precise hairline joints with no rough edges.
E. Secure boards to wall with adhesive and anchors appropriate for material boards are being installed on.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean units to original finish.
B. Replace damaged and stained units that cannot be cleaned,at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION 10100
10100-3 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A. Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and pertinent portions of Sections in Division One of these
' Specifications apply to the Work of this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
' A. Section includes: All fire extinguishers,and cabinets as specified and shown on drawings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. Brochure: Submit brochure of materials and installation details in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submittal to indicate location and quantities of all products.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Package,handle, deliver and store at the job site in a manner that will avoid damage. Damaged equipment will be
rejected.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. All equipment is specified from the line of J. L. Industries; comparable equipment of Elkhard Brass Mfg. Co.,
General,Noris,Larsen and Badger are acceptable. All fire extinguishers shall bear U.L.Label for type.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,CABINETS,BRACKETS,FIRE BLANKETS
' A. FE Type 1:Cosmic 10E,4A-60BC with No. 1017D12 Ambassador(semi-recessed in 8"thick walls or less).
' PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
' A. Install level and plumb,true to line and in accord with approved installation details.
B. Unless otherwise shown,install at 4'-6"from floor to top of cabinet,or to nearest horizontal masonry joint.
C. Check extinguishers for proper charge,operation.
D. Remove and replace damaged,defective or under charged units.
' END OF SECTION 10520
10520-1 No.99132-CP2
' DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION TABLE OF CONTENTS
For: ORONO MEDIA CENTER REMODEL
' Commission No: 99132
Date: March 21,2000
' The Contract Documents for this project include details and schedules printed on 8 1/2"x 11"sheets and bound in this
manual. The details and schedules are organized into broad categories of elements or systems of the Project. The details
and schedules are located in the category that best fits the intent of the detail. This system in no way tries to or implies to
' divide up details or schedules by construction trades or suppliers. Contractors and bidders bear the responsibility to review
all details and schedules to determine their scope of work.
Category: Num: Division: Sheets
' 1. GENERAL 1-1 ABBREVIATIONS,MATERIAL SYMBOLS 1 through 8
1-2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS Not Used
1-3 LINTEL SCHEDULES 1 and 2
1-4 MATERIAL FINISH/COLOR SCHEDULE 1 through 3
1-5 DEMOLITION Not Used
' 2. SITE WORK 2-1 SITE Not Used
2-2 LANDSCAPE Not Used
2-3 UTILITY Not Used
3. EXTERIOR 3-1 WALL Not Used
' 3-2 WINDOW/CURTAINWALL ELEVATIONS 1 and 2
3-3 WINDOW/CURTAINWALL DETAILS 1 through 3
3-4 LOUVER Not Used
3-5 ROOF 1 through 3
' 4. INTERIOR 4-1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Not Used
4-2 WALL TYPES 1 and 2
4-3 FLOORS,WALLS 1 and 2
' 4-4 CEILINGS 1
4-5 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1 and 2
4-6 WOODWORK,CASEWORK 1 through 9
4-7 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1 and 2
5. OPENINGS 5-1 DOOR/OPENING SCHEDULE Not Used
' 5-2 DOOR/FRAME TYPES 1 through 3
5-3 FRAME ELEVATIONS 1 and 2
5-4 FRAME MOUNTING CONDITIONS 1
' 6. VERTICAL CIRCULATION 6-1 STAIR,RAILING Not Used
6-2 ELEVATOR Not Used
' 7. SPECIALTIES 7-1 SPECIALTIES Not Used
DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION
wOLD ARCEMCM AND ENGINEERS
305 ST.PETER STREET
0ST.PAUL b
FAX: 612.223.5606 TEL• 612.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUM 500
ELGIN,II.60120
FAX:847.608.2650 TEL: 847.6082600
• ABBREVIATIONS •
CL Center Line
A CLG Ceiling
'
CLOS Closet
AB Anchor Bolt
ACOUST Acoustical CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe
CO Cleanout
ACT Acoustic Ceiling Tile CO2 Carbon Dioxide
'
ADI Adjustable CONC Concrete
AFF Above Fin.Floor CONST Construction
AGG Aggregate CONT Continuous
ALT Alternate CONTR Contractor
' ALUM Aluminum CONV Convector
ANCH Anchor CORR Corrugated or Corridor
AP Access Panel CPT Carpet
APPROX Approximate CR Cold Rolled
' ARCH Architect(ural) CRF Chemical Resisant Flooring
AV Audio Visual CS Course
CSK Countersunk
B
1 CSWK Casework
B BD Bulletin Board CT Ceramic Tile
B BLK Burnished Concrete Block Cu Cubic
BD Board
BFE Bottom Footing Elevation D
BLDG Building DEPT Department
BLK Block DET Detail
' BLK C Block Course DF Drinking Fountain
BLKG Blocking DIA Diameter
BM Beam or Bench Mark DIM Dimension
BOT Bottom DIP Ductile Iron Pipe
' BR Brick DISP Dispenser
BR C Brick Course DIST Distribution
BR L Brick Ledge DKG Decking
BRG Bearing DN Down
' BRKT Bracket DO Ditto
BSMT Basement DPG Dampproofing
BTWN Between DR Door
' C DS Downspout
DWG Drawing
CBD Chalk Board DWLS. Dowels.
C BLK Concrete Block
' C to C Center to Center E
CAB Cabinet E East
CB Catch Basin E PT Epoxy Paint
CEM Cement EA Each
CFM Cubic Foot Per Minute EF Each Face/Exhaust Fan
CG Corner Guard EHD Electric Hand Dryer
Cl Cast Iron EIFS Exterior Insulation and Finish System
' CIP Cast Iron Pipe EJ Expansion Joint
CIRC Circuit or Circumference EL Elevation(Vert.Dimension)
CJ Control Joint ELEC Electric(al)
' Printed 3/21100
SUBJECT: GENERAL-ABBREVIATIONS
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 1
' REVISIONS: REV DATE: I-1
DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION i
wOLD ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS
305 ST.PETER STREET
0ST.PAUL 2 55102
FAX: 612223-1646 TEL: 612.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUITE 500
ELGIN, L 60120
FAX: S47 6W654 TE1:847.6082600
' ABBREVIATIONS '
ELEV Elevation(Bldg.)Elevator GST Glazed Structural Tile
ENAM Enamel GYP BD Gypsum Board
' ENT Entrance
EQ Equal H
EQUIP Equipment
ETC Et Cetera H Hardener
' EW Each Way HC Hose Cabinet
EWC Electric Water Cooler HCAP Handicapped
EXH Exhaust HDBD Hardboard
EXIST Existing HDW Hardware
' EXP Exposed HDWD Hardwood
EXT Exterior HM Hollow Metal
HORIZ Horizontal
F HP High Point
HR Handrail or Hour
FA Fresh Air HS Handset
FB Face Brick HT Height
' FD Floor Drain HYD Hydrant
FDN Foundation
FE Fire Extinguisher I
FFAS Floor Finish As Scheduled
' FFE Finished Floor Elevation I Inside Diameter
FHS Flat Head Screw IF Inside Face
FIN Finish IH Intake Hood
FIXT Fixture IN Inch
FL Floor Or Float INSUL Insulation
FLRG Flooring INT Interior
FR Frame or Fire Rated INV invert
FRMG Framing
FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Panel J
FS Full Size JAN Janitor
FT Foot or Feet JST Joist
' FTG Footing JT Joint
FURR Furring
G K
'
KPI, Kick Plate
G Gas KD Knock Down
G BLK Glazed Concrete Block KO., Knock..0ut.
GA Gauge
' GALV Galvanized L
GB Grab Bar
GC General Contractor LAB Laboratory
GEN General LAM Laminated
' GI Galvanized Iron LAV Lavatory
GL Glass or Glazing LB Pound
GL BLK Glass Block LH Left Hand
GLU-LAM Glue Laminated LLH Long Leg Horizontal
' GPM Gallons Per Minute LLV Long Leg Vertical
GR Grade LOC Locate
GRV Gravity Roof Ventilator LP Low Point
Printed 3/21/00
SUBJECT: GENERAL-ABBREVIATIONS
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
' REVISIONS: REV DATE: Z-1
' DETAIL OF • •
WOLD ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS
' 305 Sr.PETER STREET
0ST. NIN22 55102
FAX:612.223.5646 TEL:
-6612.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SLATE 500
ELGIN,IL 60120
FAX: 847.608.2654 TEL:547.608.2600
• ABBREVIATIONS •
LWCB Lightweight Concrete Block P BD Peg Board
P LAM Plastic Laminate
' M P.TILE Porcelain Tile
PART Partition
MBD Markerboard PC Putty coatM/S Mirror with Shelf PERF Perforated
' MACH Machine PL Plate
MAS Masonry PL GL Plate Glass
MATL Material PLAS Plaster
MAX Maximum PLBG Plumbing
MECH Mechanical PLYWD Plywood
MED CAB Medicine Cabinet PNL Panel or Panelling
MEMB Membrane POL Polished
NET Metal PORT C Portland Cement
' MEZZ Mezzanine PROJ Projection
MFR Manufacturer PROP Property
MH Manhole PROT Protective
MIN Minimum PRV Power Roof Ventilator
MIR Mirror
MISC Miscellaneous PT(D) Paint(ed)
MLDG Moulding PTD Paper Towel Dispenser
PTD/R Paper Towel Dispensor&Receptor
' MM Miscellaneous Metal PVMT Pavement
MO Masonry Opening
MTG Mounting Q
MUL Mullion
N QT Quarry Tile
N North R
' NIC Not in Contract R Riser or Radius
NO Number RA Return Air
NOM Nominal RAD Radiation,Radiator
NSF Non-Slip Flooring RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe or Reflected Ceiling Plan
' NTS Not to Scale RD Roof drain
RDWD Redwood
O REC Recessed
' OA Overall REF Refrigerator
OBS Obscure REIN CONC Reinf Concrete
REINF Reinforced(ing)
OC On Center REQD Required
OD Outside Diameter RES Resilient
' OF Outside Face
OH Overhead REV Reverse(d)
RFT Rubber Floor Tile
OHM Overhead Motorized RH Right Hand or Relief Hood
' OPG Opening RM Room
OPP Opposite RO Rough Opening
OS Overflow Scupper RS Rough Slab
OZ Ounce RT Rubber Tile or Tread
' p RUB Rubber
RV Roof Vent
RWL Rain Water Leader
' Printed 3/21/00
SUBJECT: GENERAL -ABBREVIATIONS
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 3
' REVISIONS: REV DATE: Z-1
DETAIL OF • •
WOLD ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS
' 305 ST.PETER STREET
Do
ST.PAUL 55102
FAX:612.2735606TEL: 612.2.2 27.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUITE 500ELGIN,H.60120
FAX: 847.608.2654 TEL: 847.608.2600
' ABBREVIATIONS '
TYP Typical
S
' S South or Sink U
S BLK Sound Block UH Unit Heater
S ST Stainless Steel UNFIN Unfinished
' SA Supply air UNO Unless Noted Otherwise
SCHED Schedule UR Urinal
SD Soap Dispenser UR SCR Urinal Screen
SECT Section UV Unit Ventilator
' SF Sand Float
SH Sheet or Sprinkler Head V
SHLVG Shelving
SIM Similar V PLAS Vermiculite Plaster or Veneer Plaster
' SLD S Solid Surfacing VAC Vacuum
SLNT Sealant VAT Vinyl Abestos Tile
SLR Sealer VCT Vinyl Composition Tile
SND Santiary Napkin Dispenser VENT Ventilator
' SNR Sanitary Napkin Receptor VERM Vermiculite
SOG Slab on Grade VERT Vertical
SQ Square VEST Vestibule
' SRF Seamless Resilient Floor VT Vinyl Tile
SS Service Sink VTR Vent Through Roof
ST Steel VWC Vinyl Wall Covering
STD Standard VWF Vinyl Wall Fabric
' STOR Storage
STRUCT Structural w
SUSP Suspended W West or Wire
SW Switch W/ With
' SYM Symmetry or Symmetrical W/O Without
WC Water Closet
T
WD Wood
' T Tread WDW Window
T AND B Top and Bottom WF Wall Fabric,Wide Flange(Steel)or Wash Fountain
T AND G Tongue and Groove WG Wire Glass
T BD Tack Board WH Water Heater or Weep Hole
' TB Towel Bar WI Wrought Iron
TDE Top of Deck Elevation WP Waterproofing
TEL Telephone WR''` Water-Resistant'
TEMP Tempered,Temporary WSCT Wainscot
TERR Terrazzo WSP Weatherstrip
TF Troweled Finish WT Weight or Wall Tile
TFE Top of Footing Elevation WWF Welded Wire Fabric
TH Test Hole
THRES Threshold Y
TLT PTN Toilet Partition YD Yazd
TO MAS Top of Masonry
TOS Top of Steel
TPH Toilet Paper Holder
TV Television
' Printed 3/21/00
SUBJECT: GENERAL-ABBREVIATIONS
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 4
' REVISIONS: REV DATE: I-1
' DETAIL OF a •
TOM ARGIII1 M AM ENVGDBS
O 305 sr UL,N nm
55102
Sr PAUL,DIIV SS10Z
FAB: 651.223.5646 M- 651.227.7773
25 SOUIH GROVE AVENUE,SUM 500
' RM,L 60120
FAB: 847.6082654 7EL: 847.606.2600
' is Angle
o at
C� Center Line or Center
Channel
=
Equal
# Number or Pounds
It Plate
' ± Plus or Minus
(P Round or Diameter
111 Square Foot (Feet)
0 Phase
A Delta
' Q Ohm
° Degree
SUBJECT: GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS
' DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 5
REVISIONS A REV. DATE
' fh�I5D278Y5_ORONO\99D21DETAII.SVtoo5DY1G 8057 0 312V2000 o M10.7 o SM
I Amus
' DETAIL OF • •
V=ARCHOR is AM EMM
' 551M
5
Sr
0 305 F lAUlEB.PL,M55102
PAX 65121;1.5646 M- 651.22X7
25 SO=W=AMM MM 500
1 ww'b 60120
FAX 647.608.2654 M 647.6082600
DETAIL BOOK 2 DETAIL NO. ELEVATION
DETAIL REFERENCE SECTION NO.
' REVISIONS Q
MAJOR WALL & c�
BLDG. SECTION ROOM NUMBER A102
CEILING HEIGHT s-8"
N
' GRIDS 2 DOOR OR WDW.
SWING & NO.
BORROWED
INTERIOR 3 DETAIL N0. LIGHT A102L
ELEVATIONS 4-s SECTION NO.
OPENINGS HINGE SIDE
DEPRESSIONS
OR AS NOTED
WALL TYPES
' LARGE SHEET < 3
DETAIL REFERENCE
NOTES, DIMENSIONS EXTERIOR WINDOWS w
& DETAIL KEYS APPLY s worEs ABY
' STOREFRONT
FROM NOTED DETAIL
CURTAINWALL cwt
' MARKERBOARDS,
TACKBOARDS, LOUVER
' MAP RAILS
SUBJECT: GENERAL - 5YMWL5
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 6
REVISIONS A REV. DATE —�
sysnza�_oa►�r2oErnasvoovrni6 eosT c rzin000 o rz,o,e c sus
DETAIL OF • •
Worn AWff=M RM ffiWWW
' PST.W9L
305 FE 00buml
551M
ST. AL1L,11�Ai 55102
FA& 651.223564E M651.227.7773
25 RXIM 006 AVENUE,S=5O
mom,U,60120
Fe& 847.608 % TEL• 847.606.2600
\ \ \ o'10
EAR,}1
EARTH ROCK GRANULAR FILL SAND
c/VwARGm 'O v p� • v0 p '••Ov. '. v0 p O¢.
po.. 0'. . o• n b . ap top,
o O' .
CONCRETE TERRAZZO TOPPIW-7 WIRE MESH
MA 010
Z, / M m-
BLOCK BRICK CLAY TILE
METAL IleME . If 1z' L
FERROU5 ALUMINUM OTHER SMALL SCALE
WOOD 2
NOMINAL FINISHED PLYWOOD PARTICLE BOARD
WITH SIZE
STONE
MARBLE GUT STONE SLATE
IWA LATIONF2
BATT RIGID GRANULAR: LOOSE
SUBJECT: &EMB - 5YMBOL5
DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 7
REVISIONS A REV. DATE —�
5�i5D278�a_ORONO\99B2DETAQSV1007DYK WST O 32V2000 0 MOM O 55
1 1/01011212
DETAIL OF • •
W=ARMEMAN D ENiGIl M
Oft=-c"
305 sr.PLrL8Rbumi
a.PAUL,m 55102
_ FAX 651.2 01 -c" M.651.227.7773
Z5==GROVE AVENUE,S[A11;500
WW,b 60120
FAX W ft.Z% TEL• 847.6
PAMT701V5
METAL STUD WOOD STUD MA50NRY
BRICK & BLOGK GLAY TILE GAVITY WALL
e e
A (D CD CD 7
GLAZED OPENING GONGRETE GYPSUM TILE
MZZEWANEOUS
KXI
IXA
CERAMIC TILE QUARRY TILE AGOUSTIG TILE
0
0
0
0
10
PLA57ER ON METAL GYPSUM GLASS
LATH TILE
i
i
PREGA5T
GONGRETE
SUBJECT: GENERAL - 5Y7-BOL5
DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 8
REVISIONS A REV. DATE -�
S�t5D278�E"i_ORONDt9913Z1DETA8.5�1008DWG 8057 0 R=2000 0 12.$0,43 0 95
1 MOWS
DETAIL OF • •
avotn eaa�clsel�mvGn�s
0
ST.305 . PEfBxST PAIII,MN 5510251M
FAX 651.Zt3.5646 TEL: 651227.7713
25 S0=GROVE AVENGE,S=500
maw,U. 60120
FA& 847.6082654 TEL•847.608.2600
MASONRY LINTEL SCHEDULE - NON BEARING WALLS
' 12" Block 8" Block 6" Block 4" Block Clear Masonry Opening
2-#4 Bottom 2-#4 Bottom 1-#4 Bottom 1-#4 Bottom Non bearing wall up to 4'-0" span.
2-#5 Bottom 2-#5 Bottom 1-#5 Bottom WA Non bearing wall 4'-1" to 8'-0" span.
1. Fill lintel blocks solid with 3,000 P.5.I. concrete (3/8" maximum aggregate).
Minimum bearing for block lintels 8" on solid masonry. Locate control joints
beyond I inte I bearing.
2. Provide block lintels over all openings thru block walls not listed in steel
lintel schedule.
3. See details for types and locations.
4. Verify size and location of all mechanical unit ventilators, unit heaters, louver
and duct openings with mecohnicai contractor.
5. For all openings including mechanical and electrical through masonry walls,
provide per schedule unless noted otherwise.
6. Refer to structural drawings for masonry bearing wall lintels.
NOTE:
This schedule applies for masonry wall openings under the following conditions:
A. The height of masonry above the opening is at least equal to the clear width
of the opening.,
B. The width of the wall on each side of the opening is at least equal to the
clear opening width.
See 2/1-3 for lintels at openings not meeting these conditions.
This schedule may be used for any lintel in solidly grouted walls up to 8' span.
SUBJECT: C-A N- NL LINTEL. 5GHEOULE
DATE: 3/2V00 COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE -3
S,�ISD278�f5_C7tOM0�99B21DETh�S�DOO1DWCa BOST o 32V2000 012.10M o SUS
80i01A
DETAIL OF s f
TOM ARCBr=M RM ZMM
OL -w , 5510
ST..PP91,1,W55102
RM 65L223" W. 651.227.7773
25=M MONT AYRTM S=500
&M,L 60120
FAR: 547.608. % 110:. 847.608.2600
MISC. METAL LINTEL SCHEDULE - NON BEARING WALLS
Glear Masonry - 4" Wall b" W011 8' Wall 1'-0" Wall 1'-4" Wall
Opening
4'-O" or less 312" x 312" x (2)2k2" x 312" x (2)3$5" x 312" x (2) N 8x10 PLUS
5/16"L 5/16"L's 5116"l-'s 5116"l-'s -%' x15" PLATE
315" x 312" x (2.)214" x Ski" x (2)316" x 314" x (2) 5" x 311" x N 8x10 PLUS
5/ib"L 5/ib"/—,s 5/16"L's 5/16"L's -5fe" x15" PLATE
6'-0" 315" x 311" x (2)212" x 311" x (2)312" x 312" x (2) 5" x 311" x N 8x10 PLUS
5/1(0*/- 5/16"L's 5/16"L's 5/16"/—'s %' x15" PLATE
7'-0' 314" x 5" x (2)312" x 5" x (2012" x 5" x (2) 5 " x 5" x W 8x10 PLUS
5/16'/- 5AWI-'s 5/16"L's 5AWl-'s %" x15" PLATE
8'-0' 312" x 5" x (2)3%2" x 5" x (2)312" x 5' x (2) 5" x 5" x W 8x10 PLUS
5/16"L 5/ib"/—'s 5/16"L's 5/16"L'9 %" x15" PLATE
12'-0" N 8x10 PLUS N 8x10 PLUS W 8x10 PLUS N 8x10 PLUS
%" x5" PLATE V x7" PLATE V Al" PLATE " x15" PLATE
1. All lintels by miscellaneous metals.
2. Provide lintels over ail masonry openings not tight to deck, including duct openings.
Refer to Mechanical Drawings
3. Lintels not required for hollow metal door frames with concrete block openings
less tohn 2'-6".
4. Provide 8" minimum bearing each end, therefore clear opening plus 1'-4".
5. The lintel plate shall be centered in the wall. Edge of plate shall be minimum
5/16" from each edge.
6. The schedule above is a general schedule - see details for specific lintel conditions.
7. Refer to structural drawings for masonry bearing wall lintels.
SUBJECT: GENERAL LINTEL 5CHEDUL..E
DATE: 3/2V00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE �3
5AW27 S_oaoN0\99v21MAU5M3002DW. WST o arzV=*mms 0 sus
DETAIL OF • •
WOW AB.QHTBCIS&M MGM=
WOL
6 WEST U4 N 55102
Sf.PAUL,M[d 55102
PAX612.223.5646 TEL 612227.7773
� 715 TOLLGATE EOAD,SUM H
Kim L 60123
FAR 847.608.2654 TEL 847.608.7100
• 4 1/2"
lo
PROFILE A
NOTE-5: PROFILE5 ARE SHOWN TO
INDICATE KEY DIMEN5ION5.
GAUGE,CONSTRUCTION, THERMAL BREAK5,
REINFORCING AND ACCE55ORY 5HAPE5
ARE.NOT 5HOMI
SEE GLA55 TYPE5.
FRAME FfR0FILE5
311 = 1'-O/l
SUBJECT: 1NWOW ELEI/ATION5
DATE: 3121/00 COMMISSION NO: 9811$
REVISIONS REV. DATE 3-2
S.VSD378�ii_ORONO\991321DETA➢5�32001.DAG 9057 0 5f2V?A00 0 Dr1kS o SM
030N"
DETAIL OF • •
V=ABCEIIHCis AM MGM=
MPl 55103 SI'. f6im
® 305 . PETIT PAUL,
W L0 FA& 651.2239646 TEL: 651.237.7/73
� 25 SO=GflOVE AVRWE,Mn 500
ELOIN,IL 60120
FAX: 847.6082654 TEL 847.6082600
2
3-3
9'-3" VER
2"-,11EQ EQ EQ 2u
2" 2" �
N �
N
C�
3
3-3
SF1
2
3-3
10'-3" VER
f
2"-,,, EO EQ EQ
2" 2"
N 1
N 3-3
c�
w
O
3
5F2 3-3
SUBJECT: WINDOW ELE1/ATION5
DATE: 3l2V00 COMMISSION NO: WIS 2
REVISIONS L REV. DATE �,�-2
S��TSD27B�E5_ORON�\9962�DEiA9�h3200��VIC 8057 O 32tr"O O 12,1L24 0%5
DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION
30
PA 5 U=L
ST.PAM,MN 55102
PAX 651223." TEL 65LW.7773
W9L 25 SOUTH GROVE ANDWE,RM 5W
MARN,IL 60120
PAM 847.60&2654 TEL 847.606.26W
FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED.
SEALANT
ALUM. CLOSURE BY CURTAIN
NALL / STOREFRONT.
LINE OF BRICK BEYOND
711
SHIM. BACKER ROD & SEALANT
EACH SIDE.
................... ...................................
SILL DETAIL
SUBJECT: YqMOYq DETAIL5
DATE: WNW COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE 3-3
UMT 0 312V2=0 12-IU56*SS
j - - - iDETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION
wo1.D ARcxi11m Ala F.wmm
msr.p=unml
ST.PAIII,X155102
FA& 651.2735646 M. 6512277773
7151'OEi,CM ROAD,8181'8 a
EM'S S 6"
FAX 847.608.2654 178.: 847AN.26M
MTL GAP
NEW MEMBRANE
ROOFING UNDER
' MM GAP
3/4" TREATED PLYWOOD
MTL 5TUD W/ BATT IN5UL
J.
STING CURB
STING ROOF
OROOF PATGH GURB
j 1/2" _ ��-o��
SUBJECT: ROOF DETAIL5
DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE �-5
S.�UD2781E5_01?ONOl99D2�DETAIIS IDW6 8057 0 3/2712000 0 10.2&36 0 50
35006A
DETAIL OF • •
avot0 eRc[�crsA1�mvGR�s
0sos sr.PSf�S1R1�1'
S1:PAiA,Duv 55102
L0 FAX: 651.2;9.5646 1Fd.: 651.227.7773
715 TOUGH ROAD,SU1TB H
ELG1rT b 6012.9
FAR 847.608.26% M 847.608.2600
VARIE5
VENT STACK (SEE ME-CH)
ELA5TOMERIC SEALANT
~ y PREFORMED PIPE
FLASHING BOOT
STAINLE55 STEEL
Z CLAMPING RING.
O
PREFORMED PIPE
FLASHING BOOT.
MOP
ROOF SYSTEM
INSULATION THICKNE55
VARIES.
VENT THROUGH ROOF
NO SCALE
SUBJECT: ROOF DETAIL5
DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 Ko 2
REVISIONS Z� REV. DATE �-5
S,�SSD278�"a_OROtI0�9B21DETAaS J..DMY� B05T O 312 2120010 0 10.36.7 C 915
9WWA
DETAIL OF • •
cvaan eac�cTs erID avc�ts
551
0L 305PEP�SII�f
ST..PA1TL,114H 02
FA% 6512235646 W.
651.227.7773
m TOuam WIWI S=K
F clm,U.60193
FA& 847.606.2654 T6L• 847.608.2600
GALV. EQUIPMENT ANCHOR P EjY
MECH., LAG BOLT TO GURB Al
GASKETED WASHER.
WATERSTOP MASTIC
SHEET METAL GAP, SEAL ® ENDS.
ROOFING - CARRY OVER THE TOP
OF THE CURB, SEAL ALL SIDES.
z
I TREATED WOOD CURB. VERIFY
oREQ'D HEIGHT BASED ON INSUL.
C0 THICKNESS.
Q ROOFING SYSTEM.
_lf1 2 4 2 4
2 a 2 a GUT BACK ROOFING AND INSULATION
j 2 a 2 a TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF CURB
2 a 2 4 PATCH BACK INSUL AND ROOFING
BLOCKING AS REQ'D, SECURE
4 112" TO DECK.
MIN. EQUIPMENT CURB
MECH. EQUIP. & COVER BY MEGH.
OR BY EQUIP. SUPPLIER.
COUNTER FLASHING BY EQUIP.
SUPPLIER
ROOFING – GARRY OVER TOP OF
CURB AS SHOWN.
n > 0 COORD. DIMENSION W/ME-GH
BACK ROOFING AND INSULATION
TO'ALLOW"'FOR INSTALLATION OP GURB°
Q PATCH BACK INSUL AND ROOFING
�i TREATED WD. CURB & BOTTOM FE,
QSECURE TO METAL DECK.
} 2 6 CUT NEW OPENING, COORD. W/ MECH
1-71 1
PENETRATION CURB
SUBJECT: ROOF DETAILS
DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 3
REVISIONS A REV. DATE �-5
5,�i5p278�,_OROIi0�99p2�pE7A�5 DWG 8057 0 3AZZ42000 o 10-27.24 0 SS
35006A
WOLD ADID
0 > snw
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FA& 6%.2Z," W. 6%=.7M
25 S0UM W=AVZ4M W3 500
ffi.m,b 601m
FAR 847.608.2654 Tom: 847.608.2600
• • •
ROOF DEGK ( SIMILAR GONDITION
® CONCRETE ROOF )
` FILL VOID WITH INSUL. #8 & SEALANT
(® RATED WALLS USE FIRE-STOPPING
SYSTEM).
ALLOW FOR 1" ROOF DEFLEGTION
TOP OF WALL ® BOTTOM OF BAR
JOIST.
SEAL ALL VOIDS AROUND BAR
JOIST WITH INSUL. & SEALANT OR
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM AND
ADDITIONAL LAYERS OF GYP. BD.
AS REQUIRED.
` v ' ® TYPES #3 & 35 ONE LAYER OF
- GYP. BD. MAY BE OMITTED ABOVE
GEILING IF WALL IS NOT RATED.
SOUND BATT INSUL. #8 TO STRUGT.
TYPE #3A.
m STOP SOUND BATT INSUL. #8 ABOVE
- m CEILING @ TYPE #35.
O Lu
SOUND BATT INSUL. #8 ® TYPES
#3A & 35
GEILING AS SGHEDULED.
5/8" GYP. BD. BOTHSIDES OR
VENEER PLASTER AS SGHEDULED.
3/8" TAGK WALL FULLY ADHERED
I TO GYP. BD. AS SGHEOULED.
.I, METAL STUDS ® 16" O.G.
I
TYPE #3 15 NOT INSULATED.
I
I
TYPE #35 TO 4" ABOVE GEILING
4" NOM.
2 1/2" METAL STUDS 1 HOUR WALL A55EM13LY TO GOMPLY
5" NOM. WITH UL DESIGN - W415
3 5/8" METAL STUDS
7" NOM. 1NALL TYPES #3, 3A, 3$
6" METAL 5TUD5 1 1/2" = 1'-0
"
SUBJECT: WALL TYPES
DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE �-2
SNW27814 oRONo�99Ci2�DETAL5\42001DW6 WW 0 MOO=0 121232 0 SM
4200M
DETAIL OF • •
WQLD ARCHCIECIS AMID BNGII�S
0L 305 . HE ?5f 511
ST.PAUL,INN 55102
FA& 6512235646 M. 651.227.7773
25 S0==W AVMM SU11L+5W
' ELM,L 60120
FA& 847.6082654 M 847.608.2600
i
ROOF DECK OR FLOOR STRUCTURE
' PROVIDE FOR In MOVEMENT AT
ROOF CONDITION
REFER TO WALL TYPE #3 & 3A FOR
ADDITIONAL NOTES AT CONDITIONS AT
STRUCTURE. GOMPLY WITH UL DESIGN
REGUIREMENT5.
FIRE 5AFING 5EALANT
GEILING A5 56HEDULED.
' WALL FINI5H A5 SCHEDULED
1—HOUR SHAFT WALL A55EMBLY TO
GOMPLY WITH UL DE5IGN #0469
�4.-3" NOM !MALL T`YK'E #4
1 1/2" = 1'-0"
SUBJECT: WALL. TYPES
DATE: 3/2V00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS A REV. DATE �-2
5,\W27&\S_OPZtXVS9B2VffAUS\42002DM WST o 3/2V200o 0 MOW o 96
0402=
' DETAIL OF • •
WOW ARC==&ID ffiWOM
0 305F. esrffitsII=r
ST.PAUL,MIST 55102
W=Lg FAX- 651.2 ,%g m 6%=.7M
25 SOUGH GROVE AVEVA SUITB 500
mm,a.60120
FAg 847.608.2654 M 847.608.26
1
e
' FIRE EXTINGUISHER GA6INET
z
OLQ
0
w
SEMI RECE55ED F.E. GAB e GYP SD WALL-
N.T.S.
SUBJECT: PLOOR5/WALL5
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION N0: 99132
REVISIONS REV. DATE
SAM278\fS_pROW� BOST 0 UW2=0 12,12 49 0 SS
' DETAIL OF • •
aPora eRaffl$cls elm ffivcn�Es
WDLO
305 ST.PEIBRSTR m
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FA& 651.2235646 TEL: 651.227:7M
25 SOUTS GROVE AVENUE,S=500
i Sim,U,60120
FAX 847.608.2654 TEL: 847.608.2000
i
1
1
1
711 711
5/8" GYP. BD
ON METAL STUDS.
SEE FLOOR PLANS
FOR WALL TYPES.
lo
GO0 LUMNDETAIL
SUBJECT: FLOORS/WALLS
DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS REV. DATE 4-3
5V5D279V�ORONO\99132�DETAn5�43002.DWG
8057 0 3/21rz000 0 12.1259 o GUS
DETAIL OF • •
WOM AMffM=&M SOMW
O55102
305PE1ffit 5515
ST..PMR,Iii
FA& 651.22;5646 M 6512'17.7773
25 SO=MM AV10XVt S=500
5xv,L 60120
FAR 847.6082654 m 847.608.2600
FIELD VERIFY HEIGHT
AND WIDTH
EXI57IN6 PIPE
' 5/8" GYP. 50
ON METAL 5TUD5.
PROVIDE 24" x 24"
ACCE55 PANEL
FEILD VERIFY
LOCATION
0 COYER AT EX PIPE
3/4" = 1'-O"
i
1
i
SUBJECT: PLOOR5MAL.LS
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE q--3
B05T o 3/2V2000 0 @.8.11 o SW
DETAIL OF • •
woLv ARa�lacls erro ErrGn�s
'
wo 305 sr.Psrmesrn�r
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
PAX.- 651.M.5646 T& 651.7.17.7773
=L0 25 SOUTH GROVE AYMA SME 500
' WIN,b 60120
FAR: 847.608.2654 m 847.608.26
i
CEILING A5 5GHEOULED.
SEE GLC.
PLANS
SEE FLOOR
PLANS _
1/2" GYP. 50. ON 3 5/8" METAL
5TU05 ® 16" O.G. TO STRUCTURE.
SEE GLC. PLAN
GYP. BOARD SOFFIT
p` 1 v2°
i
' GEILING AS SCHEDULED.
' SEE GLC.
PLANS
1/2" GYP. BD. ON 3 5/8" METAL
STUDS ® 16" O.G. TO 5TRUCTURE.
' SEE REFLECTED GEILIW-7 PLAN FOR
GYP. BD. SOFFIT ELEVATIONS.
GYP. BOARD 5OFFIT
1 1/2" = 1'-O'•
SUBJECT: GfffLING DETAIL5
i DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE �-4
' S.\SV278115_ORONO\9%92\VUAQS44001D06 W T O'J/2V2000 O W%22 O SUS
440M
DETAIL OF • •
VOLD ARCFRTBM AND EKGDMW
' O 305 . UIP M 55102
ymi
ST.PAUL,bIIV 55102
M- 651.223.5646 TEL: 651.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AMA SUITE 500
'
MGM,L 60120
FAR 847.608.26% TEG: 847.608.2600
6A
' 4-6
' 5B 5A 6B 7 8
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6
OK ORO 5 T
A HEIG T
O
PEM OLn
EN N m
' A�114
RG.D=1'-O" STAFF SIDE
SUBJECT: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
' DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE
' SALSD2AM-9,4500UW, eo57 0 5212000 0 12.5A7 0 SUB
DETAIL OF • •
VOID ARM=AND ENGDOW
' 55102
0 305 sT FSPBR SMI
551M
STP. A1A,MFA$ 651.223.5646 W. 651.227.7773
Z SOUM GROVE AMM S=500
' am,a.60120
FAR 847.6 .2654 TSL: 847.608 2600
2 • •
4-b
' 2'-0"\11 2'-6" 3'-0"
O
t
WORKROOM-MEDIA
3
46
_
LOGK5
i
' 3'-O" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0
"
12'-O"
WORKROOM-MEDIA
SUBJECT: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
' DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS L REV. DATE 4—rj
' S-VSD27BL5K5P02j7)% 8057 0 3122000 0 12A U 0 SA
1DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION
worn ARCsni rs Alm
O305
Sr.FEM SIMM
Sr.PAUL,MN 55102
_
FAM 651273.5646 TEG: 651227.7773
WLD 25 SOVIET GROVE AVENUE,WU 500
' ELGIN,Z 601m
FAIL 847.6082654 TEG: 847.6082600
CA5E41ORK/MILLHORK GENERAL NOTES:
1 1. THIS IS AN INFORMATION SHEET AND IS INTENDED ONLY TO IDENTIFY THE
COMPONENTS OF CABINETWORK ON SUBSEQUENT DRAWINGS.
2. WHERE A 90 DEGREE CORNER OCCURS, EXTEND BASE AND OR WALL CABINET(AND
' ADJUSTABLE SHELVES AS THEY OCCUR) INTO BLIND CORNER.
3. ELECTRICAL OUTLETS ARE SHOWN AS THEY RELATE TO MILLWORK. COORDINATE/
SEE REGTRICAL.
' SCRIBE (1-3/4"WIDE MAX. SCRIBE
PER SIDE) IF OPENING I5 LARGER
THAN 3-1/20 ADD ANOTHER 3" TO
A GASENORK UNIT.
IADJUSTABLE SHELVES
HINGED DOOR
OPEN CABINET
X14 (FINISH ALL SURFACE5)
----_ —_--- LOCK
SINK (DASHED)
BAGK5PLA5H
L — — PANEL
DRAWERS -ALL EQUAL UNLESS
NOTED
PULL
2.1 011
' YlUOTH OF UNIT5
1
1 SUBJECT: INTERIOR R EVATION5
DATE: 3`21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE 4-(7
1 SAW27M.__ WST o 3/21==0 1Z%=0 95
' DETAIL OF • •
VOM ABCHnEM AM EMMM
O 305 51 P 11 9=ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FAB: 65L22-" YEL: 651=.im
25 SOUM MOVB AVE",SM 500
main,H,601
FAB- W.6062654 TEG: W.608.26
' 4
4-6 I
I
GEILING AS SCHEDULED.
' ' I U2" GYP. BD. /METAL STUD
3/4"
FRAMING ® 16" O.G.
i UNLE55 NOTED ON
REFLECTED CEILING
PLANS.
CABINET DOOR
I
I
I
' ADJUSTABLE SHELVES.
14 1/4" NTHOUT DOORS
p
151/4" !WITH DOORS CONT. 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING
' Q ® GYP. BD. WALLS
PLAM BACKSPLASH W/ SEALANT
Lu I ® WALL
Lu
N I 1 1/4" PLAM COUNTERTOP W/5EALANT
® WALL
EDGE OF GYP. BO. OR MASONRY
' InI PIER BEYOND AS OCCURS.
DRAWER WHERE OCCURS
(FIXED PANEL WHERE SINK OCCURS)
ADJUSTABLE SHELF
(OMIT WHERE SINK OCCURS).
- I
tCABINET DOOR
I
I BASE AS SCHEDULED.
23 1/4" WITHOUT DOORS
24 1/4" WITH DOORS
TYPICAL CA5EAORK SECTION
3/411
SUBJECT: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
' DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS L REV. DATE A
' s,vsnZ7eW9_ 'AIL-1~02DM eosr c 3121/2000 c M%36 0 sus
' DETAIL OF • •
WOW ARCH!=$.M ENGIlMS
030S ST. '5115102
Sr.P.ULUL711rQT 55102
_ PAR: 651.2235646 TIL 651.227.7773
25 SOUM GROVE AVR AAE,SMM 500
ELGIN,b 60120
FAR. 847.6082654 ML 847.600.2600
' CONT. 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING
® GYP. BD. WALL5
' z
O
31' DEEP STORAGE DRAWERS W/2
Lu PULL5 EACH.
Lu
BASE A5 SCHEDULED.
361/4" WITH DRAWERS J
5ECTION @ PAPER STORAGE
3/4" = 1'-O"
SUBJECT: 1NOOPHORK / CASEWORK
DATE: 3/2V00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 ✓
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE 4-(7
3.\7;dWS\i5__OPaV\"=\MADSW6003DW9 BOST O 3/21!2000 O p.14.46 O SM
4 604062112
' DETAIL OF • •
WOM ARCEMBM AM ENGINMW
9L30
. IRR NN
EI
ST.PAUL,IST 5510202
FAX 651.23.5646 TEL• 651.227.!73
25 SOUM GROVE AVENUE,SUITE 5W
ELGIN,II.60120
FAX 847.608.2654 TEL 847.608.2600
t NOTE:
CONTRACTOR TO SELECT APPROPRIATE DETAIL
DEPENDING IF CASEWORK HA5 FULL OVERLAY
tOR PARTIAL OVERLAY DOOR.
SOFFIT A5 DETAILED
PARTIAL OVERLAY DOOR.
' WOODWORK/CASEWORK AS DETAILED
DETAIL
19
SOFFIT
SOFFIT AS DETAILED
CONTINUOUS PLYWOOD SPACER
PAINTED BLACK BY MILLWORK.
FULL OVERLAY DOOR.
WOODWORK/CASEWORK A5 DETAILED
DETAIL @ SOFFIT
SUBJECT: DETAILS
' DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 4
REVISIONS Z� REV. DATE 4-(7
SAMD27BUAM6004DHG MST 0 3212000 O M14.W O 96
DETAIL OF • •
word A OMMAM ENGMM
' Oim
%
3os . rer�
sr.Paz,M55102
FAR: 651.2235646 M. 651.227.773
25 MM MVE AVMW,SM 500
' Km'n 6"
FAX s47.606 6% M- 8€7.6oB.M
9 3Z 1-1/4" P.LAM. COUNTER TOP
46
' 6"
DRAWER
I
I
I
I
DRAWER
DRAWER
'
11/2" X 1 V2" x 1/4" x 8"
X 18" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
ANCHOR TO INTERIOR STUD
SUPPORT.
SECTION GIRG. DESK
BASE AS SCHED.
PROVIDE INSET FOR 5EN50R
COORD. W/ OWNERS CART
PROVIDE BOOKDROP SLOT
GOORD. W/ OWNERS CART
1 1/4" P.LAM COUNTERTOP
' 9
P.LAM
46 1 1/2" X 1 V2" x 1/4" x 21"
X 21" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
— — — — ANCHOR TO INTERIOR 5TUD
6 I SUPPORT.
I I
I
' - II ELEC. OUTLET AND DATA GONECT.
I I
NOTE: COORDINATE ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT,AND,BOX,INSTALATION
WITH ELECTRICAL
' 1V2" X1V2" xWx8"
X 18" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
ANCHOR TO INTERIOR STUD
' SUPPORT.
P.LAM.
BASE AS 5GHED. M/4
TION �? GIRG. DE5K
1'—O"
SUBJECT: Y400DNMK/6A-SEPMK
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 5
REVISIONS L REV. DATE 4—(7
SM5V='t5_0PZNo\96 MST o 3/2tr"o 0 QW9 0 as
' DETAIL OF • •
WOLD ARCHITECTS&M ENGINM
'
WOL
305 ST.A L,NN ml
551m
sr.PAUL,I�T55102
FA& 651.223.5646 TEL 651.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENGE,SUITE 500
ELGIN,E. 60120
FAB: 647.608.2654 Tis4.: 847A&260a
9 1-1/4" P.LAM. COUNTER TOP
' 4-6
6 DRA ER
I
I
ADJUSTABLE SHELF
CABINET DOOR
' 11/2" X11/2" xV4" x8"
X 18" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
ANCHOR TO INTERIOR STUD
' SUPPORT.
BASE AS SGHED.
SECTION @ GIRG. DESK
A3/4"=1'-0"
9 1-U4" PLAM. COUNTER TOP
' 4-6
ti DRAWER
DRAWER
Lr
DRAWER
11/2" X 1 1/2" x 1/4" x 8"
X 18" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
' ANCHOR TO INTERIOR STUD
2ME SUPPORT.
SECTION @ GIRG. DESK
' BASE AS 5CHED. 3/4n=1.-0u
SUBJECT: 1N000WORMASEWORK
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 6
REVISIONS ,L REV. DATE 4-6
' SAM BMT O 3!21/2000 O 12.5A4 O 95
DETAIL OF • •
avoLv eaa;�crsenID mtciN�s
' 0 305x. N, SZZt im
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FAR 651.223.5646 1Pd.: 6%.227.7M
25 S0=W=AW=S=500
' WIN,IL 60120
PAR: 847.605.2654 Tie 847.608.2600
NOTE: ALL EXPOSED 5URFAGE5
TO BE P-LAM
1-1/4" P.LAM. COUNTER TOP
2-1/2" DIA. PLASTIC GROMMET
' (LOGATE EVERY 36" O.G)
3'-0" BETWEEN SUPPORT BRACKETS
U.N.O.
' N
----- — — -- -----------
23/4"
----------
23/4" 9
4-6
j ELEG. OUTLET AND DATA GONEGT.
NOTE: COORDINATE ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT AND BOX INSTALATION
' I WITH ELECTRICAL
� I
I
cv 1 U2" X 1 1/2" X 1/4" X 24"
X 18" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
L ANCHOR TO INTERIOR STUD
SUPPORT, NOTE T-SHAPED.
' < P.LAM.
' 13A5E AS 5GHED.
4
1
MEDIA GIRO. DE5K
1-1/2" = 1'-O"
SUBJECT: W00DA0RK/6A5Be MK
' DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE 4—(7
' 5,MSD27M-OPZN0\9920ETA9 SW60o7DA& WST o 32VWW o 128.59 0 Sr.
DETAIL OF • •
Worn ARCHIM s AM m ;MW
' O305PE18s5fR
Sr.PP90,MN 55102M
FAX 651.2735646 W.651.22%.7773
25 80UM MVEAVMW,SM 500
mm,a.6=
PAR: 847.608 % TBt:.847.6MZW
NOTE: ALL EXP05ED SURFACES
TO BE P-LAM
' 3/4" WIDE VERTICAL SUPPORT
24" O.G., TYP.
1-1/4" P.LAM. COUNTER TOP
4" m
2-1/2" DIA. PLASTIC GROMMET
(LOCATE EVERY 36" O.G)
BETWEEN SUPPORT BRACKET5
U.N.O.
N
----- —�— -- -----------
3/4" b„ i 23/49
I
4-6
I
ELEC. OUTLET AND DATA CONEGT.
NOTE: COORDINATE ELECTRICAL
j CONDUIT AND BOX IN5TALATION
m _ I KITH ELECTRICAL
� I
� I
N i 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/4" X 24"
X 18" STEEL COUNTER SUPPORT,
ANCHOR TO INTERIOR STUD
L SUPPORT, NOTE T-SHAPED.
P.LAM.
BASE AS SGHED.
4
MEDIA GIRO. DE51G
1-1/2" =
SUBJECT: HooVY IORK/OA5EHMK
DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 8
REVISIONS A REV. DATE 4-6
S,�ISD278�_ORONO\99B2�DETAIISM6008DWH 8057 0 3/212000 O 12,16.12 O SUS
OF • •
cvoLo eRcxizBclsen�ENGn�s
' 0 305 . M, s 5515
ff.PAUL,MN 55102
PAIL• 651.223.5646 M 651.227.7773
25 S0M GROVE AVENUE,=M 500
ELGIN,b 60120
PAS: 847.606.2654 TEL: 847.60&2600
P.LAM. COUNTER TOP
HARDWOOD EDGE WITH 1/W
CHAMFER
N
L_ J
N
' \ EXTENDED EDGE WHERE SHOWN
DESK EDGE
1
1
1
1
1
1
SUBJECT: NOODWORMA5EY ORK
r DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 r9�
REVISIONS REV. DATE 4-G
S,%MV27MM-0R0NM BMT o 3/212000 O W6.20 O SS
DETAIL OF • •
VOM ARCH[TECTS&M BNMMW
' 0 305 . 9,?S 5511
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FAX 651.223.5646 TEL: 651.227.7171
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUITE 500
HLGM,b 60120
FAX 847.608.2654 M 847.60&26M
TACKBOARD / MARKERBOARD GENERAL NOTES:
1. WHEN MARKERBOAR05 AND TACKBOARD5 ARE PLACED IN A SERIES,A CONTINUOUS
MAP RAIL SOULD BE PROVIDED OVER MARKERBOAR05 / TACKBOARD5 FROM
END TO END.
2. MARKERBOARD5, TACKB0ARD5 AND TACK5TRIP5 ARE TO BE CENTERED ON A WALL
OR WITHIN A SPACE TYPICALLY, UNLE55 NOTED OTHERWI5E. SEE INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS IN DETAIL SECTION 4-7 FOR TYPICAL LAYOUTS.
1
SUBJECT: VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
' DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE 4-7
' --\%02re\£s_oPM\99020UAUSw700LDWG BMT 0 504/20W o IZ*.30 O SS
DETAIL OF • •
WOMARaWWROMMEW
'
W9L
305 . AM,M nw
55102 ST.PAUL,S4V 55102
M- 651223.5646 TEL: 651.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUIM 500
' ELGIN,Z 60120
M- 847.6082654 TEL:847.608.2600
MAP RAIL @
TYPES #1 & #4
' ONLY.
O O O O
d d GHALK TRAY
DELETE ® TYPE W
' AND INDIVIDUAL
TACK BOARDS.
loll
N FINISHED FLOOR
4 BAND/VOGAL
4"THER INSTRUGTIONAL AREAS
' 2 OFFIGES/GONFERENC E5 MOUNTING TYPES
�t
1 TYP. GLA55ROOM
' SEF PLAN
6 � TAGKSTRIP MOUNTING �fEIGHTS
SUBJECT: VISUAL DISPLAY 50ARD5
' DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS REV. DATE 4-7
' $�t5D278�_Of�OWOl99B21DETAb54i7002DWG aMT O 321x1000 O 12ib38 O SUS
47001A
DETAIL OF • •
V=ARCFIlT M AND ENGBIM
S1:PAUL,MN 55102
W9L PAX 651.213.5646 M. 651.227.7173
25 swm GROVE AVENUE,s=500
' BLGIN,II. 60120
PAX 647.6082654 PBL 847.608.2600
' NOTE:
SEE DOOR SCHEDULE NOTES FOR
DOOR THIGKNE55.
' N DA5HED LINE INDICATES GA5ED
OPENING A5 OCG4R5 (5EE 56HEDULE)
A HEAD/JAMB ® DOOR
1
N
SEE GLASS
� rr� 3/4
' MULLION C9) DOOR
& BORROWED LITE
N
WE
G MULLION
' & BORROWED LITE
ACTUAL NOMINAL
(SEE 5GHED.)
VERIFY
1/2" W/ WALL WIDTH 1/2" 5"
5 3/4" 0
HEAD/JAMB/SILL
7 -9/411 8" D & BORROWED LITE
SUBJECT: FRAME / DOOR TYPES
DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE S-2
' S.�T50278�ORON0�99Q21DE7A�5�52001DW6 WST O 3/2V2000 0 IZ%.47O a*
5 2\05021211
' DETAIL OF • •
WOM Aacm WZ ANID ENGE!1=
a 305 sr.PS1101 SaMi
Sr.PAUL,W4 55102
PAX 651.2 -%% TEL: 6%=.7M
25 SOM COVE AVENUE,S=5M
Ew 11' am,b 60120
PA& 847.6082654 TEL: 847.608.2600
• •
z
O
' w GLA55
D
' z WOOD 5TOP5
Q-
O
WOOD DOOR
GLAZING AT 1N000 DOOR
' NON RATED
SUBJECT: FRAME / DOOR TYPES
' DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS Z� REV. DATE s.�-2
' S,�I5D278�Ea_ORON0�99B2�DETAL.5�52002DYV6
BMT 0 321/2000 0 12.16,56 0 5U5
5 2\05=26
' DETAIL OF • •
WOM ARCHnEM M UMM
'
W9L
305 . TX MS 551M
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FAX 651.22,35646 M 651.227.7773
25 SOUM GROVE AVMEU SUITE 500
' ELGIN,L 60120
FAX 847.608.2654 TEL 847.6 .2600
5 SGHED
O
GL
LuQn
� N
' N �
Q Q
O NOTE: O
' 1. GLASS OPENING SHOM REFERS
TO THE CLEAR FINISH OPENING - SEE 2 / 5-2
' 2. SEE DOOR 5GHEDULE FOR DOOR MATERIAL.
5 SGHED 5 SGHED
O
' GL
GLLu
v m
Q - Q
0 2
�G
CD
SUBJECT: DOOR TYPES
' DATE: 3/2VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 3
REVISIONS Q REV. DATE �-2
' S�i5D2781E�_oRONo�99D2�oETAa5�52oo3DWG 8057 0 312V20W o 12A7,5 0 SS
DETAIL OF • •
Quoin aBaM=AM EKMM
' O
30 511011
Sr. '
51:PAUU,DRAT 55102
FAX 651223 5646 W. 651.227.7773
25 SOUM MOVE AVM%RM%0
' mmk iL 60120
PAX: 847.608. % M- 847.608.2600
' 5EE FLOOR PLAN
11 2" A5 5GHED 2" 2" 5 5GHE02 EQ 2 EQ 2"
D Q
v v -
Q Q
i
' m
' 1
O2
O
' 5EE FLOOR PLAN SEE FLOOR PLAN
2" 5 5GHED2��ljlf EQ 211 E0 2 EQ 2" 2" 5 5GHED2-1\11/ EG 211 EQ 2"
� D
w w
Q - 4 -
' m m
ILI
CD
O
SUBJECT: FRAME EL VA17ON5
' DATE: WWOO COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS A REV. DATE �J-�✓
6,\r--P=\M-oRONOX99 2\MAII5\53OO1DYVs BOST o 3f2V2WO 0 1171733 0 S5
' DETAIL OF • •
TOM ARaMCM XM MM2M 5
' 0 305 . N,i ami
51m
ST.PALL,anv 55102
Ew 01FAR 651.2?," M 651.227.7773
25 SOM GROVE AVENGE,S=500
' ELGIDT,II.60120
FAX 847.608A% TEL: 847.608.2600
' SEE FLOOR PLAN
2" A5 SGHE EQ 2 EQ 2"
m N
m
' S
' 3'-2"
2" 2"
�r
m -
N
f(1
SUBJECT: FRAME R E1/ATION5
' DATE: 312VOO COMMISSION NO: 99132 2
REVISIONS ,L REV. DATE rJ-3
SVSD27BV5__ i0�99D2�DEiAIISlS3002DWG COST 0 30!2000 0 1247,58 0 SM
' DETAIL OF • •
worn eac�acls euro�c�s
' O
Sr.3or PB[BW 551!1'
ST.PAUL,MN 55102
W L0 PAR 651.2235646 M. 651.227.7773
25 SOUS MVM AM=MM 500
mama II. 601
PA& 647.606.2654 T& 847.608.2600
I : " PLA5TER WHERE 56HEDULED
I
I GYP. BOARD PARTITION
•• I
DOUBLE 5TUD5 ® JAMB
I I
" WALL OR CEILING A5 OGGUR5
N DOOR MOUNTED 2" FROM WALL AT
_' _ _ _ __ HINGE 5IDE UNLE55 OTHERWI5E NOTED ON PLAN.
METAL 5TUD ANCHOR
1 5EE SCHEDULE FOR FRAME WIDTH
1 JAMB
HEAD & SILL ® BORROWED LITE 5IM.
1
1
1
SUBJECT: FRAME MOUNTING GONDMON5
DATE: 3/21/00 COMMISSION NO: 99132
REVISIONS ,L REV. DATE ��-4
1 s,\1sv la i_ 605T O 3212000 0 121&14 0 SS